add-hook change
[bpt/emacs.git] / etc / NEWS
CommitLineData
d9c9b920 1GNU Emacs NEWS -- history of user-visible changes. 2000-10-12
424d8b44 2Copyright (C) 1999, 2000 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
a933dad1
DL
3See the end for copying conditions.
4
5Please send Emacs bug reports to bug-gnu-emacs@gnu.org.
3787e12e 6For older news, see the file ONEWS
a933dad1
DL
7
8\f
251584f3
DL
9* Installation Changes in Emacs 21.1
10
f4988be7
GM
11** Support for GNU/Linux on IA64 machines has been added.
12
424d8b44
DL
13** Support for LynxOS has been added.
14
1fa28578
GM
15** `movemail' defaults to supporting POP. You can turn this off using
16the --without-pop configure option, should that be necessary.
17
18** There are new configure options associated with the support for
163ea954
RS
19images and toolkit scrollbars. Use the --help option in `configure'
20to list them.
6344985d 21
d5483ab1 22** There is a new configure option `--without-xim' that instructs
d874e913 23Emacs to not use X Input Methods (XIM), if these are available.
5ed8d5af
DL
24
25** There is a new configure option `--disable-largefile' to omit
26Unix-98-style support for large files if that is available.
27
28** You can build a 64-bit Emacs for SPARC/Solaris systems which
60dd7e0e 29support 64-bit executables and also on Irix 6.5. This increases the
8628686a
DL
30maximum buffer size. See etc/MACHINES for instructions. Changes to
31build on other 64-bit systems should be straightforward modulo any
32necessary changes to unexec.
f4988be7 33
d9c9b920
DL
34** Note that the MS-Windows port does not yet implement various of the
35new display features described below.
36
e90813b8 37** This version can be built for the Macintosh, but does not implement
a7c13351 38all of the new display features described below. The port currently
e90813b8 39lacks unexec, asynchronous processes, and networking support.
d9c9b920 40
1fa28578
GM
41\f
42* Changes in Emacs 21.1
43
c607d53d 44** The new command M-x delete-trailing-whitespace RET will delete the
346598f1 45trailing whitespace within the current restriction. You can also add
c607d53d
SS
46this function to `write-file-hooks' or `local-write-file-hooks'.
47
4104194e
GM
48** When visiting a file with M-x find-file-literally, no newlines will
49be added to the end of the buffer because of `require-final-newline'.
50
c6f01e00
MB
51** auto-compression mode is no longer enabled just by loading jka-compr.el.
52To control it, set `auto-compression-mode' via Custom or use the
53`auto-compression-mode' command.
54
4c724b32
DL
55** `browse-url-gnome-moz' is a new option for
56`browse-url-browser-function', invoking Mozilla in GNOME.
57
b856f39c 58+++
068127d6
GM
59** The functions `keep-lines', `flush-lines' and `how-many' now
60operate on the active region in Transient Mark mode.
61
fd06c7da
MB
62** The header line in an Info buffer is now displayed as an emacs header-line
63(which is like a mode-line, but at the top of the window), so that it
64remains visible even when the buffer has been scrolled. This behavior
65may be disabled by customizing the option `Info-use-header-line'.
66
8ac08dea 67+++
62c273d7
DL
68** `gnus-user-agent' is a new possibility for `mail-user-agent'. It
69is like `message-user-agent', but with all the Gnus paraphernalia.
70
71+++
72** The recommended way of using Iswitchb is via the new global minor
73mode `iswitchb-mode'.
74
8ac08dea 75+++
f393cf90
DL
76** Gnus changes.
77
78The Gnus NEWS entries are short, but they reflect sweeping changes in
79four areas: Article display treatment, MIME treatment,
80internationalization and mail-fetching.
81
82*** The mail-fetching functions have changed. See the manual for the
83many details. In particular, all procmail fetching variables are gone.
84
85If you used procmail like in
86
87(setq nnmail-use-procmail t)
88(setq nnmail-spool-file 'procmail)
89(setq nnmail-procmail-directory "~/mail/incoming/")
90(setq nnmail-procmail-suffix "\\.in")
91
327652be 92this now has changed to
f393cf90
DL
93
94(setq mail-sources
95 '((directory :path "~/mail/incoming/"
96 :suffix ".in")))
97
98More information is available in the info doc at Select Methods ->
99Getting Mail -> Mail Sources
100
101*** Gnus is now a MIME-capable reader. This affects many parts of
102Gnus, and adds a slew of new commands. See the manual for details.
4301cf66
DL
103Separate MIME packages like RMIME, SEMI, mime-compose etc., will
104probably no longer work; remove them and use the native facilities.
f393cf90 105
60dd7e0e 106*** Gnus has also been multilingualized. This also affects too many
4301cf66
DL
107parts of Gnus to summarize here, and adds many new variables. There
108are built-in facilities equivalent to those of gnus-mule.el, which is
109now just a compatibility layer.
f393cf90
DL
110
111*** gnus-auto-select-first can now be a function to be
112called to position point.
113
114*** The user can now decide which extra headers should be included in
115summary buffers and NOV files.
116
117*** `gnus-article-display-hook' has been removed. Instead, a number
118of variables starting with `gnus-treat-' have been added.
119
120*** The Gnus posting styles have been redone again and now work in a
121subtly different manner.
122
123*** New web-based backends have been added: nnslashdot, nnwarchive
124and nnultimate. nnweb has been revamped, again, to keep up with
125ever-changing layouts.
126
127*** Gnus can now read IMAP mail via nnimap.
128
72190b84 129*** There is image support of various kinds and some sound support.
f393cf90
DL
130
131** When your terminal can't display characters from some of the ISO
d1e68bce
DL
1328859 character sets but can display Latin-1, you can display
133more-or-less mnemonic sequences of ASCII/Latin-1 characters instead of
134empty boxes (under a window system) or question marks (not under a
135window system). Customize the option `latin1-display' to turn this
136on.
137
ba9eeda1
GM
138** The new user-option `find-file-suppress-same-file-warnings' can be
139set to suppress warnings ``X and Y are the same file'' when visiting a
140file that is already visited under a different name.
141
42ac0ae5
GM
142** The new user-option `electric-help-shrink-window' can be set to
143nil to prevent adjusting the help window size to the buffer size.
144
145** Emacs now checks for recursive loads of Lisp files. If the
146recursion depth exceeds `recursive-load-depth-limit', an error is
147signaled.
148
ba9eeda1 149** The Strokes package has been updated. If your Emacs has XPM
dab96841
DL
150support, you can use it for pictographic editing. In Strokes mode,
151use C-mouse-2 to compose a complex stoke and insert it into the
152buffer. You can encode or decode a strokes buffer with new commands
153M-x strokes-encode-buffer and M-x strokes-decode-buffer. There is a
154new command M-x strokes-list-strokes.
155
b941a14b 156+++
ba9eeda1 157** New command M-x describe-character-set reads a character set name
eb27839a 158and displays information about that.
b941a14b 159
ba9eeda1 160** When an error is signaled during the loading of the user's init
83b6997f
GM
161file, Emacs now pops up the *Messages* buffer.
162
d7b38c05 163** Polish and German translations of Emacs' reference card have been
6917e6bb 164added. They are named `pl-refcard.tex' and `de-refcard.tex'.
d7b38c05
GM
165Postscript files are included.
166
167** A reference card for Dired has been added. Its name is
168`dired-ref.tex'.
169
25ad1371
GM
170** The new variable `auto-mode-interpreter-regexp' contains a regular
171expression matching interpreters, for file mode determination.
172
173This regular expression is matched against the first line of a file to
174determine the file's mode in `set-auto-mode' when Emacs can't deduce a
175mode from the file's name. If it matches, the file is assumed to be
176interpreted by the interpreter matched by the second group of the
177regular expression. The mode is then determined as the mode
178associated with that interpreter in `interpreter-mode-alist'.
179
b856f39c 180+++
f0298744
DL
181** C-down-mouse-3 is bound differently. Now if the menu bar is not
182displayed it pops up a menu containing the items which would be on the
183menu bar. If the menu bar is displayed, it pops up the major mode
184menu or the Edit menu if there is no major mode menu.
185
9a8d84ca
DL
186** Variable `load-path' is no longer customizable because it contains
187a version-dependent component.
188
d76c03ea
GM
189** The <delete> function key is now bound to `delete-char' by default.
190Note that this takes effect only on window systems. On TTYs, Emacs
191will receive ASCII 127 when the DEL key is pressed. This
192character is still bound as before.
193
3b4fa1b2
DL
194** Item Save Options on the Options menu allows saving options set
195using that menu.
196
40e857ea 197** New function executable-make-buffer-file-executable-if-script-p is
424d8b44 198suitable as an after-save-hook as an alternative to `executable-chmod'.
40e857ea 199
beb2eb00 200+++
c08398de
DL
201** The most preferred coding-system is now used to save a buffer if
202buffer-file-coding-system is `undecided' and it is safe for the buffer
203contents. (The most preferred is set by set-language-environment or
204by M-x prefer-coding-system.) Thus if you visit an ASCII file and
205insert a non-ASCII character from your current language environment,
206the file will be saved silently with the appropriate coding.
207Previously you would be prompted for a safe coding system.
208
db7a3ede 209+++
3d6cd763
GM
210** New variable `inhibit-iso-escape-detection' determines if Emacs'
211coding system detection algorithm should pay attention to ISO2022's
212escape sequences. If this variable is non-nil, the algorithm ignores
213such escape sequences. The default value is nil, and it is
214recommended not to change it except for the special case that you
07b14857 215always want to read any escape code verbatim. If you just want to
3d6cd763 216read a specific file without decoding escape codes, use C-x RET c
07b14857
KH
217(`universal-coding-system-argument'). For instance, C-x RET c latin-1
218RET C-x C-f filename RET.
26ae8525 219
0b8a3a6d
DL
220** Variable `default-korean-keyboard' is initialized properly from the
221environment variable `HANGUL_KEYBOARD_TYPE'.
222
424d8b44 223+++
0b8a3a6d
DL
224** C-u C-x = provides detailed information about the character at
225point in a pop-up window.
226
6d35b49f 227+++
0b8a3a6d
DL
228** New command M-x list-charset-chars reads a character set name and
229displays all characters in that character set.
230
231** M-x set-terminal-coding-system (C-x RET t) now allows CCL-based
232coding systems such as cpXXX and cyrillic-koi8.
233
a4067978 234+++
5cb6a58e 235** M-; now calls comment-dwim which tries to do something clever based
a4067978 236on the context. M-x kill-comment is now an alias to comment-kill,
a5e350c9
SM
237defined in newcomment.el. You can choose different styles of region
238commenting with the variable `comment-style'.
5cb6a58e 239
424d8b44 240+++
a1b8d58b
GM
241** The function `getenv' is now callable interactively.
242
6e417ca5
DL
243** The many obsolete language `setup-...-environment' commands have
244been removed -- use `set-language-environment'.
245
424d8b44 246+++
5898e075
DL
247** New user options `display-time-mail-face' and
248`display-time-use-mail-icon' control the appearance of mode-line mail
249indicator used by the display-time package. On a suitable display the
250indicator can be an icon and is mouse-sensitive.
251
424d8b44 252+++
abfcc168
GM
253** Emacs' auto-save list files are now by default stored in a
254sub-directory `.emacs.d/auto-save-list/' of the user's home directory.
874d1079 255(On MS-DOS, this subdirectory's name is `_emacs.d/auto-save.list/'.)
abfcc168
GM
256You can customize `auto-save-list-prefix' to change this location.
257
424d8b44 258+++
cc181e95
GM
259** On window-systems, additional space can be put between text lines
260on the display using several methods
261
424d8b44 262+++
cc181e95
GM
263- By setting frame parameter `line-spacing' to PIXELS. PIXELS must be
264a positive integer, and specifies that PIXELS number of pixels should
265be put below text lines on the affected frame or frames.
266
424d8b44 267+++
cc181e95 268- By setting X resource `lineSpacing', class `LineSpacing'. This is
5820dead 269equivalent to specifying the frame parameter.
cc181e95 270
da4496b6 271- By specifying `--line-spacing=N' or `-lsp N' on the command line.
cc181e95
GM
272
273- By setting buffer-local variable `line-spacing'. The meaning is
274the same, but applies to the a particular buffer only.
275
424d8b44 276+++
3b4fa1b2 277** The new command `clone-indirect-buffer' can be used to create
1c459486 278an indirect buffer that is a twin copy of the current buffer. The
3b4fa1b2 279command `clone-indirect-buffer-other-window', bound to C-x 4 c,
1c459486 280does the same but displays the indirect buffer in another window.
0daee095 281
424d8b44 282+++
176256a1 283** New user options `backup-directory-alist' and
3bbc50af
DL
284`make-backup-file-name-function' control the placement of backups,
285typically in a single directory or in an invisible sub-directory.
176256a1 286
dd0add8e
DL
287** New commands iso-iso2sgml and iso-sgml2iso convert between Latin-1
288characters and the corresponding SGML (HTML) entities.
289
bf3ba9ac 290+++
699238d9
GM
291** Emacs now refuses to load compiled Lisp files which weren't
292compiled with Emacs. Set `load-dangerous-libraries' to t to change
293this behavior.
294
295The reason for this change is an incompatible change in XEmacs' byte
296compiler. Files compiled with XEmacs can contain byte codes that let
297Emacs dump core.
298
424d8b44 299+++
699238d9 300** New X resources recognized
100b3cbb 301
7233c5bd
GM
302*** The X resource `synchronous', class `Synchronous', specifies
303whether Emacs should run in synchronous mode. Synchronous mode
304is useful for debugging X problems.
305
306Example:
307
699238d9 308 emacs.synchronous: true
7233c5bd 309
100b3cbb
GM
310*** The X resource `visualClass, class `VisualClass', specifies the
311visual Emacs should use. The resource's value should be a string of
312the form `CLASS-DEPTH', where CLASS is the name of the visual class,
313and DEPTH is the requested color depth as a decimal number. Valid
314visual class names are
315
316 TrueColor
317 PseudoColor
318 DirectColor
319 StaticColor
320 GrayScale
321 StaticGray
322
323Visual class names specified as X resource are case-insensitive, i.e.
324`pseudocolor', `Pseudocolor' and `PseudoColor' all have the same
325meaning.
326
327The program `xdpyinfo' can be used to list the visual classes
328supported on your display, and which depths they have. If
329`visualClass' is not specified, Emacs uses the display's default
330visual.
331
332Example:
333
699238d9 334 emacs.visualClass: TrueColor-8
100b3cbb
GM
335
336*** The X resource `privateColormap', class `PrivateColormap',
337specifies that Emacs should use a private colormap if it is using the
338default visual, and that visual is of class PseudoColor. Recognized
339resource values are `true' or `on'.
340
341Example:
342
699238d9 343 emacs.privateColormap: true
100b3cbb 344
0d0c76b8
EZ
345** The menu bar configuration has changed. The new configuration is
346more CUA-compliant. The most significant change is that Options is
347now a separate menu-bar item, with Mule and Customize as its submenus.
348
42088c12 349** User-option `show-cursor-in-non-selected-windows' controls how to
c60ea02e 350display the cursor in non-selected windows. If nil, no cursor is
42088c12
GM
351shown, if non-nil a hollow box cursor is shown. This option can
352be customized.
c60ea02e 353
424d8b44 354+++
31047e0d
DL
355** The variable `echo-keystrokes' may now have a floating point value.
356
424d8b44 357+++
b02786f9
GM
358** C-x 5 1 runs the new command delete-other-frames which deletes
359all frames except the selected one.
360
3261c1d8
DL
361** If your init file is compiled (.emacs.elc), `user-init-file' is set
362to the source name (.emacs.el), if that exists, after loading it.
363
ffe36136 364** The help string specified for a menu-item whose definition contains
aa78a4f3
EZ
365the property `:help HELP' is now displayed under X, on MS-Windows, and
366MS-DOS, either in the echo area or with tooltips. Many standard menus
367displayed by Emacs now have help strings.
368
0292b49f 369+++
aa78a4f3
EZ
370** Highlighting of mouse-sensitive regions is now supported in the
371MS-DOS version of Emacs.
ffe36136 372
559cee90
DL
373** New user option `read-mail-command' specifies a command to use to
374read mail from the menu etc.
375
480b5773 376+++
271b4185
GM
377** Hexl contains a new command `hexl-insert-hex-string' which inserts
378a string of hexadecimal numbers read from the mini-buffer.
379
0daee095
GM
380** Changes in Texinfo mode.
381
a5e350c9 382*** A couple of new key bindings have been added for inserting Texinfo
0daee095
GM
383macros
384
385 Key binding Macro
386 -------------------------
387 C-c C-c C-s @strong
388 C-c C-c C-e @emph
105602b1 389 C-c C-c u @uref
0daee095 390 C-c C-c q @quotation
105602b1 391 C-c C-c m @email
a5e350c9
SM
392 C-c C-o @<block> ... @end <block>
393 M-RET @item
394
395*** The " key now inserts either " or `` or '' depending on context.
0daee095 396
559cee90
DL
397** Changes in Outline mode.
398
399There is now support for Imenu to index headings. A new command
400`outline-headers-as-kill' copies the visible headings in the region to
401the kill ring, e.g. to produce a table of contents.
402
327652be 403** Changes to Emacs Server
7a912f63 404
c0a8c108
EZ
405+++
406*** The new option `server-kill-new-buffers' specifies what to do
7a912f63
GM
407with buffers when done with them. If non-nil, the default, buffers
408are killed, unless they were already present before visiting them with
409Emacs Server. If nil, `server-temp-file-regexp' specifies which
410buffers to kill, as before.
411
412Please note that only buffers are killed that still have a client,
c0a8c108 413i.e. buffers visited with `emacsclient --no-wait' are never killed in
7a912f63
GM
414this way.
415
956777b3
GM
416** Changes to Show Paren mode.
417
418*** Overlays used by Show Paren mode now use a priority property.
419The new user option show-paren-priority specifies the priority to
420use. Default is 1000.
421
f6989277 422+++
404fa7d6
DL
423** New command M-x check-parens can be used to find unbalanced paren
424groups and strings in buffers in Lisp mode (or other modes).
425
424d8b44
DL
426+++
427** You can now easily create new *Info* buffers using either
428M-x clone-buffer, C-u m <entry> RET or C-u g <entry> RET.
429M-x clone-buffer can also be used on *Help* and several other special
430buffers.
8964fec7 431
424d8b44 432+++
39783d73
WP
433** Emacs can now support 'wheeled' mice (such as the MS IntelliMouse)
434under XFree86. To enable this, simply put (mwheel-install) in your
435.emacs file.
436
437The variables `mwheel-follow-mouse' and `mwheel-scroll-amount'
438determine where and by how much buffers are scrolled.
439
d35fce81
GM
440** Listing buffers with M-x list-buffers (C-x C-b) now shows
441abbreviated file names. Abbreviations can be customized by changing
442`directory-abbrev-alist'.
443
a933dad1
DL
444** Faces and frame parameters.
445
446There are four new faces `scroll-bar', `border', `cursor' and `mouse'.
447Setting the frame parameters `scroll-bar-foreground' and
448`scroll-bar-background' sets foreground and background color of face
449`scroll-bar' and vice versa. Setting frame parameter `border-color'
450sets the background color of face `border' and vice versa. Likewise
451for frame parameters `cursor-color' and face `cursor', and frame
452parameter `mouse-color' and face `mouse'.
453
454Changing frame parameter `font' sets font-related attributes of the
455`default' face and vice versa. Setting frame parameters
79214ddf 456`foreground-color' or `background-color' sets the colors of the
a933dad1
DL
457`default' face and vice versa.
458
d80061fa 459+++
f77a4a8a
GM
460** New face `menu'.
461
462The face `menu' can be used to change colors and font of Emacs' menus.
463Setting the font of LessTif/Motif menus is currently not supported;
464attempts to set the font are ignored in this case.
465
424d8b44 466+++
a933dad1
DL
467** New frame parameter `screen-gamma' for gamma correction.
468
469The new frame parameter `screen-gamma' specifies gamma-correction for
470colors. Its value may be nil, the default, in which case no gamma
471correction occurs, or a number > 0, usually a float, that specifies
472the screen gamma of a frame's display.
473
474PC monitors usually have a screen gamma of 2.2. smaller values result
475in darker colors. You might want to try a screen gamma of 1.5 for LCD
476color displays. The viewing gamma Emacs uses is 0.4545. (1/2.2).
477
478The X resource name of this parameter is `screenGamma', class
479`ScreenGamma'.
480
481** Emacs has a new redisplay engine.
482
483The new redisplay handles characters of variable width and height.
484Italic text can be used without redisplay problems. Fonts containing
485oversized characters, i.e. characters larger than the logical height
486of a font can be used. Images of various formats can be displayed in
487the text.
488
489** Emacs has a new face implementation.
490
491The new faces no longer fundamentally use X font names to specify the
492font. Instead, each face has several independent attributes--family,
493height, width, weight and slant--that it may or may not specify.
494These attributes can be merged from various faces, and then together
495specify a font.
496
497Faces are supported on terminals that can display color or fonts.
498These terminal capabilities are auto-detected. Details can be found
499under Lisp changes, below.
500
501** New default font is Courier 12pt.
502
424d8b44
DL
503+++
504** When using a windowing terminal, each Emacs window now has a cursor
505of its own. When the window is selected, the cursor is solid;
506otherwise, it is hollow.
a933dad1
DL
507
508** Bitmap areas to the left and right of windows are used to display
509truncation marks, continuation marks, overlay arrows and alike. The
510foreground, background, and stipple of these areas can be changed by
511customizing face `fringe'.
512
8d0f00fd
MB
513** The mode line under X is now drawn with shadows by default.
514You can change its appearance by modifying the face `mode-line'.
515
516The variable `mode-line-inverse-video', which was used in older
517versions of emacs to make the mode-line stand out, now defaults to nil,
518and its use is deprecated.
a933dad1
DL
519
520** LessTif support.
521
424d8b44
DL
522Emacs now runs with the LessTif toolkit (see <http://www.lesstif.org>).
523You will need a version 0.88.1 or later.
a933dad1
DL
524
525** Toolkit scroll bars.
526
527Emacs now uses toolkit scrollbars if available. When configured for
528LessTif/Motif, it will use that toolkit's scrollbar. Otherwise, when
529configured for Lucid and Athena widgets, it will use the Xaw3d scroll
530bar if Xaw3d is available. You can turn off the use of toolkit scroll
531bars by specifying `--with-toolkit-scroll-bars=no' when configuring
532Emacs.
533
534When you encounter problems with the Xaw3d scroll bar, watch out how
535Xaw3d is compiled on your system. If the Makefile generated from
536Xaw3d's Imakefile contains a `-DNARROWPROTO' compiler option, and your
537Emacs system configuration file `s/your-system.h' does not contain a
538define for NARROWPROTO, you might consider adding it. Take
539`s/freebsd.h' as an example.
540
541Alternatively, if you don't have access to the Xaw3d source code, take
542a look at your system's imake configuration file, for example in the
543directory `/usr/X11R6/lib/X11/config' (paths are different on
544different systems). You will find files `*.cf' there. If your
545system's cf-file contains a line like `#define NeedWidePrototypes NO',
546add a `#define NARROWPROTO' to your Emacs system configuration file.
547
548The reason for this is that one Xaw3d function uses `double' or
549`float' function parameters depending on the setting of NARROWPROTO.
550This is not a problem when Imakefiles are used because each system's
551image configuration file contains the necessary information. Since
552Emacs doesn't use imake, this has do be done manually.
553
554** Toggle buttons and radio buttons in menus.
555
556When compiled with LessTif (or Motif) support, Emacs uses toolkit
557widgets for radio and toggle buttons in menus. When configured for
558Lucid, Emacs draws radio buttons and toggle buttons similar to Motif.
559
424d8b44 560+++
a933dad1
DL
561** Highlighting of trailing whitespace.
562
563When `show-trailing-whitespace' is non-nil, Emacs displays trailing
564whitespace in the face `trailing-whitespace'. Trailing whitespace is
565defined as spaces or tabs at the end of a line. To avoid busy
566highlighting when entering new text, trailing whitespace is not
567displayed if point is at the end of the line containing the
568whitespace.
569
6e612d4d 570+++
a933dad1
DL
571** Busy-cursor.
572
573Emacs can optionally display a busy-cursor under X. You can turn the
574display on or off by customizing group `cursor'.
575
424d8b44 576+++
a933dad1
DL
577** Blinking cursor
578
579M-x blink-cursor-mode toggles a blinking cursor under X and on
580terminals having terminal capabilities `vi', `vs', and `ve'. Blinking
581and related parameters like frequency and delay can be customized in
582the group `cursor'.
583
8ac08dea 584+++
a933dad1
DL
585** New font-lock support mode `jit-lock-mode'.
586
587This support mode is roughly equivalent to `lazy-lock' but is
588generally faster. It supports stealth and deferred fontification.
589See the documentation of the function `jit-lock-mode' for more
590details.
591
592Font-lock uses jit-lock-mode as default support mode, so you don't
593have to do anything to activate it.
594
595** Tabs and variable-width text.
596
597Tabs are now displayed with stretch properties; the width of a tab is
598defined as a multiple of the normal character width of a frame, and is
599independent of the fonts used in the text where the tab appears.
600Thus, tabs can be used to line up text in different fonts.
601
602** Enhancements of the Lucid menu bar
603
424d8b44 604+++
a933dad1
DL
605*** The Lucid menu bar now supports the resource "margin".
606
607 emacs.pane.menubar.margin: 5
608
79dd1637
RS
609The default margin is 4 which makes the menu bar appear like the
610LessTif/Motif one.
a933dad1 611
79dd1637
RS
612*** Arrows that indicate sub-menus are now drawn with shadows, as in
613LessTif and Motif.
a933dad1 614
34d90e29 615+++
a933dad1
DL
616** Hscrolling in C code.
617
cc181e95
GM
618Horizontal scrolling now happens automatically if
619`automatic-hscrolling' is set (the default). This setting can be
620customized.
a933dad1 621
8ac08dea 622+++
a933dad1
DL
623** Tool bar support.
624
625Emacs supports a tool bar at the top of a frame under X. For details
d9c9b920
DL
626of how to define a tool bar, see the page describing Lisp-level
627changes. Tool-bar global minor mode controls whether or not it is
8628686a
DL
628displayed and is on by default. To make the tool bar more useful, we
629need contributions of extra icons for specific modes (with copyright
630assignments).
a933dad1 631
424d8b44 632+++
a933dad1
DL
633** Mouse-sensitive mode line.
634
635Different parts of the mode line under X have been made
636mouse-sensitive. Moving the mouse to a mouse-sensitive part in the mode
637line changes the appearance of the mouse pointer to an arrow, and help
638about available mouse actions is displayed either in the echo area, or
639in the tooltip window if you have enabled one.
640
641Currently, the following actions have been defined:
642
643- Mouse-1 on the buffer name in the mode line switches between two
644buffers.
645
646- Mouse-2 on the buffer-name switches to the next buffer, and
647M-mouse-2 switches to the previous buffer in the buffer list.
648
649- Mouse-3 on the buffer-name displays a buffer menu.
650
424d8b44
DL
651- Mouse-2 on the read-only or modified status in the mode line (`%' or
652`*') toggles the status.
a933dad1
DL
653
654- Mouse-3 on the mode name display a minor-mode menu.
655
656** LessTif/Motif file selection dialog.
657
658When Emacs is configured to use LessTif or Motif, reading a file name
e33b0397 659from a menu will pop up a file selection dialog if `use-dialog-box' is
a933dad1
DL
660non-nil.
661
662** Emacs can display faces on TTY frames.
663
664Emacs automatically detects terminals that are able to display colors.
665Faces with a weight greater than normal are displayed extra-bright, if
666the terminal supports it. Faces with a weight less than normal and
667italic faces are displayed dimmed, if the terminal supports it.
668Underlined faces are displayed underlined if possible. Other face
163ea954
RS
669attributes such as `overline', `strike-through', and `box' are ignored
670on terminals.
a933dad1 671
54a9404d
EZ
672The command-line options `-fg COLOR', `-bg COLOR', and `-rv' are now
673supported on character terminals.
674
a933dad1
DL
675** Sound support
676
2f516940 677Emacs supports playing sound files on GNU/Linux and FreeBSD (Voxware
0b50c67f 678driver and native BSD driver, a.k.a. Luigi's driver). Currently
2f516940 679supported file formats are RIFF-WAVE (*.wav) and Sun Audio (*.au).
a933dad1 680
424d8b44 681+++
a933dad1
DL
682** A new variable, backup-by-copying-when-privileged-mismatch, gives
683the highest file uid for which backup-by-copying-when-mismatch will be
684forced on. The assumption is that uids less than or equal to this
685value are special uids (root, bin, daemon, etc.--not real system
686users) and that files owned by these users should not change ownership,
687even if your system policy allows users other than root to edit them.
688
689The default is 200; set the variable to nil to disable the feature.
690
0e18b431 691+++
a933dad1
DL
692** A block cursor can be drawn as wide as the glyph under it under X.
693
694As an example: if a block cursor is over a tab character, it will be
695drawn as wide as that tab on the display. To do this, set
696`x-stretch-cursor' to a non-nil value.
697
fdd8bb68 698+++
a933dad1
DL
699** Empty display lines at the end of a buffer may be marked with a
700bitmap (this is similar to the tilde displayed by vi).
701
702This behavior is activated by setting the buffer-local variable
703`indicate-empty-lines' to a non-nil value. The default value of this
704variable is found in `default-indicate-empty-lines'.
705
c5d00c64 706+++
a933dad1
DL
707** There is a new "aggressive" scrolling method.
708
709When scrolling up because point is above the window start, if the
d9e66103 710value of the buffer-local variable `scroll-up-aggressively' is a
a933dad1 711number, Emacs chooses a new window start so that point ends up that
d5951185 712fraction of the window's height from the top of the window.
a933dad1
DL
713
714When scrolling down because point is below the window end, if the
715value of the buffer-local variable `scroll-down-aggessively' is a
716number, Emacs chooses a new window start so that point ends up that
d5951185 717fraction of the window's height from the bottom of the window.
a933dad1
DL
718
719** The rectangle commands now avoid inserting undesirable spaces,
720notably at the end of lines.
721
722All these functions have been rewritten to avoid inserting unwanted
723spaces, and an optional prefix now allows them to behave the old way.
724
424d8b44 725+++
eee54b0e
DL
726There is a new command M-x replace-rectangle.
727
a933dad1
DL
728** The new command M-x query-replace-regexp-eval acts like
729query-replace-regexp, but takes a Lisp expression which is evaluated
730after each match to get the replacement text.
731
00782214 732+++
d5483ab1
GM
733** M-x query-replace recognizes a new command `e' (or `E') that lets
734you edit the replacement string.
4ff40dd0 735
424d8b44 736** The new command mail-abbrev-complete-alias, bound to `M-TAB', lets
4ff40dd0
GM
737you complete mail aliases in the text, analogous to
738lisp-complete-symbol.
739
7af69644 740+++
a933dad1
DL
741** Emacs now resizes mini-windows if appropriate.
742
163ea954 743If a message is longer than one line, or minibuffer contents are
a299a6f0
GM
744longer than one line, Emacs can resize the minibuffer window unless it
745is on a frame of its own. You can control resizing and the maximum
746minibuffer window size by setting the following variables:
a933dad1
DL
747
748- User option: max-mini-window-height
749
750Maximum height for resizing mini-windows. If a float, it specifies a
751fraction of the mini-window frame's height. If an integer, it
a299a6f0 752specifies a number of lines.
a933dad1
DL
753
754Default is 0.25.
755
a299a6f0
GM
756- User option: resize-mini-windows
757
758How to resize mini-windows. If nil, don't resize. If t, always
5820dead 759resize to fit the size of the text. If `grow-only', let mini-windows
a299a6f0
GM
760grow only, until they become empty, at which point they are shrunk
761again.
762
763Default is `grow-only'.
764
2f72fd2f
GM
765** The command `Info-search' now uses a search history.
766
0d43b60d
GM
767** Changes to hideshow.el
768
769Hideshow is now at version 5.x. It uses a new algorithms for block
327652be
TTN
770selection and traversal, includes more isearch support, and has more
771conventional keybindings.
0d43b60d
GM
772
773*** Generalized block selection and traversal
774
775A block is now recognized by three things: its start and end regexps
776(both strings), and a match-data selector (an integer) specifying
777which sub-expression in the start regexp serves as the place where a
778`forward-sexp'-like function can operate. Hideshow always adjusts
779point to this sub-expression before calling `hs-forward-sexp-func'
780(which for most modes evaluates to `forward-sexp').
781
782If the match-data selector is not specified, it defaults to zero,
783i.e., the entire start regexp is valid, w/ no prefix. This is
784backwards compatible with previous versions of hideshow. Please see
785the docstring for variable `hs-special-modes-alist' for details.
786
787*** Isearch support for updating mode line
788
789During incremental search, if Hideshow minor mode is active, hidden
790blocks are temporarily shown. The variable `hs-headline' records the
791line at the beginning of the opened block (preceding the hidden
792portion of the buffer), and the mode line is refreshed. When a block
793is re-hidden, the variable is set to nil.
794
795To show `hs-headline' in the mode line, you may wish to include
796something like this in your .emacs.
797
798 (add-hook 'hs-minor-mode-hook
799 (lambda ()
800 (add-to-list 'mode-line-format 'hs-headline)))
801
327652be
TTN
802*** New customization var: `hs-hide-all-non-comment-function'
803
804Normally, `hs-hide-all' hides everything, leaving only the
805header lines of top-level forms (and comments, unless var
806`hs-hide-comments-when-hiding-all' is non-nil). It does this by
807moving point to each top-level block beginning and hiding the
808block there. In some major modes (for example, Java), this
809behavior results in few blocks left visible, which may not be so
810useful.
811
812You can now set var `hs-hide-all-non-comment-function' to a
813function to be called at each top-level block beginning, instead
814of the normal block-hiding function. For example, the following
815code defines a function to hide one level down and move point
816appropriately, and then tells hideshow to use the new function.
817
818(defun ttn-hs-hide-level-1 ()
819 (hs-hide-level 1)
820 (forward-sexp 1))
821(setq hs-hide-all-non-comment-function 'ttn-hs-hide-level-1)
822
823The name `hs-hide-all-non-comment-function' was chosen to
824emphasize that this function is not called for comment blocks,
825only for code blocks.
826
827*** Command deleted: `hs-show-region'
828
829Historical Note: This command was added to handle "unbalanced
830parentheses" emergencies back when hideshow.el used selective
831display for implementation.
832
833*** Commands rebound to more conventional keys
834
835The hideshow commands used to be bound to keys of the form "C-c
836LETTER". This is contrary to the Emacs keybinding convention,
837which reserves that space for user modification. Here are the
838new bindings (which includes the addition of `hs-toggle-hiding'):
839
840 hs-hide-block C-c C-h
841 hs-show-block C-c C-s
842 hs-hide-all C-c C-M-h
843 hs-show-all C-c C-M-s
844 hs-hide-level C-c C-l
845 hs-toggle-hiding C-c C-c
846 hs-mouse-toggle-hiding [(shift button-2)]
847
848These were chosen to roughly imitate those used by Outline mode.
849
559cee90
DL
850** Changes to Change Log mode and Add-Log functions
851
424d8b44 852+++
1b24b888
GM
853*** If you invoke `add-change-log-entry' from a backup file, it makes
854an entry appropriate for the file's parent. This is useful for making
559cee90
DL
855log entries by comparing a version with deleted functions.
856
424d8b44 857+++
1b24b888
GM
858**** New command M-x change-log-merge merges another log into the
859current buffer.
424d8b44
DL
860
861+++
1b24b888
GM
862*** New command M-x change-log-redate fixes any old-style date entries
863in a log file.
eb2aac9d 864
502004be 865+++
1b24b888
GM
866*** Change Log mode now adds a file's version number to change log
867entries if user-option `change-log-version-info-enabled' is non-nil.
eb2aac9d 868
502004be 869+++
1b24b888 870*** Unless the file is under version control the search for a file's
424d8b44
DL
871version number is performed based on regular expressions from
872`change-log-version-number-regexp-list' which can be cutomized.
873Version numbers are only found in the first 10 percent of a file.
eb2aac9d 874
2c63c979 875*** Change Log mode now defines its own faces for font-lock highlighting.
1b24b888 876
79c78e77
GM
877** Changes to cmuscheme
878
879*** The user-option `scheme-program-name' has been renamed
880`cmuscheme-program-name' due to conflicts with xscheme.el.
881
3476b54a
GM
882** Changes in Font Lock
883
884*** The new function `font-lock-remove-keywords' can be used to remove
a5e350c9 885font-lock keywords from the current buffer or from a specific major mode.
3476b54a 886
2c63c979
SM
887*** multiline patterns are now supported.
888
a5e350c9
SM
889*** `font-lock-syntactic-face-function' allows major-modes to choose
890the face used for each string/comment.
c607d53d 891
601e0081
SM
892*** A new standard face `font-lock-doc-face'.
893Meant for Lisp docstrings, Javadoc comments and other "documentation in code".
894
b3b98592
GM
895** Comint (subshell) changes
896
988cded7
MB
897These changes generally affect all modes derived from comint mode, which
898include shell-mode, gdb-mode, scheme-interaction-mode, etc.
899
900*** By default, comint no longer uses the variable `comint-prompt-regexp'
901to distinguish prompts from user-input. Instead, it notices which
902parts of the text were output by the process, and which entered by the
903user, and attaches `field' properties to allow emacs commands to use
904this information. Common movement commands, notably beginning-of-line,
905respect field boundaries in a fairly natural manner. To disable this
906feature, and use the old behavior, customize the user option
907`comint-use-prompt-regexp-instead-of-fields'.
908
909*** Comint now includes new features to send commands to running processes
b3b98592
GM
910and redirect the output to a designated buffer or buffers.
911
988cded7 912*** The command M-x comint-redirect-send-command reads a command and
b3b98592
GM
913buffer name from the mini-buffer. The command is sent to the current
914buffer's process, and its output is inserted into the specified buffer.
915
916The command M-x comint-redirect-send-command-to-process acts like
917M-x comint-redirect-send-command but additionally reads the name of
918the buffer whose process should be used from the mini-buffer.
919
988cded7
MB
920*** Packages based on comint now highlight user input and program prompts,
921and support choosing previous input with mouse-2. To control these features,
922see the user-options `comint-highlight-input' and `comint-highlight-prompt'.
31fc5d15 923
988cded7 924*** The new command `comint-write-output' (usually bound to `C-c C-s')
d648cc45
MB
925saves the output from the most recent command to a file. With a prefix
926argument, it appends to the file.
927
988cded7 928*** The command `comint-kill-output' has been renamed `comint-delete-output'
d648cc45
MB
929(usually bound to `C-c C-o'); the old name is aliased to it for
930compatibility.
931
0e40b809
EL
932*** The new function `comint-add-to-input-history' adds commands to the input
933ring (history).
d648cc45 934
e26cec67
GM
935** Changes to Rmail mode
936
c0510d27
GM
937*** The new user-option rmail-rmail-user-mail-address-regexp can be
938set to fine tune the identification of of the correspondent when
939receiving new mail. If it matches the address of the sender, the
940recipient is taken as correspondent of a mail. If nil, the default,
941`user-login-name' and `user-mail-address' are used to exclude yourself
942as correspondent.
943
944Usually you don't have to set this variable, except if you collect
945mails sent by you under different user names. Then it should be a
993d8b7d 946regexp matching your mail addresses.
c0510d27 947
3b55acc9
GM
948*** The new user-option rmail-confirm-expunge controls whether and how
949to ask for confirmation before expunging deleted messages from an
950Rmail file. You can choose between no confirmation, confirmation
951with y-or-n-p, or confirmation with yes-or-no-p. Default is to ask
952for confirmation with yes-or-no-p.
953
6a1950ec
GM
954*** RET is now bound in the Rmail summary to rmail-summary-goto-msg,
955like `j'.
956
5bb6f079
RS
957*** There is a new user option `rmail-digest-end-regexps' that
958specifies the regular expressions to detect the line that ends a
2d5e9b54 959digest message.
e26cec67 960
993d8b7d
DL
961*** The new user option `rmail-automatic-folder-directives' specifies
962in which folder to put messages automatically.
963
400a1ed0
GM
964** Changes to TeX mode
965
a5e350c9 966*** The default mode has been changed from `plain-tex-mode' to
400a1ed0
GM
967`latex-mode'.
968
a5e350c9
SM
969*** latex-mode now has a simple indentation algorithm.
970
971*** M-f and M-p jump around \begin...\end pairs.
972
973*** Added support for outline-minor-mode.
c607d53d 974
a933dad1
DL
975** Changes to RefTeX mode
976
977*** RefTeX has new support for index generation. Index entries can be
978 created with `C-c <', with completion available on index keys.
979 Pressing `C-c /' indexes the word at the cursor with a default
980 macro. `C-c >' compiles all index entries into an alphabetically
981 sorted *Index* buffer which looks like the final index. Entries
982 can be edited from that buffer.
983
984*** Label and citation key selection now allow to select several
985 items and reference them together (use `m' to mark items, `a' or
986 `A' to use all marked entries).
987
988*** reftex.el has been split into a number of smaller files to reduce
989 memory use when only a part of RefTeX is being used.
990
991*** a new command `reftex-view-crossref-from-bibtex' (bound to `C-c &'
992 in BibTeX-mode) can be called in a BibTeX database buffer in order
993 to show locations in LaTeX documents where a particular entry has
994 been cited.
995
38de9631
GM
996** Emacs Lisp mode now allows multiple levels of outline headings.
997The level of a heading is determined from the number of leading
998semicolons in a heading line. Toplevel forms starting with a `('
999in column 1 are always made leaves.
1000
a933dad1
DL
1001** The M-x time-stamp command (most commonly used on write-file-hooks)
1002has the following new features:
1003
1004*** The patterns for finding the time stamp and for updating a pattern
1005may match text spanning multiple lines. For example, some people like
1006to have the filename and date on separate lines. The new variable
1007time-stamp-inserts-lines controls the matching for multi-line patterns.
1008
1009*** More than one time stamp can be updated in the same file. This
1010feature is useful if you need separate time stamps in a program source
1011file to both include in formatted documentation and insert in the
1012compiled binary. The same time-stamp will be written at each matching
1013pattern. The variable time-stamp-count enables this new feature; it
1014defaults to 1.
1015
5d94f558 1016** Partial Completion mode now completes environment variables in
b675095c
GM
1017file names.
1018
424d8b44 1019+++
a933dad1
DL
1020** Tooltips.
1021
1022Tooltips are small X windows displaying a help string at the current
01242779
DL
1023mouse position. The Lisp package `tooltip' implements them. You can
1024turn them off via the user option `tooltip-mode'.
a933dad1
DL
1025
1026Tooltips also provides support for GUD debugging. If activated,
1027variable values can be displayed in tooltips by pointing at them with
1028the mouse in source buffers. You can customize various aspects of the
1029tooltip display in the group `tooltip'.
1030
424d8b44 1031+++
a933dad1
DL
1032** Customize changes
1033
1034*** Customize now supports comments about customized items. Use the
34f94cf9
DL
1035`State' menu to add comments. Note that customization comments will
1036cause the customizations to fail in earlier versions of Emacs.
a933dad1
DL
1037
1038*** The new option `custom-buffer-done-function' says whether to kill
1039Custom buffers when you've done with them or just bury them (the
1040default).
1041
0ae51efb
GM
1042*** The keyword :set-after in defcustom allows to specify dependencies
1043between custom options. Example:
1044
1045 (defcustom default-input-method nil
1046 "*Default input method for multilingual text (a string).
1047 This is the input method activated automatically by the command
1048 `toggle-input-method' (\\[toggle-input-method])."
1049 :group 'mule
1050 :type '(choice (const nil) string)
1051 :set-after '(current-language-environment))
1052
1053This specifies that default-input-method should be set after
1054current-language-environment even if default-input-method appears
1055first in a custom-set-variables statement.
1056
a933dad1
DL
1057** New features in evaluation commands
1058
5e03eb84 1059*** The commands to evaluate Lisp expressions, such as C-M-x in Lisp
a933dad1
DL
1060modes, C-j in Lisp Interaction mode, and M-:, now bind the variables
1061print-level, print-length, and debug-on-error based on the
1062customizable variables eval-expression-print-level,
1063eval-expression-print-length, and eval-expression-debug-on-error.
1064
5e03eb84
GM
1065*** The function `eval-defun' (M-C-x) now loads Edebug and instruments
1066code when called with a prefix argument.
1067
ead53494
GM
1068** Ispell changes
1069
37d8a691 1070+++
bbe15990
EZ
1071*** The command `ispell' now spell-checks a region if
1072transient-mark-mode is on, and the mark is active. Otherwise it
ead53494
GM
1073spell-checks the current buffer.
1074
37d8a691 1075+++
385ff9e3
GM
1076*** Support for synchronous subprocesses - DOS/Windoze - has been
1077added.
1078
1079*** An "alignment error" bug was fixed when a manual spelling
1080correction is made and re-checked.
1081
74ec6045 1082*** An Italian and a Portuguese dictionary definition has been added.
385ff9e3
GM
1083
1084*** Region skipping performance has been vastly improved in some
1085cases.
1086
1087*** Spell checking HTML buffers has been improved and isn't so strict
1088on syntax errors.
1089
1090*** The buffer-local words are now always placed on a new line at the
1091end of the buffer.
1092
a933dad1
DL
1093** Dired changes
1094
1095*** New variable `dired-recursive-deletes' determines if the delete
1096command will delete non-empty directories recursively. The default
1097is, delete only empty directories.
1098
1099*** New variable `dired-recursive-copies' determines if the copy
1100command will copy directories recursively. The default is, do not
1101copy directories recursively.
1102
f6737cde
GM
1103*** In command `dired-do-shell-command' (usually bound to `!') a `?'
1104in the shell command has a special meaning similar to `*', but with
1105the difference that the command will be run on each file individually.
1106
2f72fd2f
GM
1107*** The new command `dired-find-alternate-file' (usually bound to `a')
1108replaces the Dired buffer with the buffer for an alternate file or
1109directory.
1110
7381ae05
MB
1111*** The new command `dired-show-file-type' (usually bound to `w') shows
1112a message in the echo area describing what type of file the point is on.
1113This command invokes the external program `file' do its work, and so
1114will only work on systems with that program, and will be only as
1115accurate or inaccurate as it is.
1116
e024b101
GM
1117*** Dired now properly handles undo changes of adding/removing `-R'
1118from ls switches.
1119
60b392a7
MB
1120*** Dired commands that prompt for a destination file now allow the use
1121of the `M-n' command in the minibuffer to insert the source filename,
1122which the user can then edit. This only works if there is a single
1123source file, not when operating on multiple marked files.
1124
a933dad1
DL
1125** The variable mail-specify-envelope-from controls whether to
1126use the -f option when sending mail.
1127
b1c609b1
GM
1128** CC mode changes.
1129
1130Note: This release contains changes that might not be compatible with
1131current user setups (although it's believed that these
1132incompatibilities will only show in very uncommon circumstances).
1133However, since the impact is uncertain, these changes may be rolled
1134back depending on user feedback. Therefore there's no forward
1135compatibility guarantee wrt the new features introduced in this
1136release.
1137
7972fcfc
GM
1138*** c-style-variables-are-local-p now defaults to t.
1139This is an incompatible change that has been made to make the behavior
1140of the style system wrt global variable settings less confusing for
1141non-advanced users. If you know what this variable does you might
1142want to set it to nil in your .emacs, otherwise you probably don't
1143have to bother.
1144
1145Defaulting c-style-variables-are-local-p to t avoids the confusing
1146situation that occurs when a user sets some style variables globally
487522fe 1147and edits both a Java and a non-Java file in the same Emacs session.
7972fcfc
GM
1148If the style variables aren't buffer local in this case, loading of
1149the second file will cause the default style (either "gnu" or "java"
1150by default) to override the global settings made by the user.
1151
b1c609b1
GM
1152*** New initialization procedure for the style system.
1153When the initial style for a buffer is determined by CC Mode (from the
1154variable c-default-style), the global values of style variables now
1155take precedence over the values specified by the chosen style. This
1156is different than the old behavior: previously, the style-specific
1157settings would override the global settings. This change makes it
1158possible to do simple configuration in the intuitive way with
1159Customize or with setq lines in one's .emacs file.
1160
1161By default, the global value of every style variable is the new
1162special symbol set-from-style, which causes the value to be taken from
1163the style system. This means that in effect, only an explicit setting
1164of a style variable will cause the "overriding" behavior described
1165above.
1166
1167Also note that global settings override style-specific settings *only*
1168when the initial style of a buffer is chosen by a CC Mode major mode
1169function. When a style is chosen in other ways --- for example, by a
1170call like (c-set-style "gnu") in a hook, or via M-x c-set-style ---
1171then the style-specific values take precedence over any global style
1172values. In Lisp terms, global values override style-specific values
1173only when the new second argument to c-set-style is non-nil; see the
1174function documentation for more info.
1175
1176The purpose of these changes is to make it easier for users,
1177especially novice users, to do simple customizations with Customize or
1178with setq in their .emacs files. On the other hand, the new system is
1179intended to be compatible with advanced users' customizations as well,
1180such as those that choose styles in hooks or whatnot. This new system
1181is believed to be almost entirely compatible with current
1182configurations, in spite of the changed precedence between style and
1183global variable settings when a buffer's default style is set.
1184
1185(Thanks to Eric Eide for clarifying this explanation a bit.)
1186
1187**** c-offsets-alist is now a customizable variable.
1188This became possible as a result of the new initialization behavior.
1189
1190This variable is treated slightly differently from the other style
1191variables; instead of using the symbol set-from-style, it will be
1192completed with the syntactic symbols it doesn't already contain when
1193the style is first initialized. This means it now defaults to the
1194empty list to make all syntactic elements get their values from the
1195style system.
1196
1197**** Compatibility variable to restore the old behavior.
1198In case your configuration doesn't work with this change, you can set
1199c-old-style-variable-behavior to non-nil to get the old behavior back
1200as far as possible.
1201
1202*** Improvements to line breaking and text filling.
1203CC Mode now handles this more intelligently and seamlessly wrt the
1204surrounding code, especially inside comments. For details see the new
1205chapter about this in the manual.
1206
1207**** New variable to recognize comment line prefix decorations.
1208The variable c-comment-prefix-regexp has been added to properly
1209recognize the line prefix in both block and line comments. It's
1210primarily used to initialize the various paragraph recognition and
1211adaptive filling variables that the text handling functions uses.
1212
1213**** New variable c-block-comment-prefix.
1214This is a generalization of the now obsolete variable
1215c-comment-continuation-stars to handle arbitrary strings.
1216
1217**** CC Mode now uses adaptive fill mode.
1218This to make it adapt better to the paragraph style inside comments.
1219
1220It's also possible to use other adaptive filling packages inside CC
1221Mode, notably Kyle E. Jones' Filladapt mode (http://wonderworks.com/).
1222A new convenience function c-setup-filladapt sets up Filladapt for use
1223inside CC Mode.
1224
1225Note though that the 2.12 version of Filladapt lacks a feature that
1226causes it to work suboptimally when c-comment-prefix-regexp can match
1227the empty string (which it commonly does). A patch for that is
1228available from the CC Mode web site (http://www.python.org/emacs/
1229cc-mode/).
1230
1231**** It's now possible to selectively turn off auto filling.
1232The variable c-ignore-auto-fill is used to ignore auto fill mode in
1233specific contexts, e.g. in preprocessor directives and in string
1234literals.
1235
1236**** New context sensitive line break function c-context-line-break.
1237It works like newline-and-indent in normal code, and adapts the line
1238prefix according to the comment style when used inside comments. If
1239you're normally using newline-and-indent, you might want to switch to
1240this function.
1241
1242*** Fixes to IDL mode.
1243It now does a better job in recognizing only the constructs relevant
1244to IDL. E.g. it no longer matches "class" as the beginning of a
1245struct block, but it does match the CORBA 2.3 "valuetype" keyword.
1246Thanks to Eric Eide.
1247
1248*** Improvements to the Whitesmith style.
1249It now keeps the style consistently on all levels and both when
1250opening braces hangs and when they don't.
1251
1252**** New lineup function c-lineup-whitesmith-in-block.
1253
1254*** New lineup functions c-lineup-template-args and c-indent-multi-line-block.
1255See their docstrings for details. c-lineup-template-args does a
1256better job of tracking the brackets used as parens in C++ templates,
1257and is used by default to line up continued template arguments.
1258
1259*** c-lineup-comment now preserves alignment with a comment on the
1260previous line. It used to instead preserve comments that started in
1261the column specified by comment-column.
1262
1263*** c-lineup-C-comments handles "free form" text comments.
1264In comments with a long delimiter line at the start, the indentation
1265is kept unchanged for lines that start with an empty comment line
1266prefix. This is intended for the type of large block comments that
1267contain documentation with its own formatting. In these you normally
1268don't want CC Mode to change the indentation.
1269
1270*** The `c' syntactic symbol is now relative to the comment start
1271instead of the previous line, to make integers usable as lineup
1272arguments.
1273
1274*** All lineup functions have gotten docstrings.
1275
1276*** More preprocessor directive movement functions.
1277c-down-conditional does the reverse of c-up-conditional.
1278c-up-conditional-with-else and c-down-conditional-with-else are
1279variants of these that also stops at "#else" lines (suggested by Don
1280Provan).
1281
1282*** Minor improvements to many movement functions in tricky situations.
1283
c407c570
GM
1284** Makefile mode changes
1285
1286*** The mode now uses the abbrev table `makefile-mode-abbrev-table'.
1287
5d94f558 1288*** Conditionals and include statements are now highlighted when
c407c570
GM
1289Fontlock mode is active.
1290
87be76f6
GM
1291** Isearch changes
1292
3353ef5a
GM
1293*** Isearch now puts a call to `isearch-resume' in the command history,
1294so that searches can be resumed.
1295
1296*** In Isearch mode, M-C-s and M-C-r are now bound like C-s and C-r,
c407c570
GM
1297respectively, i.e. you can repeat a regexp isearch with the same keys
1298that started the search.
1299
87be76f6 1300*** In Isearch mode, mouse-2 in the echo area now yanks the current
a933dad1
DL
1301selection into the search string rather than giving an error.
1302
c8a8458a 1303+++
87be76f6
GM
1304*** There is a new lazy highlighting feature in incremental search.
1305
d35fce81 1306Lazy highlighting is switched on/off by customizing variable
87be76f6
GM
1307`isearch-lazy-highlight'. When active, all matches for the current
1308search string are highlighted. The current match is highlighted as
1309before using face `isearch' or `region'. All other matches are
1310highlighted using face `isearch-lazy-highlight-face' which defaults to
5d94f558 1311`secondary-selection'.
87be76f6
GM
1312
1313The extra highlighting makes it easier to anticipate where the cursor
1314will end up each time you press C-s or C-r to repeat a pending search.
1315Highlighting of these additional matches happens in a deferred fashion
1316using "idle timers," so the cycles needed do not rob isearch of its
1317usual snappy response.
1318
1319If `isearch-lazy-highlight-cleanup' is set to t, highlights for
1320matches are automatically cleared when you end the search. If it is
1321set to nil, you can remove the highlights manually with `M-x
1322isearch-lazy-highlight-cleanup'.
1323
21bc6203 1324+++
35384f06
GM
1325** Changes in sort.el
1326
1327The function sort-numeric-fields interprets numbers starting with `0'
12c25bdc 1328as octal and numbers starting with `0x' or `0X' as hexadecimal. The
21bc6203 1329new user-option sort-numeric-base can be used to specify a default
35384f06 1330numeric base.
87be76f6 1331
d7b511c4
GM
1332** Changes to Ange-ftp
1333
424d8b44 1334+++
d7b511c4 1335*** Ange-ftp allows you to specify of a port number in remote file
d67f47e4
DL
1336names cleanly. It is appended to the host name, separated by a hash
1337sign, e.g. `/foo@bar.org#666:mumble'. (This syntax comes from EFS.)
1338
d7b511c4
GM
1339*** If the new user-option `ange-ftp-try-passive-mode' is set, passive
1340ftp mode will be used if the ftp client supports that.
1341
9d453139
SS
1342*** Ange-ftp handles the output of the w32-style clients which
1343output ^M at the end of lines.
1344
4b9347b3
GM
1345** Shell script mode changes.
1346
1347Shell script mode (sh-script) can now indent scripts for shells
1348derived from sh and rc. The indentation style is customizeable, and
1349sh-script can attempt to "learn" the current buffer's style.
1350
79214ddf
FP
1351** Etags changes.
1352
1353*** In DOS, etags looks for file.cgz if it cannot find file.c.
1354
aca0be23 1355*** New option --ignore-case-regex is an alternative to --regex. It is now
8dc78b52
FP
1356possible to bind a regexp to a language, by prepending the regexp with
1357{lang}, where lang is one of the languages that `etags --help' prints out.
1358This feature is useful especially for regex files, where each line contains
1359a regular expression. The manual contains details.
aca0be23 1360
79214ddf
FP
1361*** In C and derived languages, etags creates tags for function
1362declarations when given the --declarations option.
1363
1364*** In C++, tags are created for "operator". The tags have the form
aca0be23 1365"operator+", without spaces between the keyword and the operator.
79214ddf
FP
1366
1367*** New language Ada: tags are functions, procedures, packages, tasks, and
1368types.
1369
de370c4c 1370*** In Fortran, `procedure' is not tagged.
79214ddf
FP
1371
1372*** In Java, tags are created for "interface".
1373
1374*** In Lisp, "(defstruct (foo", "(defun (operator" and similar constructs
1375are now tagged.
1376
1377*** In Perl, the --globals option tags global variables. my and local
1378variables are tagged.
1379
1380*** New language Python: def and class at the beginning of a line are tags.
1381
8dc78b52
FP
1382*** .ss files are Scheme files, .pdb is Postscript with C syntax, .psw is
1383for PSWrap.
79214ddf 1384
c8d94f86 1385+++
f6737cde
GM
1386** Changes in etags.el
1387
3f6e4b8b
GM
1388*** The new user-option tags-case-fold-search can be used to make
1389tags operations case-sensitive or case-insensitive. The default
1390is to use the same setting as case-fold-search.
1391
f6737cde
GM
1392*** You can display additional output with M-x tags-apropos by setting
1393the new variable tags-apropos-additional-actions.
1394
1395If non-nil, the variable's value should be a list of triples (TITLE
1396FUNCTION TO-SEARCH). For each triple, M-x tags-apropos processes
1397TO-SEARCH and lists tags from it. TO-SEARCH should be an alist,
1398obarray, or symbol. If it is a symbol, the symbol's value is used.
1399
1400TITLE is a string to use to label the list of tags from TO-SEARCH.
1401
1402FUNCTION is a function to call when an entry is selected in the Tags
1403List buffer. It is called with one argument, the selected symbol.
1404
1405A useful example value for this variable might be something like:
1406
1407 '(("Emacs Lisp" Info-goto-emacs-command-node obarray)
1408 ("Common Lisp" common-lisp-hyperspec common-lisp-hyperspec-obarray)
1409 ("SCWM" scwm-documentation scwm-obarray))
1410
1411*** The face tags-tag-face can be used to customize the appearance
1412of tags in the output of M-x tags-apropos.
1413
1414*** Setting tags-apropos-verbose to a non-nil value displays the
1415names of tags files in the *Tags List* buffer.
1416
424d8b44 1417+++
fbc164de
PE
1418** Emacs now attempts to determine the initial language environment
1419and preferred and locale coding systems systematically from the
1420LC_ALL, LC_CTYPE, and LANG environment variables during startup.
1421
c3eb1f10 1422+++
0b8a3a6d
DL
1423** New language environments `Polish', `Latin-8' and `Latin-9'.
1424Latin-8 and Latin-9 correspond respectively to the ISO character sets
14258859-14 (Celtic) and 8859-15 (updated Latin-1, with the Euro sign).
f6499c03
DL
1426GNU Intlfonts doesn't support these yet; there are basic 8859-14 and
14278859-15 fonts at <URL:http://czyborra.com/charsets/> and recent X
1428releases have 8859-15. There are new Latin-8 and Latin-9 prefix
1429(only) and Polish slash input methods in Leim.
59c1bf85 1430
424d8b44 1431+++
163ea954 1432** Fortran mode has a new command `fortran-strip-sequence-nos' to
e33b0397
DL
1433remove text past column 72. The syntax class of `\' in Fortran is now
1434appropriate for C-style escape sequences in strings.
1435
1436** SGML mode's default `sgml-validate-command' is now `nsgmls'.
1437
424d8b44 1438+++
6f8ea2ae
DL
1439** A new command `view-emacs-problems' (C-h P) displays the PROBLEMS file.
1440
6ab8d72d 1441+++
f6499c03 1442** The Dabbrev package has a new user-option `dabbrev-ignored-regexps'
c0510d27
GM
1443containing a list of regular expressions. Buffers matching a regular
1444expression from that list, are not checked.
1445
5d94f558
SS
1446** Emacs can now figure out modification times of remote files.
1447When you do C-x C-f /user@host:/path/file RET and edit the file,
1448and someone else modifies the file, you will be prompted to revert
1449the buffer, just like for the local files.
1450
dc28878c
GM
1451** The buffer menu (C-x C-b) no longer lists the *Buffer List* buffer.
1452
df8a9f78 1453+++
95931eb1
GM
1454** When invoked with a prefix argument, the command `list-abbrevs' now
1455displays local abbrevs, only.
1456
54baed30
GM
1457** VC Changes
1458
1459VC has been overhauled internally. It is now modular, making it
1460easier to plug-in arbitrary version control backends. (See Lisp
1461Changes for details on the new structure.) As a result, the mechanism
1462to enable and disable support for particular version systems has
1463changed: everything is now controlled by the new variable
1464`vc-handled-backends'. Its value is a list of atoms that identify
1465version systems; the default is '(RCS CVS SCCS). When finding a file,
1466each of the backends in that list is tried in order to see whether the
1467file is registered in that backend.
1468
1469When registering a new file, VC first tries each of the listed
1470backends to see if any of them considers itself "responsible" for the
1471directory of the file (e.g. because a corresponding subdirectory for
1472master files exists). If none of the backends is responsible, then
1473the first backend in the list that could register the file is chosen.
1474As a consequence, the variable `vc-default-back-end' is now obsolete.
1475
1476The old variable `vc-master-templates' is also obsolete, although VC
1477still supports it for backward compatibility. To define templates for
1478RCS or SCCS, you should rather use the new variables
1479vc-{rcs,sccs}-master-templates. (There is no such feature under CVS
1480where it doesn't make sense.)
1481
1482The variables `vc-ignore-vc-files' and `vc-handle-cvs' are also
1483obsolete now, you must set `vc-handled-backends' to nil or exclude
1484`CVS' from the list, respectively, to achieve their effect now.
1485
1486*** General Changes
1487
1488The variable `vc-checkout-carefully' is obsolete: the corresponding
1489checks are always done now.
1490
327652be 1491VC Dired buffers are now kept up-to-date during all version control
54baed30
GM
1492operations.
1493
c286608e
SM
1494`vc-diff' output is now displayed in `diff-mode'.
1495`vc-print-log' uses `log-view-mode'.
1496`vc-log-mode' (used for *VC-Log*) has been replaced by `log-edit-mode'.
1497
22933be8
AS
1498The command C-x v m (vc-merge) now accepts an empty argument as the
1499first revision number. This means that any recent changes on the
1500current branch should be picked up from the repository and merged into
1501the working file (``merge news'').
1502
1503The commands C-x v s (vc-create-snapshot) and C-x v r
1504(vc-retrieve-snapshot) now ask for a directory name from which to work
1505downwards.
1506
1507*** Multiple Backends
1508
1509VC now lets you register files in more than one backend. This is
1510useful, for example, if you are working with a slow remote CVS
1511repository. You can then use RCS for local editing, and occasionally
1512commit your changes back to CVS, or pick up changes from CVS into your
1513local RCS archives.
1514
1515To make this work, the ``more local'' backend (RCS in our example)
1516should come first in `vc-handled-backends', and the ``more remote''
1517backend (CVS) should come later. (The default value of
1518`vc-handled-backends' already has it that way.)
1519
1520If you have a file registered in one backend already, you can register
1521it in a second one by using C-x v i (vc-register) again.
1522Alternatively, you can commit changes to another backend (say, RCS),
1523by typing C-u C-x v v RCS RET (i.e. vc-next-action now accepts a
1524backend name as a revision number). When using the latter approach,
1525VC registers the file in the more local backend if that hasn't already
1526happened, and commits to a branch based on the current revision number
1527from the more remote backend.
1528
1529If a file is registered in multiple backends, you can switch to
1530another one using C-x v b (vc-switch-backend). This does not change
1531any files, it only changes VC's perspective on the file. Use this to
1532pick up changes from CVS while working under RCS locally.
1533
1534After you are done with your local RCS editing, you can commit your
1535changes back to CVS using C-u C-x v v CVS RET. In this case, the
1536local RCS archive is removed after the commit, and the log entry
1537buffer is initialized to contain the entire RCS change log of the file.
1538
54baed30
GM
1539*** Changes for CVS
1540
1541There is a new user option, `vc-cvs-stay-local'. If it is `t' (the
1542default), then VC avoids network queries for files registered in
1543remote repositories. The state of such files is then only determined
1544by heuristics and past information. `vc-cvs-stay-local' can also be a
1545regexp to match against repository hostnames; only files from hosts
1546that match it are treated locally. If the variable is nil, then VC
1547queries the repository just as often as it does for local files.
1548
22933be8
AS
1549If `vc-cvs-stay-local' is on, then VC also makes local backups of
1550repository versions. This means that ordinary diffs (C-x v =) and
1551revert operations (C-x v u) can be done completely locally, without
1552any repository interactions at all. The name of a local version
1553backup of FILE is FILE.~REV.~, where REV is the repository version
1554number. This format is similar to that used by C-x v ~
1555(vc-version-other-window), except for the trailing dot. As a matter
1556of fact, the two features can each use the files created by the other,
1557the only difference being that files with a trailing `.' are deleted
105602b1
EZ
1558automatically after commit. (This feature doesn't work on MS-DOS,
1559since DOS disallows more than a single dot in the trunk of a file
1560name.)
22933be8 1561
54baed30
GM
1562If `vc-cvs-stay-local' is on, and there have been changes in the
1563repository, VC notifies you about it when you actually try to commit.
1564If you want to check for updates from the repository without trying to
22933be8 1565commit, you can either use C-x v m RET to perform an update on the
54baed30
GM
1566current file, or you can use C-x v r RET to get an update for an
1567entire directory tree.
1568
1569The new user option `vc-cvs-use-edit' indicates whether VC should call
1570"cvs edit" to make files writeable; it defaults to `t'. (This option
1571is only meaningful if the CVSREAD variable is set, or if files are
1572"watched" by other developers.)
1573
22933be8
AS
1574The commands C-x v s (vc-create-snapshot) and C-x v r
1575(vc-retrieve-snapshot) are now also implemented for CVS. If you give
1576an empty argument to the latter, that performs a `cvs update',
1577starting at the given directory.
1578
54baed30
GM
1579*** Lisp Changes in VC
1580
1581VC has been restructured internally to make it modular. You can now
1582add support for arbitrary version control backends by writing a
1583library that provides a certain set of backend-specific functions, and
1584then telling VC to use that library. For example, to add support for
1585a version system named FOO, you write a library named vc-foo.el, which
1586provides a number of functions vc-foo-... (see commentary at the end
1587of vc.el for a detailed list of them). To make VC use that library,
1588you need to put it somewhere into Emacs' load path and add the atom
1589`FOO' to the list `vc-handled-backends'.
1590
a933dad1
DL
1591** New modes and packages
1592
b95b34e5
GM
1593*** Artist is an Emacs lisp package that allows you to draw lines,
1594rectangles and ellipses by using your mouse and/or keyboard. The
1595shapes are made up with the ascii characters |, -, / and \.
1596
1597Features are:
1598
1599- Intersecting: When a `|' intersects with a `-', a `+' is
1600 drawn, like this: | \ /
c607d53d 1601 --+-- X
b95b34e5
GM
1602 | / \
1603
1604- Rubber-banding: When drawing lines you can interactively see the
1605 result while holding the mouse button down and moving the mouse. If
1606 your machine is not fast enough (a 386 is a bit too slow, but a
1607 pentium is well enough), you can turn this feature off. You will
1608 then see 1's and 2's which mark the 1st and 2nd endpoint of the line
1609 you are drawing.
1610
1611- Arrows: After having drawn a (straight) line or a (straight)
1612 poly-line, you can set arrows on the line-ends by typing < or >.
1613
1614- Flood-filling: You can fill any area with a certain character by
1615 flood-filling.
1616
1617- Cut copy and paste: You can cut, copy and paste rectangular
1618 regions. Artist also interfaces with the rect package (this can be
1619 turned off if it causes you any trouble) so anything you cut in
1620 artist can be yanked with C-x r y and vice versa.
c607d53d 1621
b95b34e5
GM
1622- Drawing with keys: Everything you can do with the mouse, you can
1623 also do without the mouse.
1624
1625- Aspect-ratio: You can set the variable artist-aspect-ratio to
1626 reflect the height-width ratio for the font you are using. Squares
1627 and circles are then drawn square/round. Note, that once your
1628 ascii-file is shown with font with a different height-width ratio,
1629 the squares won't be square and the circles won't be round.
1630
1631- Drawing operations: The following drawing operations are implemented:
1632
1633 lines straight-lines
1634 rectangles squares
1635 poly-lines straight poly-lines
1636 ellipses circles
1637 text (see-thru) text (overwrite)
1638 spray-can setting size for spraying
1639 vaporize line vaporize lines
1640 erase characters erase rectangles
1641
1642 Straight lines are lines that go horizontally, vertically or
1643 diagonally. Plain lines go in any direction. The operations in
1644 the right column are accessed by holding down the shift key while
1645 drawing.
1646
1647 It is possible to vaporize (erase) entire lines and connected lines
1648 (rectangles for example) as long as the lines being vaporized are
1649 straight and connected at their endpoints. Vaporizing is inspired
1650 by the drawrect package by Jari Aalto <jari.aalto@poboxes.com>.
1651
1652- Picture mode compatibility: Artist is picture mode compatible (this
1653 can be turned off).
1654
4473cdd9
JW
1655+++
1656*** The new package Eshell is an operating system command shell
1657implemented entirely in Emacs Lisp. Use `M-x eshell' to invoke it.
1658It functions similarly to bash and zsh, and allows running of Lisp
1659functions and external commands using the same syntax. It supports
1660history lists, aliases, extended globbing, smart scrolling, etc. It
1661will work on any platform Emacs has been ported to. And since most of
1662the basic commands -- ls, rm, mv, cp, ln, du, cat, etc. -- have been
1663rewritten in Lisp, it offers an operating-system independent shell,
1664all within the scope of your Emacs process.
1665
ff332647 1666+++
90cbf47e
GM
1667*** The new package timeclock.el is a mode is for keeping track of time
1668intervals. You can use it for whatever purpose you like, but the
1669typical scenario is to keep track of how much time you spend working
1670on certain projects.
1671
894ca69e 1672+++
90cbf47e 1673*** The new package hi-lock.el, text matching interactively entered
d96d6bb0 1674regexp's can be highlighted. For example,
abb2db1c 1675
d96d6bb0 1676 M-x highlight-regexp RET clearly RET RET
abb2db1c
GM
1677
1678will highlight all occurrences of `clearly' using a yellow background
1679face. New occurrences of `clearly' will be highlighted as they are
1680typed. `M-x unhighlight-regexp RET' will remove the highlighting.
1681Any existing face can be used for highlighting and a set of
1682appropriate faces is provided. The regexps can be written into the
1683current buffer in a form that will be recognized the next time the
1684corresponding file is read.
1685
424d8b44 1686+++
d96d6bb0 1687*** The new package zone.el plays games with Emacs' display when
abb2db1c
GM
1688Emacs is idle.
1689
31fc5d15
GM
1690*** The new package xml.el provides a simple but generic XML
1691parser. It doesn't parse the DTDs however.
1692
5cb6a58e
SM
1693*** The comment operations are now provided by the newcomment.el
1694package which allows different styles of comment-region and should
1695be more robust while offering the same functionality.
601e0081
SM
1696`comment-region' now doesn't always comment a-line-at-a-time, but only
1697comments the region, breaking the line at point if necessary.
5cb6a58e 1698
424d8b44 1699+++
578979ee
GM
1700*** The Ebrowse package implements a C++ class browser and tags
1701facilities tailored for use with C++. It is documented in a
1702separate Texinfo file.
1703
424d8b44
DL
1704+++
1705*** The PCL-CVS package available by either running M-x cvs-examine or
1706by visiting a CVS administrative directory (with a prefix argument)
1707provides an alternative interface to VC-dired for CVS. It comes with
1708`log-view-mode' to view RCS and SCCS logs and `log-edit-mode' used to
1709enter checkin log messages.
dc1178bf 1710
424d8b44 1711+++
6abca616
EZ
1712*** The new package called `woman' allows to browse Unix man pages
1713without invoking external programs.
1714
1715The command `M-x woman' formats manual pages entirely in Emacs Lisp
1716and then displays them, like `M-x manual-entry' does. Unlike
1717`manual-entry', `woman' does not invoke any external programs, so it
1718is useful on systems such as MS-DOS/MS-Windows where the `man' and
490f2e7b 1719Groff or `troff' commands are not readily available.
6abca616
EZ
1720
1721The command `M-x woman-find-file' asks for the file name of a man
1722page, then formats and displays it like `M-x woman' does.
1723
719e2c6e 1724+++
5e5dff44
GM
1725*** The new command M-x re-builder offers a convenient interface for
1726authoring regular expressions with immediate visual feedback.
1727
1728The buffer from which the command was called becomes the target for
1729the regexp editor popping up in a separate window. Matching text in
1730the target buffer is immediately color marked during the editing.
1731Each sub-expression of the regexp will show up in a different face so
1732even complex regexps can be edited and verified on target data in a
1733single step.
1734
1735On displays not supporting faces the matches instead blink like
1736matching parens to make them stand out. On such a setup you will
1737probably also want to use the sub-expression mode when the regexp
1738contains such to get feedback about their respective limits.
1739
424d8b44 1740+++
f7136ee8
GM
1741*** glasses-mode is a minor mode that makes
1742unreadableIdentifiersLikeThis readable. It works as glasses, without
1743actually modifying content of a buffer.
1744
bbd9b566
GM
1745*** The package ebnf2ps translates an EBNF to a syntactic chart in
1746PostScript.
1747
1748Currently accepts ad-hoc EBNF, ISO EBNF and Bison/Yacc.
1749
1750The ad-hoc default EBNF syntax has the following elements:
1751
1752 ; comment (until end of line)
1753 A non-terminal
1754 "C" terminal
1755 ?C? special
1756 $A default non-terminal
1757 $"C" default terminal
1758 $?C? default special
1759 A = B. production (A is the header and B the body)
1760 C D sequence (C occurs before D)
1761 C | D alternative (C or D occurs)
1762 A - B exception (A excluding B, B without any non-terminal)
1763 n * A repetition (A repeats n (integer) times)
1764 (C) group (expression C is grouped together)
1765 [C] optional (C may or not occurs)
1766 C+ one or more occurrences of C
1767 {C}+ one or more occurrences of C
1768 {C}* zero or more occurrences of C
1769 {C} zero or more occurrences of C
1770 C / D equivalent to: C {D C}*
1771 {C || D}+ equivalent to: C {D C}*
1772 {C || D}* equivalent to: [C {D C}*]
1773 {C || D} equivalent to: [C {D C}*]
1774
1775Please, see ebnf2ps documentation for EBNF syntax and how to use it.
1776
99453a38
GM
1777*** The package align.el will align columns within a region, using M-x
1778align. Its mode-specific rules, based on regular expressions,
1779determine where the columns should be split. In C and C++, for
1780example, it will align variable names in declaration lists, or the
1781equal signs of assignments.
1782
424d8b44 1783+++
559cee90
DL
1784*** `paragraph-indent-minor-mode' is a new minor mode supporting
1785paragraphs in the same style as `paragraph-indent-text-mode'.
1786
424d8b44 1787+++
6448a6b3
GM
1788*** bs.el is a new package for buffer selection similar to
1789list-buffers or electric-buffer-list. Use M-x bs-show to display a
1790buffer menu with this package. You can use M-x bs-customize to
1791customize the package.
1792
6344985d
GM
1793*** find-lisp.el is a package emulating the Unix find command in Lisp.
1794
249652b1
GM
1795*** calculator.el is a small calculator package that is intended to
1796replace desktop calculators such as xcalc and calc.exe. Actually, it
1797is not too small - it has more features than most desktop calculators,
1798and can be customized easily to get many more functions. It should
1799not be confused with "calc" which is a much bigger mathematical tool
1800which answers different needs.
1801
424d8b44 1802+++
3476b54a
GM
1803*** The minor modes cwarn-mode and global-cwarn-mode highlights
1804suspicious C and C++ constructions. Currently, assignments inside
1805expressions, semicolon following `if', `for' and `while' (except, of
1806course, after a `do .. while' statement), and C++ functions with
1807reference parameters are recognized. The modes require font-lock mode
1808to be enabled.
1809
424d8b44 1810+++
8964fec7
SM
1811*** smerge-mode.el provides `smerge-mode', a simple minor-mode for files
1812containing diff3-style conflict markers, such as generated by RCS.
1813
424d8b44 1814+++
a933dad1
DL
1815*** 5x5.el is a simple puzzle game.
1816
424d8b44 1817+++
a933dad1
DL
1818*** hl-line.el provides a minor mode to highlight the current line.
1819
1820*** ansi-color.el translates ANSI terminal escapes into text-properties.
1821
8901d1ac
GM
1822Please note: if `ansi-color-for-shell-mode' and
1823`global-font-lock-mode' are non-nil, loading ansi-color.el will
1824disable font-lock and add `ansi-color-apply' to
1825`comint-preoutput-filter-functions' for all shell-mode buffers. This
1826displays the output of "ls --color=yes" using the correct foreground
1827and background colors.
1828
a933dad1
DL
1829*** delphi.el provides a major mode for editing the Delphi (Object
1830Pascal) language.
1831
f6499c03 1832+++
a933dad1
DL
1833*** quickurl.el provides a simple method of inserting a URL based on
1834the text at point.
1835
1836*** sql.el provides an interface to SQL data bases.
1837
424d8b44 1838+++
8d54eb69
DL
1839*** fortune.el uses the fortune program to create mail/news signatures.
1840
a933dad1
DL
1841*** whitespace.el ???
1842
ebcfda83
GM
1843*** PostScript mode (ps-mode) is a new major mode for editing PostScript
1844files. It offers: interaction with a PostScript interpreter, including
1845(very basic) error handling; fontification, easily customizable for
1846interpreter messages; auto-indentation; insertion of EPSF templates and
1847often used code snippets; viewing of BoundingBox; commenting out /
1848uncommenting regions; conversion of 8bit characters to PostScript octal
1849codes. All functionality is accessible through a menu.
1850
1851*** delim-col helps to prettify columns in a text region or rectangle.
1852
1853Here is an example of columns:
1854
1855horse apple bus
1856dog pineapple car EXTRA
1857porcupine strawberry airplane
1858
1859Doing the following settings:
1860
1861 (setq delimit-columns-str-before "[ ")
1862 (setq delimit-columns-str-after " ]")
1863 (setq delimit-columns-str-separator ", ")
1864 (setq delimit-columns-separator "\t")
1865
1866
1867Selecting the lines above and typing:
1868
1869 M-x delimit-columns-region
1870
1871It results:
1872
1873[ horse , apple , bus , ]
1874[ dog , pineapple , car , EXTRA ]
1875[ porcupine, strawberry, airplane, ]
1876
1877delim-col has the following options:
1878
1879 delimit-columns-str-before Specify a string to be inserted
1880 before all columns.
1881
1882 delimit-columns-str-separator Specify a string to be inserted
1883 between each column.
1884
1885 delimit-columns-str-after Specify a string to be inserted
1886 after all columns.
1887
1888 delimit-columns-separator Specify a regexp which separates
1889 each column.
1890
1891delim-col has the following commands:
1892
1893 delimit-columns-region Prettify all columns in a text region.
1894 delimit-columns-rectangle Prettify all columns in a text rectangle.
1895
424d8b44 1896+++
f507826c 1897*** The package recentf.el maintains a menu for visiting files that
31fc5d15
GM
1898were operated on recently.
1899
1900M-x recentf-mode RET toggles recentf mode.
f507826c 1901
31fc5d15
GM
1902M-x customize-variable RET recentf-mode RET can be used to enable
1903recentf at Emacs startup.
f507826c 1904
31fc5d15
GM
1905M-x customize-variable RET recentf-menu-filter RET to specify a menu
1906filter function to change the menu appearance. For example, the recent
1907file list can be displayed:
f507826c 1908
31fc5d15
GM
1909- organized by major modes, directories or user defined rules.
1910- sorted by file pathes, file names, ascending or descending.
1911- showing pathes relative to the current default-directory
f507826c 1912
31fc5d15
GM
1913The `recentf-filter-changer' menu filter function allows to
1914dynamically change the menu appearance.
f507826c 1915
8062f458
DL
1916*** elide-head.el provides a mechanism for eliding boilerplate header
1917text.
1918
424d8b44 1919+++
36e24b82 1920*** footnote.el provides `footnote-mode', a minor mode supporting use
91735437
DL
1921of footnotes. It is intended for use with Message mode, but isn't
1922specific to Message mode.
1923
424d8b44 1924+++
36e24b82
DL
1925*** diff-mode.el provides `diff-mode', a major mode for
1926viewing/editing context diffs (patches). It is selected for files
1927with extension `.diff', `.diffs', `.patch' and `.rej'.
1928
424d8b44 1929+++
aaa659ef
DL
1930*** EUDC, the Emacs Unified Directory Client, provides a common user
1931interface to access directory servers using different directory
1932protocols. It has a separate manual.
1933
eee54b0e
DL
1934*** autoconf.el provides a major mode for editing configure.in files
1935for Autoconf, selected automatically.
1936
424d8b44 1937+++
612839b6
GM
1938*** windmove.el provides moving between windows.
1939
5d94f558 1940*** crm.el provides a facility to read multiple strings from the
612839b6 1941minibuffer with completion.
aaa659ef 1942
399da7e3
DL
1943*** todo-mode.el provides management of TODO lists and integration
1944with the diary features.
1945
6e417ca5
DL
1946*** autoarg.el provides a feature reported from Twenex Emacs whereby
1947numeric keys supply prefix args rather than self inserting.
1948
4a27bdfb
GM
1949*** The function `turn-off-auto-fill' unconditionally turns off Auto
1950Fill mode.
1951
60dd7e0e
DL
1952*** gnus-mule.el is now just a compatibility layer over the built-in
1953Gnus facilities.
1954
dace60cf
JW
1955*** pcomplete.el is a library that provides programmable completion
1956facilities for Emacs, similar to what zsh and tcsh offer. The main
1957difference is that completion functions are written in Lisp, meaning
1958they can be profiled, debugged, etc.
a18a342d 1959
965bc065
DL
1960+++
1961** Refill minor mode provides preliminary support for keeping
1962paragraphs filled as you modify them.
1963
1964+++
1965** The new global minor mode `auto-image-file-mode' allows image files
1966to be visited as images.
1967
a933dad1
DL
1968** Withdrawn packages
1969
1970*** mldrag.el has been removed. mouse.el provides the same
1971functionality with aliases for the mldrag functions.
25a81338 1972
3261c1d8
DL
1973*** eval-reg.el has been obsoleted by changes to edebug.el and removed.
1974
1975*** ph.el has been obsoleted by EUDC and removed.
ce75fd23
GM
1976
1977\f
01242779
DL
1978* Incompatible Lisp changes
1979
1980There are a few Lisp changes which are not backwards-compatible and
1981may require changes to existing code. Here is a list for reference.
1982
1983** Since `format' preserves text properties, the idiom
1984`(format %s foo)' no longer works to remove properties.
1985
1986** Since the `keymap' text property now has significance, some code
1987which uses both `local-map' and `keymap' properties (for portability)
1988may, for instance, give rise to duplicate menus when the keymaps from
1989these properties are active.
1990
1991** The change in the treatment of non_ASCII characters in search
1992ranges may affect some code.
1993\f
ce75fd23
GM
1994* Lisp changes made after edition 2.6 of the Emacs Lisp Manual,
1995(Display-related features are described in a page of their own below.)
1996
52d89894
GM
1997+++
1998** The user-option `face-font-registry-alternatives' specifies
1999alternative font registry names to try when looking for a font.
2000
4301cf66
DL
2001** Function `md5' calculates the MD5 "message digest"/"checksum",
2002currently using the `md5sum' program.
2003
6bc92b2e
GM
2004** Function `delete-frame' runs `delete-frame-hook' before actually
2005deleting the frame. The hook is called with one arg, the frame
2006being deleted.
2007
39e776cd
SM
2008** `add-hook' now makes the hook local if called with a non-nil LOCAL arg.
2009
a18a342d 2010+++
1396138a 2011** The treatment of non-ASCII characters in search ranges has changed.
a18a342d
DL
2012If a range in a regular expression or the arg of
2013skip-chars-forward/backward starts with a unibyte character C and ends
2014with a multibyte character C2, the range is divided into two: one is
2015C..?\377, the other is C1..C2, where C1 is the first character of C2's
2016charset.
2017
4fbdfdcf
MB
2018+++
2019** The new function `display-message-or-buffer' displays a message in
2020the echo area or pops up a buffer, depending on the length of the
2021message.
2022
6a0b0752
MB
2023** The new macro `with-auto-compression-mode' allows evaluating an
2024expression with auto-compression-mode enabled.
2025
47e351a3
GM
2026** In image specifications, `:heuristic-mask' has been replaced
2027with the more general `:mask' property.
2028
ba9eeda1
GM
2029** Image specifications accept more `:algorithm's.
2030
a2bd77b8
GM
2031** A `?' can be used in a symbol name without escaping it with a
2032backslash.
2033
424d8b44
DL
2034+++
2035** Reading from the mini-buffer now reads from standard input if Emacs
2036is running in batch mode. For example,
2037
2038 (message "%s" (read t))
2039
2040will read a Lisp expression from standard input and print the result
2041to standard output.
2042
2043+++
2044** The argument of `down-list', `backward-up-list', `up-list',
2045`kill-sexp', `backward-kill-sexp' and `mark-sexp' is now optional.
2046
ead53494
GM
2047** If `display-buffer-reuse-frames' is set, function `display-buffer'
2048will raise frames displaying a buffer, instead of creating a new
2049frame or window.
2050
f6499c03 2051+++
27848c01
GM
2052** Two new functions for removing elements from lists/sequences
2053were added
2054
2055- Function: remove ELT SEQ
2056
2057Return a copy of SEQ with all occurences of ELT removed. SEQ must be
2058a list, vector, or string. The comparison is done with `equal'.
2059
2060- Function: remq ELT LIST
2061
2062Return a copy of LIST with all occurences of ELT removed. The
2063comparison is done with `eq'.
2064
2065** The function `delete' now also works with vectors and strings.
3ab82477 2066
b548072f
GM
2067** The meaning of the `:weakness WEAK' argument of make-hash-table
2068has been changed.
2069
424d8b44 2070+++
07b14857
KH
2071** Function `aset' stores any multibyte character in any string
2072without signaling "Attempt to change char length of a string". It may
2073convert a unibyte string to multibyte if necessary.
2074
9662da0b
GM
2075** The value of the `help-echo' text property is called as a function
2076or evaluated, if it is not a string already, to obtain a help string.
d5aa31d8 2077
7fce7efb
DL
2078** Function `make-obsolete' now has an optional arg to say when the
2079function was declared obsolete.
2080
5d94f558 2081** Function `plist-member' is renamed from `widget-plist-member' (which is
7fce7efb
DL
2082retained as an alias).
2083
f98d3086
SM
2084** Easy-menu's :filter now works as in XEmacs.
2085It takes the unconverted (i.e. XEmacs) form of the menu and the result
2086is automatically converted to Emacs' form.
2087
87efd256
GM
2088** The new function `window-list' has been defined
2089
39b39373
GM
2090- Function: window-list &optional FRAME WINDOW MINIBUF
2091
2092Return a list of windows on FRAME, starting with WINDOW. FRAME nil or
2093omitted means use the selected frame. WINDOW nil or omitted means use
2094the selected window. MINIBUF t means include the minibuffer window,
2095even if it isn't active. MINIBUF nil or omitted means include the
2096minibuffer window only if it's active. MINIBUF neither nil nor t
2097means never include the minibuffer window.
87efd256 2098
67c9a1d2
GM
2099** There's a new function `some-window' defined as follows
2100
2101- Function: some-window PREDICATE &optional MINIBUF ALL-FRAMES DEFAULT
2102
2103Return a window satisfying PREDICATE.
2104
2105This function cycles through all visible windows using `walk-windows',
2106calling PREDICATE on each one. PREDICATE is called with a window as
2107argument. The first window for which PREDICATE returns a non-nil
2108value is returned. If no window satisfies PREDICATE, DEFAULT is
2109returned.
2110
2111Optional second arg MINIBUF t means count the minibuffer window even
2112if not active. MINIBUF nil or omitted means count the minibuffer iff
2113it is active. MINIBUF neither t nor nil means not to count the
2114minibuffer even if it is active.
2115
2116Several frames may share a single minibuffer; if the minibuffer
2117counts, all windows on all frames that share that minibuffer count
2118too. Therefore, if you are using a separate minibuffer frame
2119and the minibuffer is active and MINIBUF says it counts,
2120`walk-windows' includes the windows in the frame from which you
2121entered the minibuffer, as well as the minibuffer window.
2122
2123ALL-FRAMES is the optional third argument.
2124ALL-FRAMES nil or omitted means cycle within the frames as specified above.
2125ALL-FRAMES = `visible' means include windows on all visible frames.
2126ALL-FRAMES = 0 means include windows on all visible and iconified frames.
2127ALL-FRAMES = t means include windows on all frames including invisible frames.
2128If ALL-FRAMES is a frame, it means include windows on that frame.
2129Anything else means restrict to the selected frame.
2130
ead53494
GM
2131** The function `single-key-description' now encloses function key and
2132event names in angle brackets. When called with a second optional
2133argument non-nil, angle brackets won't be printed.
dce6b995 2134
25fa6deb
GM
2135** If the variable `message-truncate-lines' is bound to t around a
2136call to `message', the echo area will not be resized to display that
088831a6
GM
2137message; it will be truncated instead, as it was done in 20.x.
2138Default value is nil.
25fa6deb 2139
5d94f558 2140** The user option `line-number-display-limit' can now be set to nil,
1681ead6
GM
2141meaning no limit.
2142
5d94f558 2143** `select-safe-coding-system' now also checks the most preferred
c08398de
DL
2144coding-system if buffer-file-coding-system is `undecided' and
2145DEFAULT-CODING-SYSTEM is not specified,
2146
9b2999d0
DL
2147+++
2148** The function `subr-arity' provides information about the argument
2149list of a primitive.
de370c4c 2150
c286608e
SM
2151** `where-is-internal' now also accepts a list of keymaps.
2152
9b2999d0 2153+++
80c05bd3
DL
2154** The text property `keymap' specifies a key map which overrides the
2155buffer's local map and the map specified by the `local-map' property.
2156This is probably what most current uses of `local-map' want, rather
2157than replacing the local map.
2158
4bc7a543
DL
2159** The obsolete variables before-change-function and
2160after-change-function are no longer acted upon and have been removed.
45f485a6
GM
2161
2162** The function `apropos-mode' runs the hook `apropos-mode-hook'.
2163
f6499c03 2164+++
c286608e
SM
2165** `concat' no longer accepts individual integer arguments,
2166as promised long ago.
f0298744 2167
5d94f558 2168** The new function `float-time' returns the current time as a float.
a933dad1
DL
2169\f
2170* Lisp changes in Emacs 21.1 (see following page for display-related features)
2171
2172Note that +++ before an item means the Lisp manual has been updated.
2173--- means that I have decided it does not need to be in the Lisp manual.
2174When you add a new item, please add it without either +++ or ---
2175so I will know I still need to look at it -- rms.
2176
85c75536
MB
2177*** The special form `save-restriction' now works correctly even if the
2178buffer is widened inside the save-restriction and changes made outside
2179the original restriction. Previously, doing this would cause the saved
2180restriction to be restored incorrectly.
2181
0b8a3a6d
DL
2182*** The functions `find-charset-region' and `find-charset-string' include
2183`eight-bit-control' and/or `eight-bit-graphic' in the returned list
2184when it finds 8-bit characters. Previously, it included `ascii' in a
2185multibyte buffer and `unknown' in a unibyte buffer.
2186
2187*** The functions `set-buffer-modified', `string-as-multibyte' and
2188`string-as-unibyte' change the byte sequence of a buffer if it
2189contains a character from the `eight-bit-control' character set.
2190
2191*** The handling of multibyte sequences in a multibyte buffer is
2192changed. Previously, a byte sequence matching the pattern
2193[\200-\237][\240-\377]+ was interpreted as a single character
2194regardless of the length of the trailing bytes [\240-\377]+. Thus, if
2195the sequence was longer than what the leading byte indicated, the
2196extra trailing bytes were ignored by Lisp functions. Now such extra
2197bytes are independent 8-bit characters belonging to the charset
2198eight-bit-graphic.
2199
2200** Fontsets are now implemented using char-tables.
2201
2202A fontset can now be specified for for each independent character, for
2203a group of characters or for a character set rather than just for a
2204character set as previously.
2205
2206*** The arguments of the function `set-fontset-font' are changed.
2207They are NAME, CHARACTER, FONTNAME, and optional FRAME. The function
2208modifies fontset NAME to use FONTNAME for CHARACTER.
2209
2210CHARACTER may be a cons (FROM . TO), where FROM and TO are non-generic
2211characters. In that case FONTNAME is used for all characters in the
2212range FROM and TO (inclusive). CHARACTER may be a charset. In that
2213case FONTNAME is used for all character in the charset.
2214
2215FONTNAME may be a cons (FAMILY . REGISTRY), where FAMILY is the family
2216name of a font and REGSITRY is a registry name of a font.
2217
2218*** Variable x-charset-registry has been deleted. The default charset
2219registries of character sets are set in the default fontset
2220"fontset-default".
2221
2222*** The function `create-fontset-from-fontset-spec' ignores the second
2223argument STYLE-VARIANT. It never creates style-variant fontsets.
2224
2225** The method of composing characters is changed. Now character
2226composition is done by a special text property `composition' in
2227buffers and strings.
2228
2229*** Charset composition is deleted. Emacs never creates a `composite
2230character' which is an independent character with a unique character
2231code. Thus the following functions handling `composite characters'
2232have been deleted: composite-char-component,
2233composite-char-component-count, composite-char-composition-rule,
2234composite-char-composition-rule and decompose-composite-char delete.
2235The variables leading-code-composition and min-composite-char have
2236also been deleted.
2237
2238*** Three more glyph reference points are added. They can be used to
2239specify a composition rule. See the documentation of the variable
2240`reference-point-alist' for more detail.
2241
2242*** The function `compose-region' takes new arguments COMPONENTS and
2243MODIFICATION-FUNC. With COMPONENTS, you can specify not only a
2244composition rule but also characters to be composed. Such characters
2245may differ between buffer and string text.
2246
2247*** The function `compose-string' takes new arguments START, END,
2248COMPONENTS, and MODIFICATION-FUNC.
2249
2250*** The function `compose-string' puts text property `composition'
2251directly on the argument STRING instead of returning a new string.
2252Likewise, the function `decompose-string' just removes text property
2253`composition' from STRING.
2254
2255*** The new function `find-composition' returns information about
2256a composition at a specified position in a buffer or a string.
2257
2258*** The function `decompose-composite-char' is now labeled as
2259obsolete.
2260
965bc065 2261** The new character sets `mule-unicode-0100-24ff',
f620908e 2262`mule-unicode-2500-33ff', and `mule-unicode-e000-ffff' are introduced
965bc065 2263for Unicode characters in the range U+0100..U+24FF, U+2500..U+33FF,
f620908e 2264U+E000..U+FFFF respectively.
0b8a3a6d
DL
2265
2266** The new character sets `japanese-jisx0213-1' and
2267`japanese-jisx0213-2' are introduced for the new Japanese standard JIS
2268X 0213 Plane 1 and Plane 2.
2269
2270+++
2271** The new character sets `eight-bit-control' and `eight-bit-graphic'
2272are introduced for 8-bit characters in the ranges 0x80..0x9F and
f98d3086 22730xA0..0xFF respectively.
0b8a3a6d 2274
399da7e3 2275+++
f0124b4a
DL
2276** If the APPEND argument of `write-region' is an integer, it seeks to
2277that offset in the file before writing.
2278
f98d3086
SM
2279** The function `add-minor-mode' has been added for convenience and
2280compatibility with XEmacs (and is used internally by define-minor-mode).
7464346d 2281
612839b6
GM
2282** The function `shell-command' now sets the default directory of the
2283`*Shell Command Output*' buffer to the default directory of the buffer
2284from which the command was issued.
2285
2286** The functions `query-replace', `query-replace-regexp',
2287`query-replace-regexp-eval' `map-query-replace-regexp',
2288`replace-string', `replace-regexp', and `perform-replace' take two
2289additional optional arguments START and END that specify the region to
2290operate on.
2291
271b4185
GM
2292** The new function `count-screen-lines' is a more flexible alternative
2293to `window-buffer-height'.
2294
2295- Function: count-screen-lines &optional BEG END COUNT-FINAL-NEWLINE WINDOW
2296
2297Return the number of screen lines in the region between BEG and END.
2298The number of screen lines may be different from the number of actual
2299lines, due to line breaking, display table, etc.
2300
2301Optional arguments BEG and END default to `point-min' and `point-max'
2302respectively.
2303
2304If region ends with a newline, ignore it unless optinal third argument
2305COUNT-FINAL-NEWLINE is non-nil.
2306
2307The optional fourth argument WINDOW specifies the window used for
2308obtaining parameters such as width, horizontal scrolling, and so
2309on. The default is to use the selected window's parameters.
2310
2311Like `vertical-motion', `count-screen-lines' always uses the current
2312buffer, regardless of which buffer is displayed in WINDOW. This makes
2313possible to use `count-screen-lines' in any buffer, whether or not it
2314is currently displayed in some window.
2315
3c30cb6e
DL
2316** The new function `mapc' is like `mapcar' but doesn't collect the
2317argument function's results.
2318
62f20204
GM
2319** The functions base64-decode-region and base64-decode-string now
2320signal an error instead of returning nil if decoding fails.
2321
c0510d27 2322** The function sendmail-user-agent-compose now recognizes a `body'
b4da8dfa 2323header in the list of headers passed to it.
c0510d27
GM
2324
2325** The new function member-ignore-case works like `member', but
2326ignores differences in case and text representation.
2327
2328** The buffer-local variable cursor-type can be used to specify the
19d1bc27
GM
2329cursor to use in windows displaying a buffer. Values are interpreted
2330as follows:
2331
2332 t use the cursor specified for the frame (default)
2333 nil don't display a cursor
2334 `bar' display a bar cursor with default width
2335 (bar . WIDTH) display a bar cursor with width WIDTH
2336 others display a box cursor.
2337
9a0dd3dc
GM
2338** The variable open-paren-in-column-0-is-defun-start controls whether
2339an open parenthesis in column 0 is considered to be the start of a
2340defun. If set, the default, it is considered a defun start. If not
2341set, an open parenthesis in column 0 has no special meaning.
2342
d7b511c4 2343** The new function `string-to-syntax' can be used to translate syntax
dc1178bf 2344specifications in string form as accepted by `modify-syntax-entry' to
d7b511c4
GM
2345the cons-cell form that is used for the values of the `syntax-table'
2346text property, and in `font-lock-syntactic-keywords'.
2347
2348Example:
2349
2350 (string-to-syntax "()")
2351 => (4 . 41)
2352
1fa28578
GM
2353** Emacs' reader supports CL read syntax for integers in bases
2354other than 10.
2355
2356*** `#BINTEGER' or `#bINTEGER' reads INTEGER in binary (radix 2).
2357INTEGER optionally contains a sign.
2358
5d94f558 2359 #b1111
1fa28578 2360 => 15
5d94f558 2361 #b-1111
1fa28578
GM
2362 => -15
2363
2364*** `#OINTEGER' or `#oINTEGER' reads INTEGER in octal (radix 8).
2365
5d94f558 2366 #o666
1fa28578
GM
2367 => 438
2368
2369*** `#XINTEGER' or `#xINTEGER' reads INTEGER in hexadecimal (radix 16).
2370
5d94f558 2371 #xbeef
1fa28578
GM
2372 => 48815
2373
2374*** `#RADIXrINTEGER' reads INTEGER in radix RADIX, 2 <= RADIX <= 36.
2375
5d94f558 2376 #2R-111
1fa28578 2377 => -7
5d94f558 2378 #25rah
1fa28578
GM
2379 => 267
2380
3d4ff2dd 2381** The function `documentation-property' now evaluates the value of
f98d3086 2382the given property to obtain a string if it doesn't refer to etc/DOC
e9b4e5ff
GM
2383and isn't a string.
2384
3d4ff2dd
GM
2385** If called for a symbol, the function `documentation' now looks for
2386a `function-documentation' property of that symbol. If it has a non-nil
2387value, the documentation is taken from that value. If the value is
2388not a string, it is evaluated to obtain a string.
2389
16ce590d
DL
2390+++
2391** The last argument of `define-key-after' defaults to t for convenience.
2392
73825616 2393** The new function `replace-regexp-in-string' replaces all matches
16ce590d
DL
2394for a regexp in a string.
2395
2396** `mouse-position' now runs the abnormal hook
2397`mouse-position-function'.
2398
723e779c
GM
2399** The function string-to-number now returns a float for numbers
2400that don't fit into a Lisp integer.
2401
d1e103b2
GM
2402** The variable keyword-symbols-constants-flag has been removed.
2403Keywords are now always considered constants.
2404
31047e0d
DL
2405+++
2406** The new function `delete-and-extract-region' deletes text and
2407returns it.
2408
7a85e4df
GM
2409** The function `clear-this-command-keys' now also clears the vector
2410returned by function `recent-keys'.
2411
02b14400
RS
2412+++
2413** Variables `beginning-of-defun-function' and `end-of-defun-function'
2414can be used to define handlers for the functions that find defuns.
2415Major modes can define these locally instead of rebinding M-C-a
2416etc. if the normal conventions for defuns are not appropriate for the
2417mode.
404fa7d6 2418
02b14400 2419+++
8964fec7
SM
2420** easy-mmode-define-minor-mode now takes an additional BODY argument
2421and is renamed `define-minor-mode'.
2422
02b14400
RS
2423+++
2424** If an abbrev has a hook function which is a symbol, and that symbol
2425has a non-nil `no-self-insert' property, the return value of the hook
2426function specifies whether an expansion has been done or not. If it
2427returns nil, abbrev-expand also returns nil, meaning "no expansion has
2428been performed."
2429
2430When abbrev expansion is done by typing a self-inserting character,
2431and the abbrev has a hook with the `no-self-insert' property, and the
2432hook function returns non-nil meaning expansion has been done,
2433then the self-inserting character is not inserted.
ef961722 2434
02b14400 2435+++
81da8b32
GM
2436** The function `intern-soft' now accepts a symbol as first argument.
2437In this case, that exact symbol is looked up in the specified obarray,
2438and the function's value is nil if it is not found.
2439
02b14400 2440+++
9e207b90
GM
2441** The new macro `with-syntax-table' can be used to evaluate forms
2442with the syntax table of the current buffer temporarily set to a
2443specified table.
2444
2445 (with-syntax-table TABLE &rest BODY)
2446
2447Evaluate BODY with syntax table of current buffer set to a copy of
03d9c64c
GM
2448TABLE. The current syntax table is saved, BODY is evaluated, and the
2449saved table is restored, even in case of an abnormal exit. Value is
2450what BODY returns.
9e207b90 2451
02b14400 2452+++
d7f89643 2453** Regular expressions now support intervals \{n,m\} as well as
95cd4c40 2454Perl's shy-groups \(?:...\) and non-greedy *? +? and ?? operators.
601e0081
SM
2455Also backreferences like \2 are now considered as an error if the
2456corresponding subgroup does not exist (or is not closed yet).
2457Previously it would have been silently turned into `2' (ignoring the `\').
8964fec7 2458
02b14400 2459+++
dde9e75a
GM
2460** The optional argument BUFFER of function file-local-copy has been
2461removed since it wasn't used by anything.
2462
02b14400 2463+++
9da30515
GM
2464** The file name argument of function `file-locked-p' is now required
2465instead of being optional.
2466
02b14400 2467+++
d20679eb
GM
2468** The new built-in error `text-read-only' is signaled when trying to
2469modify read-only text.
2470
02b14400 2471+++
fbc164de
PE
2472** New functions and variables for locales.
2473
2474The new variable `locale-coding-system' specifies how to encode and
2475decode strings passed to low-level message functions like strerror and
b718982a
PE
2476time functions like strftime. The new variables
2477`system-messages-locale' and `system-time-locale' give the system
2478locales to be used when invoking these two types of functions.
fbc164de
PE
2479
2480The new function `set-locale-environment' sets the language
2481environment, preferred coding system, and locale coding system from
2482the system locale as specified by the LC_ALL, LC_CTYPE, and LANG
b718982a
PE
2483environment variables. Normally, it is invoked during startup and need
2484not be invoked thereafter. It uses the new variables
2485`locale-language-names', `locale-charset-language-names', and
2486`locale-preferred-coding-systems' to make its decisions.
fbc164de 2487
02b14400 2488+++
863476d1
SM
2489** syntax tables now understand nested comments.
2490To declare a comment syntax as allowing nesting, just add an `n'
2491modifier to either of the characters of the comment end and the comment
2492start sequences.
2493
02b14400 2494+++
ef6d912c
GM
2495** The function `pixmap-spec-p' has been renamed `bitmap-spec-p'
2496because `bitmap' is more in line with the usual X terminology.
2497
02b14400 2498+++
a933dad1
DL
2499** New function `propertize'
2500
2501The new function `propertize' can be used to conveniently construct
2502strings with text properties.
2503
2504- Function: propertize STRING &rest PROPERTIES
2505
2506Value is a copy of STRING with text properties assigned as specified
2507by PROPERTIES. PROPERTIES is a sequence of pairs PROPERTY VALUE, with
2508PROPERTY being the name of a text property and VALUE being the
2509specified value of that property. Example:
2510
2511 (propertize "foo" 'face 'bold 'read-only t)
2512
2513+++
2514** push and pop macros.
2515
02b14400
RS
2516Simple versions of the push and pop macros of Common Lisp
2517are now defined in Emacs Lisp. These macros allow only symbols
a933dad1
DL
2518as the place that holds the list to be changed.
2519
2520(push NEWELT LISTNAME) add NEWELT to the front of LISTNAME's value.
2521(pop LISTNAME) return first elt of LISTNAME, and remove it
2522 (thus altering the value of LISTNAME).
2523
02b14400
RS
2524** New dolist and dotimes macros.
2525
6c7fd5aa
RS
2526Simple versions of the dolist and dotimes macros of Common Lisp
2527are now defined in Emacs Lisp.
02b14400
RS
2528
2529(dolist (VAR LIST [RESULT]) BODY...)
2530 Execute body once for each element of LIST,
2531 using the variable VAR to hold the current element.
2532 Then return the value of RESULT, or nil if RESULT is omitted.
2533
2534(dotimes (VAR COUNT [RESULT]) BODY...)
2535 Execute BODY with VAR bound to successive integers running from 0,
2536 inclusive, to COUNT, exclusive.
2537 Then return the value of RESULT, or nil if RESULT is omitted.
2538
a933dad1
DL
2539+++
2540** Regular expressions now support Posix character classes such
2541as [:alpha:], [:space:] and so on.
2542
2543[:digit:] matches 0 through 9
2544[:cntrl:] matches ASCII control characters
2545[:xdigit:] matches 0 through 9, a through f and A through F.
2546[:blank:] matches space and tab only
2547[:graph:] matches graphic characters--everything except ASCII control chars,
2548 space, and DEL.
2549[:print:] matches printing characters--everything except ASCII control chars
2550 and DEL.
2551[:alnum:] matches letters and digits.
2552 (But at present, for multibyte characters,
2553 it matches anything that has word syntax.)
2554[:alpha:] matches letters.
2555 (But at present, for multibyte characters,
2556 it matches anything that has word syntax.)
2557[:ascii:] matches ASCII (unibyte) characters.
2558[:nonascii:] matches non-ASCII (multibyte) characters.
2559[:lower:] matches anything lower-case.
2560[:punct:] matches punctuation.
2561 (But at present, for multibyte characters,
2562 it matches anything that has non-word syntax.)
2563[:space:] matches anything that has whitespace syntax.
2564[:upper:] matches anything upper-case.
2565[:word:] matches anything that has word syntax.
2566
2567+++
2568** Emacs now has built-in hash tables.
2569
2570The following functions are defined for hash tables:
2571
2572- Function: make-hash-table ARGS
2573
2574The argument list ARGS consists of keyword/argument pairs. All arguments
2575are optional. The following arguments are defined:
2576
2577:test TEST
2578
2579TEST must be a symbol specifying how to compare keys. Default is `eql'.
2580Predefined are `eq', `eql' and `equal'. If TEST is not predefined,
2581it must have been defined with `define-hash-table-test'.
2582
2583:size SIZE
2584
2585SIZE must be an integer > 0 giving a hint to the implementation how
2586many elements will be put in the hash table. Default size is 65.
2587
2588:rehash-size REHASH-SIZE
2589
2590REHASH-SIZE specifies by how much to grow a hash table once it becomes
2591full. If REHASH-SIZE is an integer, add that to the hash table's old
2592size to get the new size. Otherwise, REHASH-SIZE must be a float >
25931.0, and the new size is computed by multiplying REHASH-SIZE with the
2594old size. Default rehash size is 1.5.
2595
2596:rehash-threshold THRESHOLD
2597
2598THRESHOLD must be a float > 0 and <= 1.0 specifying when to resize the
2599hash table. It is resized when the ratio of (number of entries) /
2600(size of hash table) is >= THRESHOLD. Default threshold is 0.8.
2601
2602:weakness WEAK
2603
b548072f
GM
2604WEAK must be either nil, one of the symbols `key, `value',
2605`key-or-value', `key-and-value', or t, meaning the same as
2606`key-and-value'. Entries are removed from weak tables during garbage
2607collection if their key and/or value are not referenced elsewhere
2608outside of the hash table. Default are non-weak hash tables.
a933dad1
DL
2609
2610- Function: makehash &optional TEST
2611
2612Similar to make-hash-table, but only TEST can be specified.
2613
2614- Function: hash-table-p TABLE
2615
2616Returns non-nil if TABLE is a hash table object.
2617
2618- Function: copy-hash-table TABLE
2619
2620Returns a copy of TABLE. Only the table itself is copied, keys and
2621values are shared.
2622
2623- Function: hash-table-count TABLE
2624
2625Returns the number of entries in TABLE.
2626
2627- Function: hash-table-rehash-size TABLE
2628
2629Returns the rehash size of TABLE.
2630
2631- Function: hash-table-rehash-threshold TABLE
2632
2633Returns the rehash threshold of TABLE.
2634
2635- Function: hash-table-rehash-size TABLE
2636
2637Returns the size of TABLE.
2638
d96d6bb0 2639- Function: hash-table-test TABLE
a933dad1
DL
2640
2641Returns the test TABLE uses to compare keys.
2642
2643- Function: hash-table-weakness TABLE
2644
2645Returns the weakness specified for TABLE.
2646
2647- Function: clrhash TABLE
2648
2649Clear TABLE.
2650
2651- Function: gethash KEY TABLE &optional DEFAULT
2652
2653Look up KEY in TABLE and return its associated VALUE or DEFAULT if
2654not found.
2655
79214ddf 2656- Function: puthash KEY VALUE TABLE
a933dad1
DL
2657
2658Associate KEY with VALUE in TABLE. If KEY is already associated with
2659another value, replace the old value with VALUE.
2660
2661- Function: remhash KEY TABLE
2662
2663Remove KEY from TABLE if it is there.
2664
2665- Function: maphash FUNCTION TABLE
2666
2667Call FUNCTION for all elements in TABLE. FUNCTION must take two
2668arguments KEY and VALUE.
2669
2670- Function: sxhash OBJ
2671
2672Return a hash code for Lisp object OBJ.
2673
2674- Function: define-hash-table-test NAME TEST-FN HASH-FN
2675
2676Define a new hash table test named NAME. If NAME is specified as
2677a test in `make-hash-table', the table created will use TEST-FN for
79214ddf 2678comparing keys, and HASH-FN to compute hash codes for keys. Test
a933dad1
DL
2679and hash function are stored as symbol property `hash-table-test'
2680of NAME with a value of (TEST-FN HASH-FN).
2681
2682TEST-FN must take two arguments and return non-nil if they are the same.
2683
2684HASH-FN must take one argument and return an integer that is the hash
2685code of the argument. The function should use the whole range of
2686integer values for hash code computation, including negative integers.
2687
2688Example: The following creates a hash table whose keys are supposed to
2689be strings that are compared case-insensitively.
2690
2691 (defun case-fold-string= (a b)
2692 (compare-strings a nil nil b nil nil t))
2693
2694 (defun case-fold-string-hash (a)
2695 (sxhash (upcase a)))
2696
79214ddf 2697 (define-hash-table-test 'case-fold 'case-fold-string=
a933dad1
DL
2698 'case-fold-string-hash))
2699
2700 (make-hash-table :test 'case-fold)
2701
2702+++
2703** The Lisp reader handles circular structure.
2704
2705It now works to use the #N= and #N# constructs to represent
2706circular structures. For example, #1=(a . #1#) represents
2707a cons cell which is its own cdr.
2708
2709+++
2710** The Lisp printer handles circular structure.
2711
2712If you bind print-circle to a non-nil value, the Lisp printer outputs
2713#N= and #N# constructs to represent circular and shared structure.
2714
a933dad1
DL
2715+++
2716** If the second argument to `move-to-column' is anything but nil or
2717t, that means replace a tab with spaces if necessary to reach the
2718specified column, but do not add spaces at the end of the line if it
2719is too short to reach that column.
2720
2721+++
2722** perform-replace has a new feature: the REPLACEMENTS argument may
2723now be a cons cell (FUNCTION . DATA). This means to call FUNCTION
2724after each match to get the replacement text. FUNCTION is called with
2725two arguments: DATA, and the number of replacements already made.
2726
2727If the FROM-STRING contains any upper-case letters,
2728perform-replace also turns off `case-fold-search' temporarily
2729and inserts the replacement text without altering case in it.
2730
2731+++
2732** The function buffer-size now accepts an optional argument
2733to specify which buffer to return the size of.
2734
2735+++
2736** The calendar motion commands now run the normal hook
2737calendar-move-hook after moving point.
2738
2739+++
2740** The new variable small-temporary-file-directory specifies a
2741directory to use for creating temporary files that are likely to be
2742small. (Certain Emacs features use this directory.) If
2743small-temporary-file-directory is nil, they use
2744temporary-file-directory instead.
2745
2746+++
2747** The variable `inhibit-modification-hooks', if non-nil, inhibits all
2748the hooks that track changes in the buffer. This affects
2749`before-change-functions' and `after-change-functions', as well as
2750hooks attached to text properties and overlay properties.
2751
2752+++
2753** assoc-delete-all is a new function that deletes all the
2754elements of an alist which have a particular value as the car.
2755
2756+++
2757** make-temp-file provides a more reliable way to create a temporary file.
2758
2759make-temp-file is used like make-temp-name, except that it actually
2760creates the file before it returns. This prevents a timing error,
2761ensuring that no other job can use the same name for a temporary file.
2762
2763+++
2764** New exclusive-open feature in `write-region'
2765
2766The optional seventh arg is now called MUSTBENEW. If non-nil, it insists
2767on a check for an existing file with the same name. If MUSTBENEW
2768is `excl', that means to get an error if the file already exists;
2769never overwrite. If MUSTBENEW is neither nil nor `excl', that means
2770ask for confirmation before overwriting, but do go ahead and
2771overwrite the file if the user gives confirmation.
2772
2773If the MUSTBENEW argument in `write-region' is `excl',
2774that means to use a special feature in the `open' system call
2775to get an error if the file exists at that time.
2776The error reported is `file-already-exists'.
2777
2778+++
2779** Function `format' now handles text properties.
2780
2781Text properties of the format string are applied to the result string.
2782If the result string is longer than the format string, text properties
2783ending at the end of the format string are extended to the end of the
2784result string.
2785
2786Text properties from string arguments are applied to the result
2787string where arguments appear in the result string.
2788
2789Example:
2790
2791 (let ((s1 "hello, %s")
2792 (s2 "world"))
2793 (put-text-property 0 (length s1) 'face 'bold s1)
2794 (put-text-property 0 (length s2) 'face 'italic s2)
b246b1f6 2795 (format s1 s2))
a933dad1
DL
2796
2797results in a bold-face string with an italic `world' at the end.
2798
2799+++
2800** Messages can now be displayed with text properties.
2801
2802Text properties are handled as described above for function `format'.
2803The following example displays a bold-face message with an italic
2804argument in it.
2805
2806 (let ((msg "hello, %s!")
2807 (arg "world"))
2808 (put-text-property 0 (length msg) 'face 'bold msg)
2809 (put-text-property 0 (length arg) 'face 'italic arg)
2810 (message msg arg))
2811
2812+++
2813** Sound support
2814
2815Emacs supports playing sound files on GNU/Linux and the free BSDs
2816(Voxware driver and native BSD driver, aka as Luigi's driver).
2817
2818Currently supported file formats are RIFF-WAVE (*.wav) and Sun Audio
2819(*.au). You must configure Emacs with the option `--with-sound=yes'
2820to enable sound support.
2821
2822Sound files can be played by calling (play-sound SOUND). SOUND is a
2823list of the form `(sound PROPERTY...)'. The function is only defined
2824when sound support is present for the system on which Emacs runs. The
2825functions runs `play-sound-functions' with one argument which is the
2826sound to play, before playing the sound.
2827
2828The following sound properties are supported:
2829
2830- `:file FILE'
2831
2832FILE is a file name. If FILE isn't an absolute name, it will be
2833searched relative to `data-directory'.
2834
6fb40beb
GM
2835- `:data DATA'
2836
2837DATA is a string containing sound data. Either :file or :data
2838may be present, but not both.
2839
a933dad1
DL
2840- `:volume VOLUME'
2841
2842VOLUME must be an integer in the range 0..100 or a float in the range
28430..1. This property is optional.
2844
01242779
DL
2845- `:device DEVICE'
2846
2847DEVICE is a string specifying the system device on which to play the
2848sound. The default device is system-dependent.
2849
a933dad1
DL
2850Other properties are ignored.
2851
01242779
DL
2852An alternative interface is called as
2853(play-sound-file FILE &optional VOLUME DEVICE).
2854
a933dad1 2855** `multimedia' is a new Finder keyword and Custom group.
356673d4 2856
9b2999d0 2857+++
356673d4
DL
2858** keywordp is a new predicate to test efficiently for an object being
2859a keyword symbol.
fc91dc2d
GM
2860
2861** Changes to garbage collection
2862
2863*** The function garbage-collect now additionally returns the number
2864of live and free strings.
2865
2866*** There is a new variable `strings-consed' holding the number of
2867strings that have been consed so far.
2868
a933dad1 2869\f
04545643
GM
2870* Lisp-level Display features added after release 2.6 of the Emacs
2871Lisp Manual
2872
f7eb32aa 2873+++
a299a6f0
GM
2874** The user-option `resize-mini-windows' controls how Emacs resizes
2875mini-windows.
2876
9b2999d0 2877+++
a299a6f0 2878** The function `pos-visible-in-window-p' now has a third argument, FULLY.
ea4c1b7c
MB
2879If FULLY is non-nil, then locations that are partially obscured aren't
2880considered visible.
2881
a299a6f0 2882** On window systems, `glyph-table' is no longer used.
82a452c8 2883
9a8d84ca
DL
2884+++
2885** Help strings in menu items are now used to provide `help-echo' text.
2c69ced2 2886
9b2999d0 2887+++
2c69ced2
GM
2888** The function `image-size' can be used to determine the size of an
2889image.
2890
2891- Function: image-size SPEC &optional PIXELS FRAME
2892
2893Return the size of an image as a pair (WIDTH . HEIGHT).
2894
2895SPEC is an image specification. PIXELS non-nil means return sizes
2896measured in pixels, otherwise return sizes measured in canonical
2897character units (fractions of the width/height of the frame's default
2898font). FRAME is the frame on which the image will be displayed.
2899FRAME nil or omitted means use the selected frame.
2900
9b2999d0 2901+++
ebb8f116
GM
2902** The function `image-mask-p' can be used to determine if an image
2903has a mask bitmap.
2904
2905- Function: image-mask-p SPEC &optional FRAME
2906
2907Return t if image SPEC has a mask bitmap.
2908FRAME is the frame on which the image will be displayed. FRAME nil
2909or omitted means use the selected frame.
2910
f6499c03 2911+++
0b8a3a6d
DL
2912** The function `find-image' can be used to find a usable image
2913satisfying one of a list of specifications.
2914
2915+++
2916** The STRING argument of `put-image' and `insert-image' is now
2917optional.
2918
f6499c03
DL
2919+++
2920** Image specifications may contain the property `:ascent center' (see
2921below).
04545643
GM
2922
2923\f
a933dad1
DL
2924* New Lisp-level Display features in Emacs 21.1
2925
2926Note that +++ before an item means the Lisp manual has been updated.
2927--- means that I have decided it does not need to be in the Lisp manual.
2928When you add a new item, please add it without either +++ or ---
2929so I will know I still need to look at it -- rms.
2930
f6d3257b
GM
2931** The function tty-suppress-bold-inverse-default-colors can be used
2932to make Emacs avoid displaying text with bold black foreground on TTYs.
2933
2934Some terminals, notably PC consoles, emulate bold text by displaying
2935text in brighter colors. On such a console, a bold black foreground
2936is displayed in a gray color. If this turns out to be hard to read on
2937your monitor---the problem occurred with the mode line on
2938laptops---you can instruct Emacs to ignore the text's boldness, and to
2939just display it black instead.
2940
2941This situation can't be detected automatically. You will have to put
2942a line like
2943
2944 (tty-suppress-bold-inverse-default-colors t)
2945
2946in your `.emacs'.
2947
a933dad1
DL
2948** New face implementation.
2949
2950Emacs faces have been reimplemented from scratch. They don't use XLFD
2951font names anymore and face merging now works as expected.
2952
2953+++
2954*** New faces.
2955
2956Each face can specify the following display attributes:
2957
2958 1. Font family or fontset alias name.
79214ddf 2959
a933dad1
DL
2960 2. Relative proportionate width, aka character set width or set
2961 width (swidth), e.g. `semi-compressed'.
79214ddf 2962
a933dad1 2963 3. Font height in 1/10pt
79214ddf 2964
a933dad1 2965 4. Font weight, e.g. `bold'.
79214ddf 2966
a933dad1 2967 5. Font slant, e.g. `italic'.
79214ddf 2968
a933dad1 2969 6. Foreground color.
79214ddf 2970
a933dad1
DL
2971 7. Background color.
2972
2973 8. Whether or not characters should be underlined, and in what color.
2974
2975 9. Whether or not characters should be displayed in inverse video.
2976
2977 10. A background stipple, a bitmap.
2978
2979 11. Whether or not characters should be overlined, and in what color.
2980
2981 12. Whether or not characters should be strike-through, and in what
2982 color.
2983
2984 13. Whether or not a box should be drawn around characters, its
2985 color, the width of the box lines, and 3D appearance.
2986
2987Faces are frame-local by nature because Emacs allows to define the
2988same named face (face names are symbols) differently for different
2989frames. Each frame has an alist of face definitions for all named
2990faces. The value of a named face in such an alist is a Lisp vector
2991with the symbol `face' in slot 0, and a slot for each each of the face
2992attributes mentioned above.
2993
2994There is also a global face alist `face-new-frame-defaults'. Face
2995definitions from this list are used to initialize faces of newly
2996created frames.
79214ddf 2997
a933dad1
DL
2998A face doesn't have to specify all attributes. Those not specified
2999have a nil value. Faces specifying all attributes are called
3000`fully-specified'.
3001
3002+++
3003*** Face merging.
3004
3005The display style of a given character in the text is determined by
3006combining several faces. This process is called `face merging'. Any
3007aspect of the display style that isn't specified by overlays or text
3008properties is taken from the `default' face. Since it is made sure
3009that the default face is always fully-specified, face merging always
3010results in a fully-specified face.
3011
3012+++
3013*** Face realization.
3014
3015After all face attributes for a character have been determined by
3016merging faces of that character, that face is `realized'. The
3017realization process maps face attributes to what is physically
3018available on the system where Emacs runs. The result is a `realized
3019face' in form of an internal structure which is stored in the face
3020cache of the frame on which it was realized.
3021
3022Face realization is done in the context of the charset of the
3023character to display because different fonts and encodings are used
3024for different charsets. In other words, for characters of different
3025charsets, different realized faces are needed to display them.
3026
3027Except for composite characters, faces are always realized for a
3028specific character set and contain a specific font, even if the face
3029being realized specifies a fontset. The reason is that the result of
3030the new font selection stage is better than what can be done with
3031statically defined font name patterns in fontsets.
3032
3033In unibyte text, Emacs' charsets aren't applicable; function
3034`char-charset' reports ASCII for all characters, including those >
30350x7f. The X registry and encoding of fonts to use is determined from
3036the variable `face-default-registry' in this case. The variable is
3037initialized at Emacs startup time from the font the user specified for
3038Emacs.
3039
3040Currently all unibyte text, i.e. all buffers with
3041`enable-multibyte-characters' nil are displayed with fonts of the same
3042registry and encoding `face-default-registry'. This is consistent
3043with the fact that languages can also be set globally, only.
3044
a7c13351 3045+++
a933dad1
DL
3046**** Clearing face caches.
3047
3048The Lisp function `clear-face-cache' can be called to clear face caches
3049on all frames. If called with a non-nil argument, it will also unload
3050unused fonts.
3051
3052+++
3053*** Font selection.
79214ddf 3054
a933dad1
DL
3055Font selection tries to find the best available matching font for a
3056given (charset, face) combination. This is done slightly differently
3057for faces specifying a fontset, or a font family name.
3058
3059If the face specifies a fontset name, that fontset determines a
3060pattern for fonts of the given charset. If the face specifies a font
3061family, a font pattern is constructed. Charset symbols have a
3062property `x-charset-registry' for that purpose that maps a charset to
3063an XLFD registry and encoding in the font pattern constructed.
3064
3065Available fonts on the system on which Emacs runs are then matched
3066against the font pattern. The result of font selection is the best
3067match for the given face attributes in this font list.
3068
3069Font selection can be influenced by the user.
3070
3071The user can specify the relative importance he gives the face
3072attributes width, height, weight, and slant by setting
3073face-font-selection-order (faces.el) to a list of face attribute
3074names. The default is (:width :height :weight :slant), and means
3075that font selection first tries to find a good match for the font
3076width specified by a face, then---within fonts with that width---tries
3077to find a best match for the specified font height, etc.
3078
52d89894
GM
3079Setting `face-font-family-alternatives' allows the user to specify
3080alternative font families to try if a family specified by a face
3081doesn't exist. Likewise, `face-font-registry-alternatives' allows to
3082specify alternative font registry names to try.
a933dad1
DL
3083
3084+++
3085**** Scalable fonts
3086
3087Emacs can make use of scalable fonts but doesn't do so by default,
3088since the use of too many or too big scalable fonts may crash XFree86
3089servers.
3090
3091To enable scalable font use, set the variable
b246b1f6 3092`scalable-fonts-allowed'. A value of nil, the default, means never use
a933dad1
DL
3093scalable fonts. A value of t means any scalable font may be used.
3094Otherwise, the value must be a list of regular expressions. A
3095scalable font may then be used if it matches a regular expression from
3096that list. Example:
3097
3098 (setq scalable-fonts-allowed '("muleindian-2$"))
3099
3100allows the use of scalable fonts with registry `muleindian-2'.
3101
3102+++
3103*** Functions and variables related to font selection.
3104
3105- Function: x-family-fonts &optional FAMILY FRAME
3106
3107Return a list of available fonts of family FAMILY on FRAME. If FAMILY
3108is omitted or nil, list all families. Otherwise, FAMILY must be a
3109string, possibly containing wildcards `?' and `*'.
3110
3111If FRAME is omitted or nil, use the selected frame. Each element of
3112the result is a vector [FAMILY WIDTH POINT-SIZE WEIGHT SLANT FIXED-P
3113FULL REGISTRY-AND-ENCODING]. FAMILY is the font family name.
3114POINT-SIZE is the size of the font in 1/10 pt. WIDTH, WEIGHT, and
3115SLANT are symbols describing the width, weight and slant of the font.
3116These symbols are the same as for face attributes. FIXED-P is non-nil
3117if the font is fixed-pitch. FULL is the full name of the font, and
3118REGISTRY-AND-ENCODING is a string giving the registry and encoding of
3119the font. The result list is sorted according to the current setting
3120of the face font sort order.
3121
79214ddf 3122- Function: x-font-family-list
a933dad1
DL
3123
3124Return a list of available font families on FRAME. If FRAME is
3125omitted or nil, use the selected frame. Value is a list of conses
3126(FAMILY . FIXED-P) where FAMILY is a font family, and FIXED-P is
3127non-nil if fonts of that family are fixed-pitch.
3128
3129- Variable: font-list-limit
3130
3131Limit for font matching. If an integer > 0, font matching functions
3132won't load more than that number of fonts when searching for a
3133matching font. The default is currently 100.
3134
3135+++
3136*** Setting face attributes.
3137
3138For the most part, the new face implementation is interface-compatible
3139with the old one. Old face attribute related functions are now
3140implemented in terms of the new functions `set-face-attribute' and
3141`face-attribute'.
3142
3143Face attributes are identified by their names which are keyword
3144symbols. All attributes can be set to `unspecified'.
3145
3146The following attributes are recognized:
3147
3148`:family'
3149
3150VALUE must be a string specifying the font family, e.g. ``courier'',
3151or a fontset alias name. If a font family is specified, wild-cards `*'
3152and `?' are allowed.
3153
3154`:width'
3155
3156VALUE specifies the relative proportionate width of the font to use.
3157It must be one of the symbols `ultra-condensed', `extra-condensed',
3158`condensed', `semi-condensed', `normal', `semi-expanded', `expanded',
3159`extra-expanded', or `ultra-expanded'.
3160
3161`:height'
3162
787345ff
MB
3163VALUE must be either an integer specifying the height of the font to use
3164in 1/10 pt, a floating point number specifying the amount by which to
3165scale any underlying face, or a function, which is called with the old
3166height (from the underlying face), and should return the new height.
a933dad1
DL
3167
3168`:weight'
3169
3170VALUE specifies the weight of the font to use. It must be one of the
3171symbols `ultra-bold', `extra-bold', `bold', `semi-bold', `normal',
3172`semi-light', `light', `extra-light', `ultra-light'.
3173
3174`:slant'
3175
3176VALUE specifies the slant of the font to use. It must be one of the
3177symbols `italic', `oblique', `normal', `reverse-italic', or
3178`reverse-oblique'.
3179
3180`:foreground', `:background'
3181
3182VALUE must be a color name, a string.
3183
3184`:underline'
3185
3186VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be underlined. If
3187VALUE is t, underline with foreground color of the face. If VALUE is
3188a string, underline with that color. If VALUE is nil, explicitly
3189don't underline.
3190
3191`:overline'
3192
3193VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be overlined. If
3194VALUE is t, overline with foreground color of the face. If VALUE is a
3195string, overline with that color. If VALUE is nil, explicitly don't
3196overline.
3197
3198`:strike-through'
3199
3200VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be drawn with a line
3201striking through them. If VALUE is t, use the foreground color of the
3202face. If VALUE is a string, strike-through with that color. If VALUE
3203is nil, explicitly don't strike through.
3204
3205`:box'
3206
3207VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should have a box drawn
3208around them. If VALUE is nil, explicitly don't draw boxes. If
3209VALUE is t, draw a box with lines of width 1 in the foreground color
3210of the face. If VALUE is a string, the string must be a color name,
3211and the box is drawn in that color with a line width of 1. Otherwise,
3212VALUE must be a property list of the form `(:line-width WIDTH
3213:color COLOR :style STYLE)'. If a keyword/value pair is missing from
3214the property list, a default value will be used for the value, as
3215specified below. WIDTH specifies the width of the lines to draw; it
3216defaults to 1. COLOR is the name of the color to draw in, default is
3217the foreground color of the face for simple boxes, and the background
3218color of the face for 3D boxes. STYLE specifies whether a 3D box
3219should be draw. If STYLE is `released-button', draw a box looking
3220like a released 3D button. If STYLE is `pressed-button' draw a box
3221that appears like a pressed button. If STYLE is nil, the default if
3222the property list doesn't contain a style specification, draw a 2D
3223box.
3224
3225`:inverse-video'
3226
3227VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be displayed in
3228inverse video. VALUE must be one of t or nil.
3229
3230`:stipple'
3231
3232If VALUE is a string, it must be the name of a file of pixmap data.
3233The directories listed in the `x-bitmap-file-path' variable are
3234searched. Alternatively, VALUE may be a list of the form (WIDTH
3235HEIGHT DATA) where WIDTH and HEIGHT are the size in pixels, and DATA
3236is a string containing the raw bits of the bitmap. VALUE nil means
3237explicitly don't use a stipple pattern.
3238
3239For convenience, attributes `:family', `:width', `:height', `:weight',
3240and `:slant' may also be set in one step from an X font name:
3241
3242`:font'
3243
3244Set font-related face attributes from VALUE. VALUE must be a valid
3245XLFD font name. If it is a font name pattern, the first matching font
3246is used--this is for compatibility with the behavior of previous
3247versions of Emacs.
3248
3249For compatibility with Emacs 20, keywords `:bold' and `:italic' can
3250be used to specify that a bold or italic font should be used. VALUE
3251must be t or nil in that case. A value of `unspecified' is not allowed."
3252
3253Please see also the documentation of `set-face-attribute' and
3254`defface'.
3255
787345ff
MB
3256`:inherit'
3257
3258VALUE is the name of a face from which to inherit attributes, or a list
3259of face names. Attributes from inherited faces are merged into the face
3260like an underlying face would be, with higher priority than underlying faces.
3261
a933dad1
DL
3262*** Face attributes and X resources
3263
3264The following X resource names can be used to set face attributes
3265from X resources:
3266
3267 Face attribute X resource class
3268-----------------------------------------------------------------------
3269 :family attributeFamily . Face.AttributeFamily
3270 :width attributeWidth Face.AttributeWidth
3271 :height attributeHeight Face.AttributeHeight
3272 :weight attributeWeight Face.AttributeWeight
3273 :slant attributeSlant Face.AttributeSlant
3274 foreground attributeForeground Face.AttributeForeground
3275 :background attributeBackground . Face.AttributeBackground
3276 :overline attributeOverline Face.AttributeOverline
3277 :strike-through attributeStrikeThrough Face.AttributeStrikeThrough
3278 :box attributeBox Face.AttributeBox
3279 :underline attributeUnderline Face.AttributeUnderline
3280 :inverse-video attributeInverse Face.AttributeInverse
3281 :stipple attributeStipple Face.AttributeStipple
79214ddf 3282 or attributeBackgroundPixmap
a933dad1
DL
3283 Face.AttributeBackgroundPixmap
3284 :font attributeFont Face.AttributeFont
3285 :bold attributeBold Face.AttributeBold
3286 :italic attributeItalic . Face.AttributeItalic
3287 :font attributeFont Face.AttributeFont
3288
3289+++
3290*** Text property `face'.
3291
3292The value of the `face' text property can now be a single face
3293specification or a list of such specifications. Each face
3294specification can be
3295
32961. A symbol or string naming a Lisp face.
3297
32982. A property list of the form (KEYWORD VALUE ...) where each
3299 KEYWORD is a face attribute name, and VALUE is an appropriate value
3300 for that attribute. Please see the doc string of `set-face-attribute'
3301 for face attribute names.
3302
33033. Conses of the form (FOREGROUND-COLOR . COLOR) or
3304 (BACKGROUND-COLOR . COLOR) where COLOR is a color name. This is
3305 for compatibility with previous Emacs versions.
3306
3307+++
3308** Support functions for colors on text-only terminals.
3309
acf3ecb7
EZ
3310The function `tty-color-define' can be used to define colors for use
3311on TTY and MSDOS frames. It maps a color name to a color number on
3312the terminal. Emacs defines a couple of common color mappings by
a933dad1 3313default. You can get defined colors with a call to
acf3ecb7 3314`defined-colors'. The function `tty-color-clear' can be
a933dad1
DL
3315used to clear the mapping table.
3316
acf3ecb7
EZ
3317** Unified support for colors independent of frame type.
3318
3319The new functions `defined-colors', `color-defined-p', `color-values',
3320and `display-color-p' work for any type of frame. On frames whose
3321type is neither x nor w32, these functions transparently map X-style
3322color specifications to the closest colors supported by the frame
3323display. Lisp programs should use these new functions instead of the
3324old `x-defined-colors', `x-color-defined-p', `x-color-values', and
3325`x-display-color-p'. (The old function names are still available for
3326compatibility; they are now aliases of the new names.) Lisp programs
3327should no more look at the value of the variable window-system to
3328modify their color-related behavior.
3329
3330The primitives `color-gray-p' and `color-supported-p' also work for
3331any frame type.
3332
8a5719f0
EZ
3333** Platform-independent functions to describe display capabilities.
3334
3335The new functions `display-mouse-p', `display-popup-menus-p',
3336`display-graphic-p', `display-selections-p', `display-screens',
3337`display-pixel-width', `display-pixel-height', `display-mm-width',
3338`display-mm-height', `display-backing-store', `display-save-under',
3339`display-planes', `display-color-cells', `display-visual-class', and
3340`display-grayscale-p' describe the basic capabilities of a particular
3341display. Lisp programs should call these functions instead of testing
3342the value of the variables `window-system' or `system-type', or calling
3343platform-specific functions such as `x-display-pixel-width'.
3344
a933dad1
DL
3345+++
3346** The minibuffer prompt is now actually inserted in the minibuffer.
a933dad1 3347
463cac2d 3348This makes it possible to scroll through the prompt, if you want to.
3b51cca0
MB
3349To disallow this completely (like previous versions of emacs), customize
3350the variable `minibuffer-prompt-properties', and turn on the
3351`Inviolable' option.
a933dad1
DL
3352
3353The function minubuffer-prompt-end returns the current position of the
3354end of the minibuffer prompt, if the minibuffer is current.
3355Otherwise, it returns zero.
3356
463cac2d
GM
3357** New `field' abstraction in buffers.
3358
3359There is now code to support an abstraction called `fields' in emacs
3360buffers. A field is a contiguous region of text with the same `field'
59927f88 3361property (which can be a text property or an overlay).
463cac2d 3362
9a9dfda8 3363Many emacs functions, such as forward-word, forward-sentence,
463cac2d 3364forward-paragraph, beginning-of-line, etc., stop moving when they come
9a9dfda8 3365to the boundary between fields; beginning-of-line and end-of-line will
463cac2d 3366not let the point move past the field boundary, but other movement
fc7ac24f
GM
3367commands continue into the next field if repeated. Stopping at field
3368boundaries can be suppressed programmatically by binding
3369`inhibit-field-text-motion' to a non-nil value around calls to these
3370functions.
463cac2d
GM
3371
3372Now that the minibuffer prompt is inserted into the minibuffer, it is in
9a9dfda8 3373a separate field from the user-input part of the buffer, so that common
463cac2d 3374editing commands treat the user's text separately from the prompt.
a933dad1 3375
9a9dfda8
GM
3376The following functions are defined for operating on fields:
3377
59927f88 3378- Function: constrain-to-field NEW-POS OLD-POS &optional ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE ONLY-IN-LINE INHIBIT-CAPTURE-PROPERTY
9a9dfda8
GM
3379
3380Return the position closest to NEW-POS that is in the same field as OLD-POS.
59927f88 3381
9a9dfda8
GM
3382A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
3383If NEW-POS is nil, then the current point is used instead, and set to the
3384constrained position if that is is different.
3385
3386If OLD-POS is at the boundary of two fields, then the allowable
3387positions for NEW-POS depends on the value of the optional argument
3388ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE: If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is nil, then NEW-POS is
59927f88 3389constrained to the field that has the same `field' char-property
9a9dfda8
GM
3390as any new characters inserted at OLD-POS, whereas if ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE
3391is non-nil, NEW-POS is constrained to the union of the two adjacent
59927f88
MB
3392fields. Additionally, if two fields are separated by another field with
3393the special value `boundary', then any point within this special field is
3394also considered to be `on the boundary'.
9a9dfda8
GM
3395
3396If the optional argument ONLY-IN-LINE is non-nil and constraining
3397NEW-POS would move it to a different line, NEW-POS is returned
3398unconstrained. This useful for commands that move by line, like
3399C-n or C-a, which should generally respect field boundaries
3400only in the case where they can still move to the right line.
3401
59927f88
MB
3402If the optional argument INHIBIT-CAPTURE-PROPERTY is non-nil, and OLD-POS has
3403a non-nil property of that name, then any field boundaries are ignored.
3404
3405Field boundaries are not noticed if `inhibit-field-text-motion' is non-nil.
3406
3407- Function: delete-field &optional POS
9a9dfda8 3408
59927f88 3409Delete the field surrounding POS.
9a9dfda8 3410A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
59927f88 3411If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS.
9a9dfda8
GM
3412
3413- Function: field-beginning &optional POS ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE
3414
3415Return the beginning of the field surrounding POS.
3416A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
59927f88
MB
3417If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS.
3418If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is non-nil and POS is at the beginning of its
9a9dfda8
GM
3419field, then the beginning of the *previous* field is returned.
3420
3421- Function: field-end &optional POS ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE
3422
3423Return the end of the field surrounding POS.
3424A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
59927f88
MB
3425If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS.
3426If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is non-nil and POS is at the end of its field,
9a9dfda8
GM
3427then the end of the *following* field is returned.
3428
3429- Function: field-string &optional POS
3430
3431Return the contents of the field surrounding POS as a string.
3432A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
59927f88 3433If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS.
9a9dfda8
GM
3434
3435- Function: field-string-no-properties &optional POS
3436
3437Return the contents of the field around POS, without text-properties.
3438A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
59927f88 3439If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS.
9a9dfda8 3440
a933dad1
DL
3441+++
3442** Image support.
3443
3444Emacs can now display images. Images are inserted into text by giving
3445strings or buffer text a `display' text property containing one of
3446(AREA IMAGE) or IMAGE. The display of the `display' property value
3447replaces the display of the characters having that property.
3448
3449If the property value has the form (AREA IMAGE), AREA must be one of
3450`(margin left-margin)', `(margin right-margin)' or `(margin nil)'. If
3451AREA is `(margin nil)', IMAGE will be displayed in the text area of a
3452window, otherwise it will be displayed in the left or right marginal
3453area.
3454
3455IMAGE is an image specification.
3456
3457*** Image specifications
3458
3459Image specifications are lists of the form `(image PROPS)' where PROPS
3460is a property list whose keys are keyword symbols. Each
3461specifications must contain a property `:type TYPE' with TYPE being a
35a5514b
GM
3462symbol specifying the image type, e.g. `xbm'. Properties not
3463described below are ignored.
a933dad1
DL
3464
3465The following is a list of properties all image types share.
3466
3467`:ascent ASCENT'
3468
576da55d
GM
3469ASCENT must be a number in the range 0..100, or the symbol `center'.
3470If it is a number, it specifies the percentage of the image's height
5d94f558 3471to use for its ascent.
576da55d
GM
3472
3473If not specified, ASCENT defaults to the value 50 which means that the
3474image will be centered with the base line of the row it appears in.
3475
5d94f558 3476If ASCENT is `center' the image is vertically centered around a
04545643
GM
3477centerline which is the vertical center of text drawn at the position
3478of the image, in the manner specified by the text properties and
3479overlays that apply to the image.
a933dad1
DL
3480
3481`:margin MARGIN'
3482
79214ddf 3483MARGIN must be a number >= 0 specifying how many pixels to put as
a933dad1
DL
3484margin around the image. Default is 0.
3485
3486`:relief RELIEF'
3487
3488RELIEF is analogous to the `:relief' attribute of faces. Puts a relief
3489around an image.
3490
3491`:algorithm ALGO'
3492
47e351a3
GM
3493Apply an image algorithm to the image before displaying it.
3494
3495ALGO `laplace' or `emboss' means apply a Laplace or ``emboss''
3496edge-detection algorithm to the image.
3497
3498ALGO `(edge-detection :matrix MATRIX :color-adjust ADJUST)' means
3499apply a general edge-detection algorithm. MATRIX must be either a
3500nine-element list or a nine-element vector of numbers. A pixel at
3501position x/y in the transformed image is computed from original pixels
3502around that position. MATRIX specifies, for each pixel in the
3503neighborhood of x/y, a factor with which that pixel will influence the
3504transformed pixel; element 0 specifies the factor for the pixel at
3505x-1/y-1, element 1 the factor for the pixel at x/y-1 etc. as shown
3506below.
3507
3508 (x-1/y-1 x/y-1 x+1/y-1
3509 x-1/y x/y x+1/y
3510 x-1/y+1 x/y+1 x+1/y+1)
3511
3512The resulting pixel is computed from the color intensity of the color
3513resulting from summing up the RGB values of surrounding pixels,
3514multiplied by the specified factors, and dividing that sum by the sum
3515of the factors' absolute values.
3516
327652be 3517Laplace edge-detection currently uses a matrix of
a933dad1 3518
47e351a3
GM
3519 (1 0 0
3520 0 0 0
3521 9 9 -1)
3522
3523Emboss edge-detection uses a matrix of
3524
3525 ( 2 -1 0
3526 -1 0 1
3527 0 1 -2)
3528
ba9eeda1
GM
3529ALGO `disabled' means transform the image so that it looks
3530``disabled''.
3531
47e351a3
GM
3532`:mask MASK'
3533
3534If MASK is `heuristic' or `(heuristic BG)', build a clipping mask for
3535the image, so that the background of a frame is visible behind the
3536image. If BG is not specified, or if BG is t, determine the
3537background color of the image by looking at the 4 corners of the
3538image, assuming the most frequently occuring color from the corners is
3539the background color of the image. Otherwise, BG must be a list `(RED
3540GREEN BLUE)' specifying the color to assume for the background of the
3541image.
a933dad1 3542
47e351a3
GM
3543If MASK is nil, remove a mask from the image, if it has one. Images
3544in some formats include a mask which can be removed by specifying
3545`:mask nil'.
a933dad1
DL
3546
3547`:file FILE'
3548
3549Load image from FILE. If FILE is not absolute after expanding it,
3550search for the image in `data-directory'. Some image types support
3551building images from data. When this is done, no `:file' property
3552may be present in the image specification.
3553
518df5c4
GM
3554`:data DATA'
3555
3556Get image data from DATA. (As of this writing, this is not yet
3557supported for image type `postscript'). Either :file or :data may be
3558present in an image specification, but not both. All image types
3559support strings as DATA, some types allow additional types of DATA.
3560
a933dad1
DL
3561*** Supported image types
3562
b246b1f6 3563**** XBM, image type `xbm'.
a933dad1
DL
3564
3565XBM images don't require an external library. Additional image
3566properties supported are
3567
3568`:foreground FG'
3569
3570FG must be a string specifying the image foreground color. Default
3571is the frame's foreground.
3572
46c5af7f 3573`:background BG'
a933dad1
DL
3574
3575BG must be a string specifying the image foreground color. Default is
3576the frame's background color.
3577
3578XBM images can be constructed from data instead of file. In this
3579case, the image specification must contain the following properties
3580instead of a `:file' property.
3581
3582`:width WIDTH'
3583
3584WIDTH specifies the width of the image in pixels.
3585
3586`:height HEIGHT'
3587
3588HEIGHT specifies the height of the image in pixels.
3589
3590`:data DATA'
3591
3592DATA must be either
3593
3594 1. a string large enough to hold the bitmap data, i.e. it must
3595 have a size >= (WIDTH + 7) / 8 * HEIGHT
3596
3597 2. a bool-vector of size >= WIDTH * HEIGHT
3598
3599 3. a vector of strings or bool-vectors, one for each line of the
3600 bitmap.
3601
c76e04a8
GM
3602 4. a string that's an in-memory XBM file. Neither width nor
3603 height may be specified in this case because these are defined
3604 in the file.
3605
a933dad1
DL
3606**** XPM, image type `xpm'
3607
3608XPM images require the external library `libXpm', package
3609`xpm-3.4k.tar.gz', version 3.4k or later. Make sure the library is
3610found when Emacs is configured by supplying appropriate paths via
3611`--x-includes' and `--x-libraries'.
3612
3613Additional image properties supported are:
3614
3615`:color-symbols SYMBOLS'
3616
3617SYMBOLS must be a list of pairs (NAME . COLOR), with NAME being the
3618name of color as it appears in an XPM file, and COLOR being an X color
3619name.
3620
3621XPM images can be built from memory instead of files. In that case,
3622add a `:data' property instead of a `:file' property.
3623
a933dad1
DL
3624The XPM library uses libz in its implementation so that it is able
3625to display compressed images.
3626
3627**** PBM, image type `pbm'
3628
3629PBM images don't require an external library. Color, gray-scale and
2b8e9c91
GM
3630mono images are supported. Additional image properties supported for
3631mono images are
3632
3633`:foreground FG'
3634
3635FG must be a string specifying the image foreground color. Default
3636is the frame's foreground.
3637
3638`:background FG'
3639
3640BG must be a string specifying the image foreground color. Default is
3641the frame's background color.
a933dad1
DL
3642
3643**** JPEG, image type `jpeg'
3644
3645Support for JPEG images requires the external library `libjpeg',
3bd37feb
GM
3646package `jpegsrc.v6a.tar.gz', or later. Additional image properties
3647are:
3648
a933dad1
DL
3649**** TIFF, image type `tiff'
3650
3651Support for TIFF images requires the external library `libtiff',
3652package `tiff-v3.4-tar.gz', or later. There are no additional image
3653properties defined.
3654
3655**** GIF, image type `gif'
3656
3657Support for GIF images requires the external library `libungif', package
3658`libungif-4.1.0', or later.
3659
3660Additional image properties supported are:
3661
3662`:index INDEX'
3663
3664INDEX must be an integer >= 0. Load image number INDEX from a
3665multi-image GIF file. An error is signalled if INDEX is too large.
3666
3667This could be used to implement limited support for animated GIFs.
3668For example, the following function displays a multi-image GIF file
3669at point-min in the current buffer, switching between sub-images
3670every 0.1 seconds.
3671
3672(defun show-anim (file max)
3673 "Display multi-image GIF file FILE which contains MAX subimages."
3674 (display-anim (current-buffer) file 0 max t))
3675
3676(defun display-anim (buffer file idx max first-time)
3677 (when (= idx max)
3678 (setq idx 0))
518df5c4 3679 (let ((img (create-image file nil nil :index idx)))
a933dad1
DL
3680 (save-excursion
3681 (set-buffer buffer)
3682 (goto-char (point-min))
3683 (unless first-time (delete-char 1))
3684 (insert-image img "x"))
3685 (run-with-timer 0.1 nil 'display-anim buffer file (1+ idx) max nil)))
3686
3687**** PNG, image type `png'
3688
3689Support for PNG images requires the external library `libpng',
3690package `libpng-1.0.2.tar.gz', or later. There are no additional image
3691properties defined.
3692
3693**** Ghostscript, image type `postscript'.
3694
3695Additional image properties supported are:
3696
3697`:pt-width WIDTH'
3698
3699WIDTH is width of the image in pt (1/72 inch). WIDTH must be an
b246b1f6 3700integer. This is a required property.
a933dad1
DL
3701
3702`:pt-height HEIGHT'
3703
3704HEIGHT specifies the height of the image in pt (1/72 inch). HEIGHT
b246b1f6 3705must be a integer. This is an required property.
a933dad1
DL
3706
3707`:bounding-box BOX'
3708
3709BOX must be a list or vector of 4 integers giving the bounding box of
3710the PS image, analogous to the `BoundingBox' comment found in PS
3711files. This is an required property.
3712
3713Part of the Ghostscript interface is implemented in Lisp. See
3714lisp/gs.el.
3715
3716*** Lisp interface.
3717
79214ddf
FP
3718The variable `image-types' contains a list of those image types
3719which are supported in the current configuration.
a933dad1
DL
3720
3721Images are stored in an image cache and removed from the cache when
3722they haven't been displayed for `image-cache-eviction-delay seconds.
3723The function `clear-image-cache' can be used to clear the image cache
084cec2f
GM
3724manually. Images in the cache are compared with `equal', i.e. all
3725images with `equal' specifications share the same image.
a933dad1
DL
3726
3727*** Simplified image API, image.el
3728
3729The new Lisp package image.el contains functions that simplify image
3730creation and putting images into text. The function `create-image'
3731can be used to create images. The macro `defimage' can be used to
3732define an image based on available image types. The functions
3733`put-image' and `insert-image' can be used to insert an image into a
3734buffer.
3735
3736+++
3737** Display margins.
3738
3739Windows can now have margins which are used for special text
3740and images.
3741
3742To give a window margins, either set the buffer-local variables
3743`left-margin-width' and `right-margin-width', or call
3744`set-window-margins'. The function `window-margins' can be used to
3745obtain the current settings. To make `left-margin-width' and
3746`right-margin-width' take effect, you must set them before displaying
3747the buffer in a window, or use `set-window-buffer' to force an update
3748of the display margins.
3749
3750You can put text in margins by giving it a `display' text property
3751containing a pair of the form `(LOCATION . VALUE)', where LOCATION is
3752one of `left-margin' or `right-margin' or nil. VALUE can be either a
3753string, an image specification or a stretch specification (see later
3754in this file).
3755
3756+++
3757** Help display
3758
3759Emacs displays short help messages in the echo area, when the mouse
3760moves over a tool-bar item or a piece of text that has a text property
3761`help-echo'. This feature also applies to strings in the mode line
3762that have a `help-echo' property.
3763
9662da0b 3764If the value of the `help-echo' property is a function, that function
85a8aca9 3765is called with three arguments WINDOW, OBJECT and POSITION. WINDOW is
c20aeb83
GM
3766the window in which the help was found.
3767
3768If OBJECT is a buffer, POS is the position in the buffer where the
3769`help-echo' text property was found.
3770
3771If OBJECT is an overlay, that overlay has a `help-echo' property, and
3772POS is the position in the overlay's buffer under the mouse.
3773
3774If OBJECT is a string (an overlay string or a string displayed with
5ed8d5af 3775the `display' property), POS is the position in that string under the
c20aeb83 3776mouse.
d5aa31d8 3777
9662da0b
GM
3778If the value of the `help-echo' property is neither a function nor a
3779string, it is evaluated to obtain a help string.
3780
3781For tool-bar and menu-bar items, their key definition is used to
3782determine the help to display. If their definition contains a
3783property `:help FORM', FORM is evaluated to determine the help string.
3784For tool-bar items without a help form, the caption of the item is
3785used as help string.
a933dad1
DL
3786
3787The hook `show-help-function' can be set to a function that displays
f0298744
DL
3788the help string differently. For example, enabling a tooltip window
3789causes the help display to appear there instead of in the echo area.
a933dad1
DL
3790
3791+++
3792** Vertical fractional scrolling.
3793
3794The display of text in windows can be scrolled smoothly in pixels.
3795This is useful, for example, for making parts of large images visible.
3796
3797The function `window-vscroll' returns the current value of vertical
3798scrolling, a non-negative fraction of the canonical character height.
3799The function `set-window-vscroll' can be used to set the vertical
3800scrolling value. Here is an example of how these function might be
3801used.
3802
79214ddf
FP
3803 (global-set-key [A-down]
3804 #'(lambda ()
a933dad1 3805 (interactive)
79214ddf 3806 (set-window-vscroll (selected-window)
a933dad1 3807 (+ 0.5 (window-vscroll)))))
79214ddf 3808 (global-set-key [A-up]
a933dad1
DL
3809 #'(lambda ()
3810 (interactive)
79214ddf 3811 (set-window-vscroll (selected-window)
a933dad1
DL
3812 (- (window-vscroll) 0.5)))))
3813
3814+++
3815** New hook `fontification-functions'.
3816
3817Functions from `fontification-functions' are called from redisplay
3818when it encounters a region of text that is not yet fontified. This
3819variable automatically becomes buffer-local when set. Each function
3820is called with one argument, POS.
3821
3822At least one of the hook functions should fontify one or more
3823characters starting at POS in the current buffer. It should mark them
3824as fontified by giving them a non-nil value of the `fontified' text
3825property. It may be reasonable for these functions to check for the
3826`fontified' property and not put it back on, but they do not have to.
3827
3828+++
3829** Tool bar support.
3830
3831Emacs supports a tool bar at the top of a frame under X. The frame
3832parameter `tool-bar-lines' (X resource "toolBar", class "ToolBar")
3833controls how may lines to reserve for the tool bar. A zero value
3834suppresses the tool bar. If the value is non-zero and
3835`auto-resize-tool-bars' is non-nil the tool bar's size will be changed
3836automatically so that all tool bar items are visible.
3837
3838*** Tool bar item definitions
3839
3840Tool bar items are defined using `define-key' with a prefix-key
3841`tool-bar'. For example `(define-key global-map [tool-bar item1] ITEM)'
3842where ITEM is a list `(menu-item CAPTION BINDING PROPS...)'.
79214ddf 3843
a933dad1
DL
3844CAPTION is the caption of the item, If it's not a string, it is
3845evaluated to get a string. The caption is currently not displayed in
3846the tool bar, but it is displayed if the item doesn't have a `:help'
3847property (see below).
79214ddf 3848
a933dad1
DL
3849BINDING is the tool bar item's binding. Tool bar items with keymaps as
3850binding are currently ignored.
3851
3852The following properties are recognized:
3853
3854`:enable FORM'.
79214ddf 3855
a933dad1
DL
3856FORM is evaluated and specifies whether the tool bar item is enabled
3857or disabled.
79214ddf 3858
a933dad1 3859`:visible FORM'
79214ddf 3860
a933dad1 3861FORM is evaluated and specifies whether the tool bar item is displayed.
79214ddf 3862
a933dad1
DL
3863`:filter FUNCTION'
3864
3865FUNCTION is called with one parameter, the same list BINDING in which
3866FUNCTION is specified as the filter. The value FUNCTION returns is
3867used instead of BINDING to display this item.
79214ddf 3868
a933dad1
DL
3869`:button (TYPE SELECTED)'
3870
3871TYPE must be one of `:radio' or `:toggle'. SELECTED is evaluated
3872and specifies whether the button is selected (pressed) or not.
79214ddf 3873
a933dad1
DL
3874`:image IMAGES'
3875
3876IMAGES is either a single image specification or a vector of four
3877image specifications. If it is a vector, this table lists the
3878meaning of each of the four elements:
3879
3880 Index Use when item is
3881 ----------------------------------------
3882 0 enabled and selected
3883 1 enabled and deselected
3884 2 disabled and selected
3885 3 disabled and deselected
79214ddf 3886
4ba7246d
GM
3887If IMAGE is a single image specification, a Laplace edge-detection
3888algorithm is used on that image to draw the image in disabled state.
3889
a933dad1 3890`:help HELP-STRING'.
79214ddf 3891
a933dad1
DL
3892Gives a help string to display for the tool bar item. This help
3893is displayed when the mouse is moved over the item.
3894
dab96841 3895The function `toolbar-add-item' is a convenience function for adding
d1e68bce
DL
3896toolbar items generally, and `tool-bar-add-item-from-menu' can be used
3897to define a toolbar item with a binding copied from an item on the
3898menu bar.
dab96841 3899
8628686a
DL
3900The default bindings use a menu-item :filter to derive the tool-bar
3901dynamically from variable `tool-bar-map' which may be set
3902buffer-locally to override the global map.
3903
a933dad1
DL
3904*** Tool-bar-related variables.
3905
3906If `auto-resize-tool-bar' is non-nil, the tool bar will automatically
3907resize to show all defined tool bar items. It will never grow larger
3908than 1/4 of the frame's size.
3909
79214ddf 3910If `auto-raise-tool-bar-buttons' is non-nil, tool bar buttons will be
a933dad1
DL
3911raised when the mouse moves over them.
3912
3913You can add extra space between tool bar items by setting
3914`tool-bar-button-margin' to a positive integer specifying a number of
3915pixels. Default is 1.
3916
3917You can change the shadow thickness of tool bar buttons by setting
3918`tool-bar-button-relief' to an integer. Default is 3.
3919
3920*** Tool-bar clicks with modifiers.
3921
3922You can bind commands to clicks with control, shift, meta etc. on
79214ddf 3923a tool bar item. If
a933dad1
DL
3924
3925 (define-key global-map [tool-bar shell]
3926 '(menu-item "Shell" shell
3927 :image (image :type xpm :file "shell.xpm")))
3928
3929is the original tool bar item definition, then
3930
3931 (define-key global-map [tool-bar S-shell] 'some-command)
3932
3933makes a binding to run `some-command' for a shifted click on the same
3934item.
3935
3936** Mode line changes.
3937
3938+++
3939*** Mouse-sensitive mode line.
3940
3941The mode line can be made mouse-sensitive by displaying strings there
3942that have a `local-map' text property. There are three ways to display
3943a string with a `local-map' property in the mode line.
3944
39451. The mode line spec contains a variable whose string value has
3946a `local-map' text property.
3947
39482. The mode line spec contains a format specifier (e.g. `%12b'), and
3949that format specifier has a `local-map' property.
3950
39513. The mode line spec contains a list containing `:eval FORM'. FORM
3952is evaluated. If the result is a string, and that string has a
3953`local-map' property.
3954
3955The same mechanism is used to determine the `face' and `help-echo'
3956properties of strings in the mode line. See `bindings.el' for an
3957example.
3958
54522c9f
GM
3959*** If a mode line element has the form `(:eval FORM)', FORM is
3960evaluated and the result is used as mode line element.
3961
a933dad1
DL
3962+++
3963*** You can suppress mode-line display by setting the buffer-local
3964variable mode-line-format to nil.
3965
3966+++
3967*** A headerline can now be displayed at the top of a window.
3968
3969This mode line's contents are controlled by the new variable
3970`header-line-format' and `default-header-line-format' which are
3971completely analogous to `mode-line-format' and
3972`default-mode-line-format'. A value of nil means don't display a top
3973line.
3974
3975The appearance of top mode lines is controlled by the face
3976`header-line'.
3977
3978The function `coordinates-in-window-p' returns `header-line' for a
3979position in the header-line.
3980
3981+++
3982** Text property `display'
3983
623a0aae
GM
3984The `display' text property is used to insert images into text,
3985replace text with other text, display text in marginal area, and it is
3986also used to control other aspects of how text displays. The value of
3987the `display' property should be a display specification, as described
a933dad1
DL
3988below, or a list or vector containing display specifications.
3989
623a0aae
GM
3990*** Replacing text, displaying text in marginal areas
3991
3992To replace the text having the `display' property with some other
3993text, use a display specification of the form `(LOCATION STRING)'.
3994
3995If LOCATION is `(margin left-margin)', STRING is displayed in the left
3996marginal area, if it is `(margin right-margin)', it is displayed in
3997the right marginal area, and if LOCATION is `(margin nil)' STRING
3998is displayed in the text. In the latter case you can also use the
3999simpler form STRING as property value.
4000
a933dad1
DL
4001*** Variable width and height spaces
4002
4003To display a space of fractional width or height, use a display
4004specification of the form `(LOCATION STRECH)'. If LOCATION is
4005`(margin left-margin)', the space is displayed in the left marginal
4006area, if it is `(margin right-margin)', it is displayed in the right
4007marginal area, and if LOCATION is `(margin nil)' the space is
4008displayed in the text. In the latter case you can also use the
4009simpler form STRETCH as property value.
4010
4011The stretch specification STRETCH itself is a list of the form `(space
4012PROPS)', where PROPS is a property list which can contain the
4013properties described below.
4014
4015The display of the fractional space replaces the display of the
4016characters having the `display' property.
4017
4018- :width WIDTH
4019
4020Specifies that the space width should be WIDTH times the normal
4021character width. WIDTH can be an integer or floating point number.
4022
4023- :relative-width FACTOR
4024
4025Specifies that the width of the stretch should be computed from the
4026first character in a group of consecutive characters that have the
4027same `display' property. The computation is done by multiplying the
4028width of that character by FACTOR.
4029
4030- :align-to HPOS
4031
4032Specifies that the space should be wide enough to reach HPOS. The
4033value HPOS is measured in units of the normal character width.
4034
4035Exactly one of the above properties should be used.
4036
4037- :height HEIGHT
4038
4039Specifies the height of the space, as HEIGHT, measured in terms of the
4040normal line height.
4041
4042- :relative-height FACTOR
4043
4044The height of the space is computed as the product of the height
4045of the text having the `display' property and FACTOR.
4046
4047- :ascent ASCENT
4048
4049Specifies that ASCENT percent of the height of the stretch should be
4050used for the ascent of the stretch, i.e. for the part above the
4051baseline. The value of ASCENT must be a non-negative number less or
4052equal to 100.
4053
4054You should not use both `:height' and `:relative-height' together.
4055
4056*** Images
4057
4058A display specification for an image has the form `(LOCATION
4059. IMAGE)', where IMAGE is an image specification. The image replaces,
4060in the display, the characters having this display specification in
4061their `display' text property. If LOCATION is `(margin left-margin)',
4062the image will be displayed in the left marginal area, if it is
4063`(margin right-margin)' it will be displayed in the right marginal
4064area, and if LOCATION is `(margin nil)' the image will be displayed in
4065the text. In the latter case you can also use the simpler form IMAGE
4066as display specification.
4067
4068*** Other display properties
4069
c9e73000 4070- (space-width FACTOR)
a933dad1
DL
4071
4072Specifies that space characters in the text having that property
4073should be displayed FACTOR times as wide as normal; FACTOR must be an
4074integer or float.
4075
c9e73000 4076- (height HEIGHT)
a933dad1
DL
4077
4078Display text having this property in a font that is smaller or larger.
4079
4080If HEIGHT is a list of the form `(+ N)', where N is an integer, that
4081means to use a font that is N steps larger. If HEIGHT is a list of
4082the form `(- N)', that means to use a font that is N steps smaller. A
4083``step'' is defined by the set of available fonts; each size for which
4084a font is available counts as a step.
4085
4086If HEIGHT is a number, that means to use a font that is HEIGHT times
4087as tall as the frame's default font.
4088
4089If HEIGHT is a symbol, it is called as a function with the current
4090height as argument. The function should return the new height to use.
4091
4092Otherwise, HEIGHT is evaluated to get the new height, with the symbol
4093`height' bound to the current specified font height.
4094
c9e73000 4095- (raise FACTOR)
a933dad1
DL
4096
4097FACTOR must be a number, specifying a multiple of the current
4098font's height. If it is positive, that means to display the characters
4099raised. If it is negative, that means to display them lower down. The
4100amount of raising or lowering is computed without taking account of the
c9e73000 4101`height' subproperty.
a933dad1
DL
4102
4103*** Conditional display properties
4104
4105All display specifications can be conditionalized. If a specification
4106has the form `(:when CONDITION . SPEC)', the specification SPEC
4107applies only when CONDITION yields a non-nil value when evaluated.
4108During evaluattion, point is temporarily set to the end position of
4109the text having the `display' property.
4110
4111The normal specification consisting of SPEC only is equivalent to
4112`(:when t SPEC)'.
4113
4114+++
4115** New menu separator types.
4116
4117Emacs now supports more than one menu separator type. Menu items with
4118item names consisting of dashes only (including zero dashes) are
4119treated like before. In addition, the following item names are used
4120to specify other menu separator types.
4121
4122- `--no-line' or `--space', or `--:space', or `--:noLine'
4123
4124No separator lines are drawn, but a small space is inserted where the
4125separator occurs.
4126
4127- `--single-line' or `--:singleLine'
4128
4129A single line in the menu's foreground color.
4130
4131- `--double-line' or `--:doubleLine'
4132
4133A double line in the menu's foreground color.
4134
4135- `--single-dashed-line' or `--:singleDashedLine'
4136
4137A single dashed line in the menu's foreground color.
4138
4139- `--double-dashed-line' or `--:doubleDashedLine'
4140
4141A double dashed line in the menu's foreground color.
4142
4143- `--shadow-etched-in' or `--:shadowEtchedIn'
4144
4145A single line with 3D sunken appearance. This is the the form
4146displayed for item names consisting of dashes only.
4147
4148- `--shadow-etched-out' or `--:shadowEtchedOut'
4149
4150A single line with 3D raised appearance.
4151
4152- `--shadow-etched-in-dash' or `--:shadowEtchedInDash'
4153
4154A single dashed line with 3D sunken appearance.
4155
4156- `--shadow-etched-out-dash' or `--:shadowEtchedOutDash'
4157
4158A single dashed line with 3D raise appearance.
4159
4160- `--shadow-double-etched-in' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedIn'
4161
4162Two lines with 3D sunken appearance.
4163
4164- `--shadow-double-etched-out' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedOut'
4165
4166Two lines with 3D raised appearance.
4167
4168- `--shadow-double-etched-in-dash' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedInDash'
4169
4170Two dashed lines with 3D sunken appearance.
4171
4172- `--shadow-double-etched-out-dash' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedOutDash'
4173
4174Two dashed lines with 3D raised appearance.
4175
4176Under LessTif/Motif, the last four separator types are displayed like
4177the corresponding single-line separators.
4178
4179+++
4180** New frame parameters for scroll bar colors.
4181
4182The new frame parameters `scroll-bar-foreground' and
4183`scroll-bar-background' can be used to change scroll bar colors.
4184Their value must be either a color name, a string, or nil to specify
4185that scroll bars should use a default color. For toolkit scroll bars,
4186default colors are toolkit specific. For non-toolkit scroll bars, the
4187default background is the background color of the frame, and the
4188default foreground is black.
4189
4190The X resource name of these parameters are `scrollBarForeground'
4191(class ScrollBarForeground) and `scrollBarBackground' (class
4192`ScrollBarBackground').
4193
4194Setting these parameters overrides toolkit specific X resource
4195settings for scroll bar colors.
4196
4197+++
4198** You can set `redisplay-dont-pause' to a non-nil value to prevent
4199display updates from being interrupted when input is pending.
4200
4201---
4202** Changing a window's width may now change its window start if it
4203starts on a continuation line. The new window start is computed based
4204on the window's new width, starting from the start of the continued
4205line as the start of the screen line with the minimum distance from
4206the original window start.
4207
4208---
4209** The variable `hscroll-step' and the functions
4210`hscroll-point-visible' and `hscroll-window-column' have been removed
4211now that proper horizontal scrolling is implemented.
4212
4213+++
4214** Windows can now be made fixed-width and/or fixed-height.
4215
4216A window is fixed-size if its buffer has a buffer-local variable
4217`window-size-fixed' whose value is not nil. A value of `height' makes
4218windows fixed-height, a value of `width' makes them fixed-width, any
4219other non-nil value makes them both fixed-width and fixed-height.
4220
4221The following code makes all windows displaying the current buffer
4222fixed-width and fixed-height.
4223
4224 (set (make-local-variable 'window-size-fixed) t)
4225
4226A call to enlarge-window on a window gives an error if that window is
4227fixed-width and it is tried to change the window's width, or if the
4228window is fixed-height, and it is tried to change its height. To
4229change the size of a fixed-size window, bind `window-size-fixed'
4230temporarily to nil, for example
4231
4232 (let ((window-size-fixed nil))
4233 (enlarge-window 10))
4234
79214ddf 4235Likewise, an attempt to split a fixed-height window vertically,
a933dad1 4236or a fixed-width window horizontally results in a error.
e411ce4b
EZ
4237
4238** The cursor-type frame parameter is now supported on MS-DOS
4239terminals. When Emacs starts, it by default changes the cursor shape
4240to a solid box, as it does on Unix. The `cursor-type' frame parameter
4241overrides this as it does on Unix, except that the bar cursor is
4242horizontal rather than vertical (since the MS-DOS display doesn't
4243support a vertical-bar cursor).
76299050 4244
3787e12e 4245
79dfd2cd 4246\f
3787e12e
GM
4247* Emacs 20.7 is a bug-fix release with few user-visible changes
4248
4249** It is now possible to use CCL-based coding systems for keyboard
4250input.
4251
4252** ange-ftp now handles FTP security extensions, like Kerberos.
4253
4254** Rmail has been extended to recognize more forms of digest messages.
4255
4256** Now, most coding systems set in keyboard coding system work not
4257only for character input, but also in incremental search. The
4258exceptions are such coding systems that handle 2-byte character sets
4259(e.g euc-kr, euc-jp) and that use ISO's escape sequence
4260(e.g. iso-2022-jp). They are ignored in incremental search.
4261
4262** Support for Macintosh PowerPC-based machines running GNU/Linux has
4263been added.
4264
79dfd2cd 4265\f
3787e12e
GM
4266* Emacs 20.6 is a bug-fix release with one user-visible change
4267
4268** Support for ARM-based non-RISCiX machines has been added.
4269
79dfd2cd 4270\f
3787e12e
GM
4271* Emacs 20.5 is a bug-fix release with no user-visible changes.
4272
4273** Not new, but not mentioned before:
4274M-w when Transient Mark mode is enabled disables the mark.
4275\f
4276* Changes in Emacs 20.4
4277
4278** Init file may be called .emacs.el.
4279
4280You can now call the Emacs init file `.emacs.el'.
4281Formerly the name had to be `.emacs'. If you use the name
4282`.emacs.el', you can byte-compile the file in the usual way.
4283
4284If both `.emacs' and `.emacs.el' exist, the latter file
4285is the one that is used.
4286
4287** shell-command, and shell-command-on-region, now return
4288the exit code of the command (unless it is asynchronous).
4289Also, you can specify a place to put the error output,
4290separate from the command's regular output.
4291Interactively, the variable shell-command-default-error-buffer
4292says where to put error output; set it to a buffer name.
4293In calls from Lisp, an optional argument ERROR-BUFFER specifies
4294the buffer name.
4295
4296When you specify a non-nil error buffer (or buffer name), any error
4297output is inserted before point in that buffer, with \f\n to separate
4298it from the previous batch of error output. The error buffer is not
4299cleared, so error output from successive commands accumulates there.
4300
4301** Setting the default value of enable-multibyte-characters to nil in
4302the .emacs file, either explicitly using setq-default, or via Custom,
4303is now essentially equivalent to using --unibyte: all buffers
4304created during startup will be made unibyte after loading .emacs.
4305
4306** C-x C-f now handles the wildcards * and ? in file names. For
4307example, typing C-x C-f c*.c RET visits all the files whose names
4308match c*.c. To visit a file whose name contains * or ?, add the
4309quoting sequence /: to the beginning of the file name.
4310
4311** The M-x commands keep-lines, flush-lines and count-matches
4312now have the same feature as occur and query-replace:
4313if the pattern contains any upper case letters, then
4314they never ignore case.
4315
4316** The end-of-line format conversion feature previously mentioned
4317under `* Emacs 20.1 changes for MS-DOS and MS-Windows' actually
4318applies to all operating systems. Emacs recognizes from the contents
4319of a file what convention it uses to separate lines--newline, CRLF, or
4320just CR--and automatically converts the contents to the normal Emacs
4321convention (using newline to separate lines) for editing. This is a
4322part of the general feature of coding system conversion.
4323
4324If you subsequently save the buffer, Emacs converts the text back to
4325the same format that was used in the file before.
4326
4327You can turn off end-of-line conversion by setting the variable
4328`inhibit-eol-conversion' to non-nil, e.g. with Custom in the MULE group.
4329
4330** The character set property `prefered-coding-system' has been
4331renamed to `preferred-coding-system', for the sake of correct spelling.
4332This is a fairly internal feature, so few programs should be affected.
4333
4334** Mode-line display of end-of-line format is changed.
4335The indication of the end-of-line format of the file visited by a
4336buffer is now more explicit when that format is not the usual one for
4337your operating system. For example, the DOS-style end-of-line format
4338is displayed as "(DOS)" on Unix and GNU/Linux systems. The usual
4339end-of-line format is still displayed as a single character (colon for
4340Unix, backslash for DOS and Windows, and forward slash for the Mac).
4341
4342The values of the variables eol-mnemonic-unix, eol-mnemonic-dos,
4343eol-mnemonic-mac, and eol-mnemonic-undecided, which are strings,
4344control what is displayed in the mode line for each end-of-line
4345format. You can now customize these variables.
4346
4347** In the previous version of Emacs, tar-mode didn't work well if a
4348filename contained non-ASCII characters. Now this is fixed. Such a
4349filename is decoded by file-name-coding-system if the default value of
4350enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil.
4351
4352** The command temp-buffer-resize-mode toggles a minor mode
4353in which temporary buffers (such as help buffers) are given
4354windows just big enough to hold the whole contents.
4355
4356** If you use completion.el, you must now run the function
4357dynamic-completion-mode to enable it. Just loading the file
4358doesn't have any effect.
4359
4360** In Flyspell mode, the default is now to make just one Ispell process,
4361not one per buffer.
4362
4363** If you use iswitchb but do not call (iswitchb-default-keybindings) to
4364use the default keybindings, you will need to add the following line:
4365 (add-hook 'minibuffer-setup-hook 'iswitchb-minibuffer-setup)
4366
4367** Auto-show mode is no longer enabled just by loading auto-show.el.
4368To control it, set `auto-show-mode' via Custom or use the
4369`auto-show-mode' command.
4370
4371** Handling of X fonts' ascent/descent parameters has been changed to
4372avoid redisplay problems. As a consequence, compared with previous
4373versions the line spacing and frame size now differ with some font
4374choices, typically increasing by a pixel per line. This change
4375occurred in version 20.3 but was not documented then.
4376
4377** If you select the bar cursor style, it uses the frame's
4378cursor-color, rather than the cursor foreground pixel.
4379
4380** In multibyte mode, Rmail decodes incoming MIME messages using the
4381character set specified in the message. If you want to disable this
4382feature, set the variable rmail-decode-mime-charset to nil.
4383
4384** Not new, but not mentioned previously in NEWS: when you use #! at
4385the beginning of a file to make it executable and specify an
4386interpreter program, Emacs looks on the second line for the -*- mode
4387and variable specification, as well as on the first line.
4388
4389** Support for IBM codepage encoding of non-ASCII characters.
4390
4391The new command M-x codepage-setup creates a special coding system
4392that can be used to convert text between a specific IBM codepage and
4393one of the character sets built into Emacs which matches that
4394codepage. For example, codepage 850 corresponds to Latin-1 character
4395set, codepage 855 corresponds to Cyrillic-ISO character set, etc.
4396
4397Windows codepages 1250, 1251 and some others, where Windows deviates
4398from the corresponding ISO character set, are also supported.
4399
4400IBM box-drawing characters and other glyphs which don't have
4401equivalents in the corresponding ISO character set, are converted to
4402a character defined by dos-unsupported-char-glyph on MS-DOS, and to
4403`?' on other systems.
4404
4405IBM codepages are widely used on MS-DOS and MS-Windows, so this
4406feature is most useful on those platforms, but it can also be used on
4407Unix.
4408
4409Emacs compiled for MS-DOS automatically loads the support for the
4410current codepage when it starts.
4411
4412** Mail changes
4413
4414*** When mail is sent using compose-mail (C-x m), and if
4415`mail-send-nonascii' is set to the new default value `mime',
4416appropriate MIME headers are added. The headers are added only if
4417non-ASCII characters are present in the body of the mail, and no other
4418MIME headers are already present. For example, the following three
4419headers are added if the coding system used in the *mail* buffer is
4420latin-1:
4421
4422 MIME-version: 1.0
4423 Content-type: text/plain; charset=iso-8859-1
4424 Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit
4425
4426*** The new variable default-sendmail-coding-system specifies the
4427default way to encode outgoing mail. This has higher priority than
4428default-buffer-file-coding-system but has lower priority than
4429sendmail-coding-system and the local value of
4430buffer-file-coding-system.
4431
4432You should not set this variable manually. Instead, set
4433sendmail-coding-system to specify a fixed encoding for all outgoing
4434mail.
4435
4436*** When you try to send a message that contains non-ASCII characters,
4437if the coding system specified by those variables doesn't handle them,
4438Emacs will ask you to select a suitable coding system while showing a
4439list of possible coding systems.
4440
4441** CC Mode changes
4442
4443*** c-default-style can now take an association list that maps major
4444modes to style names. When this variable is an alist, Java mode no
4445longer hardcodes a setting to "java" style. See the variable's
4446docstring for details.
4447
4448*** It's now possible to put a list as the offset on a syntactic
4449symbol. The list is evaluated recursively until a non-nil offset is
4450found. This is useful to combine several lineup functions to act in a
4451prioritized order on a single line. However, none of the supplied
4452lineup functions use this feature currently.
4453
4454*** New syntactic symbol catch-clause, which is used on the "catch" and
4455"finally" lines in try-catch constructs in C++ and Java.
4456
4457*** New cleanup brace-catch-brace on c-cleanup-list, which does for
4458"catch" lines what brace-elseif-brace does for "else if" lines.
4459
4460*** The braces of Java anonymous inner classes are treated separately
4461from the braces of other classes in auto-newline mode. Two new
4462symbols inexpr-class-open and inexpr-class-close may be used on
4463c-hanging-braces-alist to control the automatic newlines used for
4464anonymous classes.
4465
4466*** Support for the Pike language added, along with new Pike specific
4467syntactic symbols: inlambda, lambda-intro-cont
4468
4469*** Support for Java anonymous classes via new syntactic symbol
4470inexpr-class. New syntactic symbol inexpr-statement for Pike
4471support and gcc-style statements inside expressions. New lineup
4472function c-lineup-inexpr-block.
4473
4474*** New syntactic symbol brace-entry-open which is used in brace lists
4475(i.e. static initializers) when a list entry starts with an open
4476brace. These used to be recognized as brace-list-entry's.
4477c-electric-brace also recognizes brace-entry-open braces
4478(brace-list-entry's can no longer be electrified).
4479
4480*** New command c-indent-line-or-region, not bound by default.
4481
4482*** `#' is only electric when typed in the indentation of a line.
4483
4484*** Parentheses are now electric (via the new command c-electric-paren)
4485for auto-reindenting lines when parens are typed.
4486
4487*** In "gnu" style, inline-open offset is now set to zero.
4488
4489*** Uniform handling of the inclass syntactic symbol. The indentation
4490associated with it is now always relative to the class opening brace.
4491This means that the indentation behavior has changed in some
4492circumstances, but only if you've put anything besides 0 on the
4493class-open syntactic symbol (none of the default styles do that).
4494
4495** Gnus changes.
4496
4497*** New functionality for using Gnus as an offline newsreader has been
4498added. A plethora of new commands and modes have been added. See the
4499Gnus manual for the full story.
4500
4501*** The nndraft backend has returned, but works differently than
4502before. All Message buffers are now also articles in the nndraft
4503group, which is created automatically.
4504
4505*** `gnus-alter-header-function' can now be used to alter header
4506values.
4507
4508*** `gnus-summary-goto-article' now accept Message-ID's.
4509
4510*** A new Message command for deleting text in the body of a message
4511outside the region: `C-c C-v'.
4512
4513*** You can now post to component group in nnvirtual groups with
4514`C-u C-c C-c'.
4515
4516*** `nntp-rlogin-program' -- new variable to ease customization.
4517
4518*** `C-u C-c C-c' in `gnus-article-edit-mode' will now inhibit
4519re-highlighting of the article buffer.
4520
4521*** New element in `gnus-boring-article-headers' -- `long-to'.
4522
4523*** `M-i' symbolic prefix command. See the section "Symbolic
4524Prefixes" in the Gnus manual for details.
4525
4526*** `L' and `I' in the summary buffer now take the symbolic prefix
4527`a' to add the score rule to the "all.SCORE" file.
4528
4529*** `gnus-simplify-subject-functions' variable to allow greater
4530control over simplification.
4531
4532*** `A T' -- new command for fetching the current thread.
4533
4534*** `/ T' -- new command for including the current thread in the
4535limit.
4536
4537*** `M-RET' is a new Message command for breaking cited text.
4538
4539*** \\1-expressions are now valid in `nnmail-split-methods'.
4540
4541*** The `custom-face-lookup' function has been removed.
4542If you used this function in your initialization files, you must
4543rewrite them to use `face-spec-set' instead.
4544
4545*** Cancelling now uses the current select method. Symbolic prefix
4546`a' forces normal posting method.
4547
4548*** New command to translate M******** sm*rtq**t*s into proper text
4549-- `W d'.
4550
4551*** For easier debugging of nntp, you can set `nntp-record-commands'
4552to a non-nil value.
4553
4554*** nntp now uses ~/.authinfo, a .netrc-like file, for controlling
4555where and how to send AUTHINFO to NNTP servers.
4556
4557*** A command for editing group parameters from the summary buffer
4558has been added.
4559
4560*** A history of where mails have been split is available.
4561
4562*** A new article date command has been added -- `article-date-iso8601'.
4563
4564*** Subjects can be simplified when threading by setting
4565`gnus-score-thread-simplify'.
4566
4567*** A new function for citing in Message has been added --
4568`message-cite-original-without-signature'.
4569
4570*** `article-strip-all-blank-lines' -- new article command.
4571
4572*** A new Message command to kill to the end of the article has
4573been added.
4574
4575*** A minimum adaptive score can be specified by using the
4576`gnus-adaptive-word-minimum' variable.
4577
4578*** The "lapsed date" article header can be kept continually
4579updated by the `gnus-start-date-timer' command.
4580
4581*** Web listserv archives can be read with the nnlistserv backend.
4582
4583*** Old dejanews archives can now be read by nnweb.
4584
4585*** `gnus-posting-styles' has been re-activated.
4586
4587** Changes to TeX and LaTeX mode
4588
4589*** The new variable `tex-start-options-string' can be used to give
4590options for the TeX run. The default value causes TeX to run in
4591nonstopmode. For an interactive TeX run set it to nil or "".
4592
4593*** The command `tex-feed-input' sends input to the Tex Shell. In a
4594TeX buffer it is bound to the keys C-RET, C-c RET, and C-c C-m (some
4595of these keys may not work on all systems). For instance, if you run
4596TeX interactively and if the TeX run stops because of an error, you
4597can continue it without leaving the TeX buffer by typing C-RET.
4598
4599*** The Tex Shell Buffer is now in `compilation-shell-minor-mode'.
4600All error-parsing commands of the Compilation major mode are available
4601but bound to keys that don't collide with the shell. Thus you can use
4602the Tex Shell for command line executions like a usual shell.
4603
4604*** The commands `tex-validate-region' and `tex-validate-buffer' check
4605the matching of braces and $'s. The errors are listed in a *Occur*
4606buffer and you can use C-c C-c or mouse-2 to go to a particular
4607mismatch.
4608
4609** Changes to RefTeX mode
4610
4611*** The table of contents buffer can now also display labels and
4612file boundaries in addition to sections. Use `l', `i', and `c' keys.
4613
4614*** Labels derived from context (the section heading) are now
4615lowercase by default. To make the label legal in LaTeX, latin-1
4616characters will lose their accent. All Mule characters will be
4617removed from the label.
4618
4619*** The automatic display of cross reference information can also use
4620a window instead of the echo area. See variable `reftex-auto-view-crossref'.
4621
4622*** kpsewhich can be used by RefTeX to find TeX and BibTeX files. See the
4623customization group `reftex-finding-files'.
4624
4625*** The option `reftex-bibfile-ignore-list' has been renamed to
4626`reftex-bibfile-ignore-regexps' and indeed can be fed with regular
4627expressions.
4628
4629*** Multiple Selection buffers are now hidden buffers.
4630
4631** New/deleted modes and packages
4632
4633*** The package snmp-mode.el provides major modes for editing SNMP and
4634SNMPv2 MIBs. It has entries on `auto-mode-alist'.
4635
4636*** The package sql.el provides a major mode, M-x sql-mode, for
4637editing SQL files, and M-x sql-interactive-mode for interacting with
4638SQL interpreters. It has an entry on `auto-mode-alist'.
4639
4640*** M-x highlight-changes-mode provides a minor mode displaying buffer
4641changes with a special face.
4642
4643*** ispell4.el has been deleted. It got in the way of ispell.el and
4644this was hard to fix reliably. It has long been obsolete -- use
4645Ispell 3.1 and ispell.el.
4646\f
4647* MS-DOS changes in Emacs 20.4
4648
4649** Emacs compiled for MS-DOS now supports MULE features better.
4650This includes support for display of all ISO 8859-N character sets,
4651conversion to and from IBM codepage encoding of non-ASCII characters,
4652and automatic setup of the MULE environment at startup. For details,
4653check out the section `MS-DOS and MULE' in the manual.
4654
4655The MS-DOS installation procedure automatically configures and builds
4656Emacs with input method support if it finds an unpacked Leim
4657distribution when the config.bat script is run.
4658
4659** Formerly, the value of lpr-command did not affect printing on
4660MS-DOS unless print-region-function was set to nil, but now it
4661controls whether an external program is invoked or output is written
4662directly to a printer port. Similarly, in the previous version of
4663Emacs, the value of ps-lpr-command did not affect PostScript printing
4664on MS-DOS unless ps-printer-name was set to something other than a
4665string (eg. t or `pipe'), but now it controls whether an external
4666program is used. (These changes were made so that configuration of
4667printing variables would be almost identical across all platforms.)
4668
4669** In the previous version of Emacs, PostScript and non-PostScript
4670output was piped to external programs, but because most print programs
4671available for MS-DOS and MS-Windows cannot read data from their standard
4672input, on those systems the data to be output is now written to a
4673temporary file whose name is passed as the last argument to the external
4674program.
4675
4676An exception is made for `print', a standard program on Windows NT,
4677and `nprint', a standard program on Novell Netware. For both of these
4678programs, the command line is constructed in the appropriate syntax
4679automatically, using only the value of printer-name or ps-printer-name
4680as appropriate--the value of the relevant `-switches' variable is
4681ignored, as both programs have no useful switches.
4682
4683** The value of the variable dos-printer (cf. dos-ps-printer), if it has
4684a value, overrides the value of printer-name (cf. ps-printer-name), on
4685MS-DOS and MS-Windows only. This has been true since version 20.3, but
4686was not documented clearly before.
4687
4688** All the Emacs games now work on MS-DOS terminals.
4689This includes Tetris and Snake.
4690\f
4691* Lisp changes in Emacs 20.4
4692
4693** New functions line-beginning-position and line-end-position
4694return the position of the beginning or end of the current line.
4695They both accept an optional argument, which has the same
4696meaning as the argument to beginning-of-line or end-of-line.
4697
4698** find-file and allied functions now have an optional argument
4699WILDCARD. If this is non-nil, they do wildcard processing,
4700and visit all files that match the wildcard pattern.
4701
4702** Changes in the file-attributes function.
4703
4704*** The file size returned by file-attributes may be an integer or a float.
4705It is an integer if the size fits in a Lisp integer, float otherwise.
4706
4707*** The inode number returned by file-attributes may be an integer (if
4708the number fits in a Lisp integer) or a cons cell containing two
4709integers.
4710
4711** The new function directory-files-and-attributes returns a list of
4712files in a directory and their attributes. It accepts the same
4713arguments as directory-files and has similar semantics, except that
4714file names and attributes are returned.
4715
4716** The new function file-attributes-lessp is a helper function for
4717sorting the list generated by directory-files-and-attributes. It
4718accepts two arguments, each a list of a file name and its atttributes.
4719It compares the file names of each according to string-lessp and
4720returns the result.
4721
4722** The new function file-expand-wildcards expands a wildcard-pattern
4723to produce a list of existing files that match the pattern.
4724
4725** New functions for base64 conversion:
4726
4727The function base64-encode-region converts a part of the buffer
4728into the base64 code used in MIME. base64-decode-region
4729performs the opposite conversion. Line-breaking is supported
4730optionally.
4731
4732Functions base64-encode-string and base64-decode-string do a similar
4733job on the text in a string. They return the value as a new string.
4734
4735**
4736The new function process-running-child-p
4737will tell you if a subprocess has given control of its
4738terminal to its own child process.
4739
4740** interrupt-process and such functions have a new feature:
4741when the second argument is `lambda', they send a signal
4742to the running child of the subshell, if any, but if the shell
4743itself owns its terminal, no signal is sent.
4744
4745** There are new widget types `plist' and `alist' which can
4746be used for customizing variables whose values are plists or alists.
4747
4748** easymenu.el Now understands `:key-sequence' and `:style button'.
4749:included is an alias for :visible.
4750
4751easy-menu-add-item now understands the values returned by
4752easy-menu-remove-item and easy-menu-item-present-p. This can be used
4753to move or copy menu entries.
4754
4755** Multibyte editing changes
4756
4757*** The definitions of sref and char-bytes are changed. Now, sref is
4758an alias of aref and char-bytes always returns 1. This change is to
4759make some Emacs Lisp code which works on 20.2 and earlier also
4760work on the latest Emacs. Such code uses a combination of sref and
4761char-bytes in a loop typically as below:
4762 (setq char (sref str idx)
4763 idx (+ idx (char-bytes idx)))
4764The byte-compiler now warns that this is obsolete.
4765
4766If you want to know how many bytes a specific multibyte character
4767(say, CH) occupies in a multibyte buffer, use this code:
4768 (charset-bytes (char-charset ch))
4769
4770*** In multibyte mode, when you narrow a buffer to some region, and the
4771region is preceded or followed by non-ASCII codes, inserting or
4772deleting at the head or the end of the region may signal this error:
4773
4774 Byte combining across boundary of accessible buffer text inhibitted
4775
4776This is to avoid some bytes being combined together into a character
4777across the boundary.
4778
4779*** The functions find-charset-region and find-charset-string include
4780`unknown' in the returned list in the following cases:
4781 o The current buffer or the target string is unibyte and
4782 contains 8-bit characters.
4783 o The current buffer or the target string is multibyte and
4784 contains invalid characters.
4785
4786*** The functions decode-coding-region and encode-coding-region remove
4787text properties of the target region. Ideally, they should correctly
4788preserve text properties, but for the moment, it's hard. Removing
4789text properties is better than preserving them in a less-than-correct
4790way.
4791
4792*** prefer-coding-system sets EOL conversion of default coding systems.
4793If the argument to prefer-coding-system specifies a certain type of
4794end of line conversion, the default coding systems set by
4795prefer-coding-system will specify that conversion type for end of line.
4796
4797*** The new function thai-compose-string can be used to properly
4798compose Thai characters in a string.
4799
4800** The primitive `define-prefix-command' now takes an optional third
4801argument NAME, which should be a string. It supplies the menu name
4802for the created keymap. Keymaps created in order to be displayed as
4803menus should always use the third argument.
4804
4805** The meanings of optional second arguments for read-char,
4806read-event, and read-char-exclusive are flipped. Now the second
4807arguments are INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD. These functions use the current
4808input method (if any) if and only if INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD is non-nil.
4809
4810** The new function clear-this-command-keys empties out the contents
4811of the vector that (this-command-keys) returns. This is useful in
4812programs that read passwords, to prevent the passwords from echoing
4813inadvertently as part of the next command in certain cases.
4814
4815** The new macro `with-temp-message' displays a temporary message in
4816the echo area, while executing some Lisp code. Like `progn', it
4817returns the value of the last form, but it also restores the previous
4818echo area contents.
4819
4820 (with-temp-message MESSAGE &rest BODY)
4821
4822** The function `require' now takes an optional third argument
4823NOERROR. If it is non-nil, then there is no error if the
4824requested feature cannot be loaded.
4825
4826** In the function modify-face, an argument of (nil) for the
4827foreground color, background color or stipple pattern
4828means to clear out that attribute.
4829
4830** The `outer-window-id' frame property of an X frame
4831gives the window number of the outermost X window for the frame.
4832
4833** Temporary buffers made with with-output-to-temp-buffer are now
4834read-only by default, and normally use the major mode Help mode
4835unless you put them in some other non-Fundamental mode before the
4836end of with-output-to-temp-buffer.
4837
4838** The new functions gap-position and gap-size return information on
4839the gap of the current buffer.
4840
4841** The new functions position-bytes and byte-to-position provide a way
4842to convert between character positions and byte positions in the
4843current buffer.
4844
4845** vc.el defines two new macros, `edit-vc-file' and `with-vc-file', to
4846facilitate working with version-controlled files from Lisp programs.
4847These macros check out a given file automatically if needed, and check
4848it back in after any modifications have been made.
4849\f
4850* Installation Changes in Emacs 20.3
4851
4852** The default value of load-path now includes most subdirectories of
4853the site-specific directories /usr/local/share/emacs/site-lisp and
4854/usr/local/share/emacs/VERSION/site-lisp, in addition to those
4855directories themselves. Both immediate subdirectories and
4856subdirectories multiple levels down are added to load-path.
4857
4858Not all subdirectories are included, though. Subdirectories whose
4859names do not start with a letter or digit are excluded.
4860Subdirectories named RCS or CVS are excluded. Also, a subdirectory
4861which contains a file named `.nosearch' is excluded. You can use
4862these methods to prevent certain subdirectories from being searched.
4863
4864Emacs finds these subdirectories and adds them to load-path when it
4865starts up. While it would be cleaner to find the subdirectories each
4866time Emacs loads a file, that would be much slower.
4867
4868This feature is an incompatible change. If you have stored some Emacs
4869Lisp files in a subdirectory of the site-lisp directory specifically
4870to prevent them from being used, you will need to rename the
4871subdirectory to start with a non-alphanumeric character, or create a
4872`.nosearch' file in it, in order to continue to achieve the desired
4873results.
4874
4875** Emacs no longer includes an old version of the C preprocessor from
4876GCC. This was formerly used to help compile Emacs with C compilers
4877that had limits on the significant length of an identifier, but in
4878fact we stopped supporting such compilers some time ago.
4879\f
4880* Changes in Emacs 20.3
4881
4882** The new command C-x z (repeat) repeats the previous command
4883including its argument. If you repeat the z afterward,
4884it repeats the command additional times; thus, you can
4885perform many repetitions with one keystroke per repetition.
4886
4887** Emacs now supports "selective undo" which undoes only within a
4888specified region. To do this, set point and mark around the desired
4889region and type C-u C-x u (or C-u C-_). You can then continue undoing
4890further, within the same region, by repeating the ordinary undo
4891command C-x u or C-_. This will keep undoing changes that were made
4892within the region you originally specified, until either all of them
4893are undone, or it encounters a change which crosses the edge of that
4894region.
4895
4896In Transient Mark mode, undoing when a region is active requests
4897selective undo.
4898
4899** If you specify --unibyte when starting Emacs, then all buffers are
4900unibyte, except when a Lisp program specifically creates a multibyte
4901buffer. Setting the environment variable EMACS_UNIBYTE has the same
4902effect. The --no-unibyte option overrides EMACS_UNIBYTE and directs
4903Emacs to run normally in multibyte mode.
4904
4905The option --unibyte does not affect the reading of Emacs Lisp files,
4906though. If you want a Lisp file to be read in unibyte mode, use
4907-*-unibyte: t;-*- on its first line. That will force Emacs to
4908load that file in unibyte mode, regardless of how Emacs was started.
4909
4910** toggle-enable-multibyte-characters no longer has a key binding and
4911no longer appears in the menu bar. We've realized that changing the
4912enable-multibyte-characters variable in an existing buffer is
4913something that most users not do.
4914
4915** You can specify a coding system to use for the next cut or paste
4916operations through the window system with the command C-x RET X.
4917The coding system can make a difference for communication with other
4918applications.
4919
4920C-x RET x specifies a coding system for all subsequent cutting and
4921pasting operations.
4922
4923** You can specify the printer to use for commands that do printing by
4924setting the variable `printer-name'. Just what a printer name looks
4925like depends on your operating system. You can specify a different
4926printer for the Postscript printing commands by setting
4927`ps-printer-name'.
4928
4929** Emacs now supports on-the-fly spell checking by the means of a
4930minor mode. It is called M-x flyspell-mode. You don't have to remember
4931any other special commands to use it, and you will hardly notice it
4932except when you make a spelling error. Flyspell works by highlighting
4933incorrect words as soon as they are completed or as soon as the cursor
4934hits a new word.
4935
4936Flyspell mode works with whichever dictionary you have selected for
4937Ispell in Emacs. In TeX mode, it understands TeX syntax so as not
4938to be confused by TeX commands.
4939
4940You can correct a misspelled word by editing it into something
4941correct. You can also correct it, or accept it as correct, by
4942clicking on the word with Mouse-2; that gives you a pop-up menu
4943of various alternative replacements and actions.
4944
4945Flyspell mode also proposes "automatic" corrections. M-TAB replaces
4946the current misspelled word with a possible correction. If several
4947corrections are made possible, M-TAB cycles through them in
4948alphabetical order, or in order of decreasing likelihood if
4949flyspell-sort-corrections is nil.
4950
4951Flyspell mode also flags an error when a word is repeated, if
4952flyspell-mark-duplications-flag is non-nil.
4953
4954** Changes in input method usage.
4955
4956Now you can use arrow keys (right, left, down, up) for selecting among
4957the alternatives just the same way as you do by C-f, C-b, C-n, and C-p
4958respectively.
4959
4960You can use the ENTER key to accept the current conversion.
4961
4962If you type TAB to display a list of alternatives, you can select one
4963of the alternatives with Mouse-2.
4964
4965The meaning of the variable `input-method-verbose-flag' is changed so
4966that you can set it to t, nil, `default', or `complex-only'.
4967
4968 If the value is nil, extra guidance is never given.
4969
4970 If the value is t, extra guidance is always given.
4971
4972 If the value is `complex-only', extra guidance is always given only
4973 when you are using complex input methods such as chinese-py.
4974
4975 If the value is `default' (this is the default), extra guidance is
4976 given in the following case:
4977 o When you are using a complex input method.
4978 o When you are using a simple input method but not in the minibuffer.
4979
4980If you are using Emacs through a very slow line, setting
4981input-method-verbose-flag to nil or to complex-only is a good choice,
4982and if you are using an input method you are not familiar with,
4983setting it to t is helpful.
4984
4985The old command select-input-method is now called set-input-method.
4986
4987In the language environment "Korean", you can use the following
4988keys:
4989 Shift-SPC toggle-korean-input-method
4990 C-F9 quail-hangul-switch-symbol-ksc
4991 F9 quail-hangul-switch-hanja
4992These key bindings are canceled when you switch to another language
4993environment.
4994
4995** The minibuffer history of file names now records the specified file
4996names, not the entire minibuffer input. For example, if the
4997minibuffer starts out with /usr/foo/, you might type in /etc/passwd to
4998get
4999
5000 /usr/foo//etc/passwd
5001
5002which stands for the file /etc/passwd.
5003
5004Formerly, this used to put /usr/foo//etc/passwd in the history list.
5005Now this puts just /etc/passwd in the history list.
5006
5007** If you are root, Emacs sets backup-by-copying-when-mismatch to t
5008at startup, so that saving a file will be sure to preserve
5009its owner and group.
5010
5011** find-func.el can now also find the place of definition of Emacs
5012Lisp variables in user-loaded libraries.
5013
5014** C-x r t (string-rectangle) now deletes the existing rectangle
5015contents before inserting the specified string on each line.
5016
5017** There is a new command delete-whitespace-rectangle
5018which deletes whitespace starting from a particular column
5019in all the lines on a rectangle. The column is specified
5020by the left edge of the rectangle.
5021
5022** You can now store a number into a register with C-u NUMBER C-x r n REG,
5023increment it by INC with C-u INC C-x r + REG (to increment by one, omit
5024C-u INC), and insert it in the buffer with C-x r g REG. This is useful
5025for writing keyboard macros.
5026
5027** The new command M-x speedbar displays a frame in which directories,
5028files, and tags can be displayed, manipulated, and jumped to. The
5029frame defaults to 20 characters in width, and is the same height as
5030the frame that it was started from. Some major modes define
5031additional commands for the speedbar, including Rmail, GUD/GDB, and
5032info.
5033
5034** query-replace-regexp is now bound to C-M-%.
5035
5036** In Transient Mark mode, when the region is active, M-x
5037query-replace and the other replace commands now operate on the region
5038contents only.
5039
5040** M-x write-region, when used interactively, now asks for
5041confirmation before overwriting an existing file. When you call
5042the function from a Lisp program, a new optional argument CONFIRM
5043says whether to ask for confirmation in this case.
5044
5045** If you use find-file-literally and the file is already visited
5046non-literally, the command asks you whether to revisit the file
5047literally. If you say no, it signals an error.
5048
5049** Major modes defined with the "derived mode" feature
5050now use the proper name for the mode hook: WHATEVER-mode-hook.
5051Formerly they used the name WHATEVER-mode-hooks, but that is
5052inconsistent with Emacs conventions.
5053
5054** shell-command-on-region (and shell-command) reports success or
5055failure if the command produces no output.
5056
5057** Set focus-follows-mouse to nil if your window system or window
5058manager does not transfer focus to another window when you just move
5059the mouse.
5060
5061** mouse-menu-buffer-maxlen has been renamed to
5062mouse-buffer-menu-maxlen to be consistent with the other related
5063function and variable names.
5064
5065** The new variable auto-coding-alist specifies coding systems for
5066reading specific files. This has higher priority than
5067file-coding-system-alist.
5068
5069** If you set the variable unibyte-display-via-language-environment to
5070t, then Emacs displays non-ASCII characters are displayed by
5071converting them to the equivalent multibyte characters according to
5072the current language environment. As a result, they are displayed
5073according to the current fontset.
5074
5075** C-q's handling of codes in the range 0200 through 0377 is changed.
5076
5077The codes in the range 0200 through 0237 are inserted as one byte of
5078that code regardless of the values of nonascii-translation-table and
5079nonascii-insert-offset.
5080
5081For the codes in the range 0240 through 0377, if
5082enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil and nonascii-translation-table
5083nor nonascii-insert-offset can't convert them to valid multibyte
5084characters, they are converted to Latin-1 characters.
5085
5086** If you try to find a file that is not read-accessible, you now get
5087an error, rather than an empty buffer and a warning.
5088
5089** In the minibuffer history commands M-r and M-s, an upper case
5090letter in the regular expression forces case-sensitive search.
5091
5092** In the *Help* buffer, cross-references to commands and variables
5093are inferred and hyperlinked. Use C-h m in Help mode for the relevant
5094command keys.
5095
5096** M-x apropos-command, with a prefix argument, no longer looks for
5097user option variables--instead it looks for noninteractive functions.
5098
5099Meanwhile, the command apropos-variable normally searches for
5100user option variables; with a prefix argument, it looks at
5101all variables that have documentation.
5102
5103** When you type a long line in the minibuffer, and the minibuffer
5104shows just one line, automatically scrolling works in a special way
5105that shows you overlap with the previous line of text. The variable
5106minibuffer-scroll-overlap controls how many characters of overlap
5107it should show; the default is 20.
5108
5109Meanwhile, Resize Minibuffer mode is still available; in that mode,
5110the minibuffer grows taller (up to a point) as needed to show the whole
5111of your input.
5112
5113** The new command M-x customize-changed-options lets you customize
5114all the options whose meanings or default values have changed in
5115recent Emacs versions. You specify a previous Emacs version number as
5116argument, and the command creates a customization buffer showing all
5117the customizable options which were changed since that version.
5118Newly added options are included as well.
5119
5120If you don't specify a particular version number argument,
5121then the customization buffer shows all the customizable options
5122for which Emacs versions of changes are recorded.
5123
5124This function is also bound to the Changed Options entry in the
5125Customize menu.
5126
5127** When you run M-x grep with a prefix argument, it figures out
5128the tag around point and puts that into the default grep command.
5129
5130** The new command M-* (pop-tag-mark) pops back through a history of
5131buffer positions from which M-. or other tag-finding commands were
5132invoked.
5133
5134** The new variable comment-padding specifies the number of spaces
5135that `comment-region' will insert before the actual text of the comment.
5136The default is 1.
5137
5138** In Fortran mode the characters `.', `_' and `$' now have symbol
5139syntax, not word syntax. Fortran mode now supports `imenu' and has
5140new commands fortran-join-line (M-^) and fortran-narrow-to-subprogram
5141(C-x n d). M-q can be used to fill a statement or comment block
5142sensibly.
5143
5144** GUD now supports jdb, the Java debugger, and pdb, the Python debugger.
5145
5146** If you set the variable add-log-keep-changes-together to a non-nil
5147value, the command `C-x 4 a' will automatically notice when you make
5148two entries in one day for one file, and combine them.
5149
5150** You can use the command M-x diary-mail-entries to mail yourself a
5151reminder about upcoming diary entries. See the documentation string
5152for a sample shell script for calling this function automatically
5153every night.
5154
5155** Desktop changes
5156
5157*** All you need to do to enable use of the Desktop package, is to set
5158the variable desktop-enable to t with Custom.
5159
5160*** Minor modes are now restored. Which minor modes are restored
5161and how modes are restored is controlled by `desktop-minor-mode-table'.
5162
5163** There is no need to do anything special, now, to enable Gnus to
5164read and post multi-lingual articles.
5165
5166** Outline mode has now support for showing hidden outlines when
5167doing an isearch. In order for this to happen search-invisible should
5168be set to open (the default). If an isearch match is inside a hidden
5169outline the outline is made visible. If you continue pressing C-s and
5170the match moves outside the formerly invisible outline, the outline is
5171made invisible again.
5172
5173** Mail reading and sending changes
5174
5175*** The Rmail e command now switches to displaying the whole header of
5176the message before it lets you edit the message. This is so that any
5177changes you make in the header will not be lost if you subsequently
5178toggle.
5179
5180*** The w command in Rmail, which writes the message body into a file,
5181now works in the summary buffer as well. (The command to delete the
5182summary buffer is now Q.) The default file name for the w command, if
5183the message has no subject, is stored in the variable
5184rmail-default-body-file.
5185
5186*** Most of the commands and modes that operate on mail and netnews no
5187longer depend on the value of mail-header-separator. Instead, they
5188handle whatever separator the buffer happens to use.
5189
5190*** If you set mail-signature to a value which is not t, nil, or a string,
5191it should be an expression. When you send a message, this expression
5192is evaluated to insert the signature.
5193
5194*** The new Lisp library feedmail.el (version 8) enhances processing of
5195outbound email messages. It works in coordination with other email
5196handling packages (e.g., rmail, VM, gnus) and is responsible for
5197putting final touches on messages and actually submitting them for
5198transmission. Users of the emacs program "fakemail" might be
5199especially interested in trying feedmail.
5200
5201feedmail is not enabled by default. See comments at the top of
5202feedmail.el for set-up instructions. Among the bigger features
5203provided by feedmail are:
5204
5205**** you can park outgoing messages into a disk-based queue and
5206stimulate sending some or all of them later (handy for laptop users);
5207there is also a queue for draft messages
5208
5209**** you can get one last look at the prepped outbound message and
5210be prompted for confirmation
5211
5212**** does smart filling of address headers
5213
5214**** can generate a MESSAGE-ID: line and a DATE: line; the date can be
5215the time the message was written or the time it is being sent; this
5216can make FCC copies more closely resemble copies that recipients get
5217
5218**** you can specify an arbitrary function for actually transmitting
5219the message; included in feedmail are interfaces for /bin/[r]mail,
5220/usr/lib/sendmail, and elisp smtpmail; it's easy to write a new
5221function for something else (10-20 lines of elisp)
5222
5223** Dired changes
5224
5225*** The Dired function dired-do-toggle, which toggles marked and unmarked
5226files, is now bound to "t" instead of "T".
5227
5228*** dired-at-point has been added to ffap.el. It allows one to easily
5229run Dired on the directory name at point.
5230
5231*** Dired has a new command: %g. It searches the contents of
5232files in the directory and marks each file that contains a match
5233for a specified regexp.
5234
5235** VC Changes
5236
5237*** New option vc-ignore-vc-files lets you turn off version control
5238conveniently.
5239
5240*** VC Dired has been completely rewritten. It is now much
5241faster, especially for CVS, and works very similar to ordinary
5242Dired.
5243
5244VC Dired is invoked by typing C-x v d and entering the name of the
5245directory to display. By default, VC Dired gives you a recursive
5246listing of all files at or below the given directory which are
5247currently locked (for CVS, all files not up-to-date are shown).
5248
5249You can change the listing format by setting vc-dired-recurse to nil,
5250then it shows only the given directory, and you may also set
5251vc-dired-terse-display to nil, then it shows all files under version
5252control plus the names of any subdirectories, so that you can type `i'
5253on such lines to insert them manually, as in ordinary Dired.
5254
5255All Dired commands operate normally in VC Dired, except for `v', which
5256is redefined as the version control prefix. That means you may type
5257`v l', `v =' etc. to invoke `vc-print-log', `vc-diff' and the like on
5258the file named in the current Dired buffer line. `v v' invokes
5259`vc-next-action' on this file, or on all files currently marked.
5260
5261The new command `v t' (vc-dired-toggle-terse-mode) allows you to
5262toggle between terse display (only locked files) and full display (all
5263VC files plus subdirectories). There is also a special command,
5264`* l', to mark all files currently locked.
5265
5266Giving a prefix argument to C-x v d now does the same thing as in
5267ordinary Dired: it allows you to supply additional options for the ls
5268command in the minibuffer, to fine-tune VC Dired's output.
5269
5270*** Under CVS, if you merge changes from the repository into a working
5271file, and CVS detects conflicts, VC now offers to start an ediff
5272session to resolve them.
5273
5274Alternatively, you can use the new command `vc-resolve-conflicts' to
5275resolve conflicts in a file at any time. It works in any buffer that
5276contains conflict markers as generated by rcsmerge (which is what CVS
5277uses as well).
5278
5279*** You can now transfer changes between branches, using the new
5280command vc-merge (C-x v m). It is implemented for RCS and CVS. When
5281you invoke it in a buffer under version-control, you can specify
5282either an entire branch or a pair of versions, and the changes on that
5283branch or between the two versions are merged into the working file.
5284If this results in any conflicts, they may be resolved interactively,
5285using ediff.
5286
5287** Changes in Font Lock
5288
5289*** The face and variable previously known as font-lock-reference-face
5290are now called font-lock-constant-face to better reflect their typical
5291use for highlighting constants and labels. (Its face properties are
5292unchanged.) The variable font-lock-reference-face remains for now for
5293compatibility reasons, but its value is font-lock-constant-face.
5294
5295** Frame name display changes
5296
5297*** The command set-frame-name lets you set the name of the current
5298frame. You can use the new command select-frame-by-name to select and
5299raise a frame; this is mostly useful on character-only terminals, or
5300when many frames are invisible or iconified.
5301
5302*** On character-only terminal (not a window system), changing the
5303frame name is now reflected on the mode line and in the Buffers/Frames
5304menu.
5305
5306** Comint (subshell) changes
5307
5308*** In Comint modes, the commands to kill, stop or interrupt a
5309subjob now also kill pending input. This is for compatibility
5310with ordinary shells, where the signal characters do this.
5311
5312*** There are new commands in Comint mode.
5313
5314C-c C-x fetches the "next" line from the input history;
5315that is, the line after the last line you got.
5316You can use this command to fetch successive lines, one by one.
5317
5318C-c SPC accumulates lines of input. More precisely, it arranges to
5319send the current line together with the following line, when you send
5320the following line.
5321
5322C-c C-a if repeated twice consecutively now moves to the process mark,
5323which separates the pending input from the subprocess output and the
5324previously sent input.
5325
5326C-c M-r now runs comint-previous-matching-input-from-input;
5327it searches for a previous command, using the current pending input
5328as the search string.
5329
5330*** New option compilation-scroll-output can be set to scroll
5331automatically in compilation-mode windows.
5332
5333** C mode changes
5334
5335*** Multiline macros are now handled, both as they affect indentation,
5336and as recognized syntax. New syntactic symbol cpp-macro-cont is
5337assigned to second and subsequent lines of a multiline macro
5338definition.
5339
5340*** A new style "user" which captures all non-hook-ified
5341(i.e. top-level) .emacs file variable settings and customizations.
5342Style "cc-mode" is an alias for "user" and is deprecated. "gnu"
5343style is still the default however.
5344
5345*** "java" style now conforms to Sun's JDK coding style.
5346
5347*** There are new commands c-beginning-of-defun, c-end-of-defun which
5348are alternatives which you could bind to C-M-a and C-M-e if you prefer
5349them. They do not have key bindings by default.
5350
5351*** New and improved implementations of M-a (c-beginning-of-statement)
5352and M-e (c-end-of-statement).
5353
5354*** C++ namespace blocks are supported, with new syntactic symbols
5355namespace-open, namespace-close, and innamespace.
5356
5357*** File local variable settings of c-file-style and c-file-offsets
5358makes the style variables local to that buffer only.
5359
5360*** New indentation functions c-lineup-close-paren,
5361c-indent-one-line-block, c-lineup-dont-change.
5362
5363*** Improvements (hopefully!) to the way CC Mode is loaded. You
5364should now be able to do a (require 'cc-mode) to get the entire
5365package loaded properly for customization in your .emacs file. A new
5366variable c-initialize-on-load controls this and is t by default.
5367
5368** Changes to hippie-expand.
5369
5370*** New customization variable `hippie-expand-dabbrev-skip-space'. If
5371non-nil, trailing spaces may be included in the abbreviation to search for,
5372which then gives the same behavior as the original `dabbrev-expand'.
5373
5374*** New customization variable `hippie-expand-dabbrev-as-symbol'. If
5375non-nil, characters of syntax '_' is considered part of the word when
5376expanding dynamically.
5377
5378*** New customization variable `hippie-expand-no-restriction'. If
5379non-nil, narrowed buffers are widened before they are searched.
5380
5381*** New customization variable `hippie-expand-only-buffers'. If
5382non-empty, buffers searched are restricted to the types specified in
5383this list. Useful for example when constructing new special-purpose
5384expansion functions with `make-hippie-expand-function'.
5385
5386*** Text properties of the expansion are no longer copied.
5387
5388** Changes in BibTeX mode.
5389
5390*** Any titleword matching a regexp in the new variable
5391bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore (case sensitive) is ignored during
5392automatic key generation. This replaces variable
5393bibtex-autokey-titleword-first-ignore, which only checked for matches
5394against the first word in the title.
5395
5396*** Autokey generation now uses all words from the title, not just
5397capitalized words. To avoid conflicts with existing customizations,
5398bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore is set up such that words starting with
5399lowerkey characters will still be ignored. Thus, if you want to use
5400lowercase words from the title, you will have to overwrite the
5401bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore standard setting.
5402
5403*** Case conversion of names and title words for automatic key
5404generation is more flexible. Variable bibtex-autokey-preserve-case is
5405replaced by bibtex-autokey-titleword-case-convert and
5406bibtex-autokey-name-case-convert.
5407
5408** Changes in vcursor.el.
5409
5410*** Support for character terminals is available: there is a new keymap
5411and the vcursor will appear as an arrow between buffer text. A
5412variable `vcursor-interpret-input' allows input from the vcursor to be
5413entered exactly as if typed. Numerous functions, including
5414`vcursor-compare-windows', have been rewritten to improve consistency
5415in the selection of windows and corresponding keymaps.
5416
5417*** vcursor options can now be altered with M-x customize under the
5418Editing group once the package is loaded.
5419
5420*** Loading vcursor now does not define keys by default, as this is
5421generally a bad side effect. Use M-x customize to set
5422vcursor-key-bindings to t to restore the old behaviour.
5423
5424*** vcursor-auto-disable can be `copy', which turns off copying from the
5425vcursor, but doesn't disable it, after any non-vcursor command.
5426
5427** Ispell changes.
5428
5429*** You can now spell check comments and strings in the current
5430buffer with M-x ispell-comments-and-strings. Comments and strings
5431are identified by syntax tables in effect.
5432
5433*** Generic region skipping implemented.
5434A single buffer can be broken into a number of regions where text will
5435and will not be checked. The definitions of the regions can be user
5436defined. New applications and improvements made available by this
5437include:
5438
5439 o URLs are automatically skipped
5440 o EMail message checking is vastly improved.
5441
5442*** Ispell can highlight the erroneous word even on non-window terminals.
5443
5444** Changes to RefTeX mode
5445
5446RefTeX has been updated in order to make it more usable with very
5447large projects (like a several volume math book). The parser has been
5448re-written from scratch. To get maximum speed from RefTeX, check the
5449section `Optimizations' in the manual.
5450
5451*** New recursive parser.
5452
5453The old version of RefTeX created a single large buffer containing the
5454entire multifile document in order to parse the document. The new
5455recursive parser scans the individual files.
5456
5457*** Parsing only part of a document.
5458
5459Reparsing of changed document parts can now be made faster by enabling
5460partial scans. To use this feature, read the documentation string of
5461the variable `reftex-enable-partial-scans' and set the variable to t.
5462
5463 (setq reftex-enable-partial-scans t)
5464
5465*** Storing parsing information in a file.
5466
5467This can improve startup times considerably. To turn it on, use
5468
5469 (setq reftex-save-parse-info t)
5470
5471*** Using multiple selection buffers
5472
5473If the creation of label selection buffers is too slow (this happens
5474for large documents), you can reuse these buffers by setting
5475
5476 (setq reftex-use-multiple-selection-buffers t)
5477
5478*** References to external documents.
5479
5480The LaTeX package `xr' allows to cross-reference labels in external
5481documents. RefTeX can provide information about the external
5482documents as well. To use this feature, set up the \externaldocument
5483macros required by the `xr' package and rescan the document with
5484RefTeX. The external labels can then be accessed with the `x' key in
5485the selection buffer provided by `reftex-reference' (bound to `C-c )').
5486The `x' key also works in the table of contents buffer.
5487
5488*** Many more labeled LaTeX environments are recognized by default.
5489
5490The builtin command list now covers all the standard LaTeX commands,
5491and all of the major packages included in the LaTeX distribution.
5492
5493Also, RefTeX now understands the \appendix macro and changes
5494the enumeration of sections in the *toc* buffer accordingly.
5495
5496*** Mouse support for selection and *toc* buffers
5497
5498The mouse can now be used to select items in the selection and *toc*
5499buffers. See also the new option `reftex-highlight-selection'.
5500
5501*** New keymaps for selection and table of contents modes.
5502
5503The selection processes for labels and citation keys, and the table of
5504contents buffer now have their own keymaps: `reftex-select-label-map',
5505`reftex-select-bib-map', `reftex-toc-map'. The selection processes
5506have a number of new keys predefined. In particular, TAB lets you
5507enter a label with completion. Check the on-the-fly help (press `?'
5508at the selection prompt) or read the Info documentation to find out
5509more.
5510
5511*** Support for the varioref package
5512
5513The `v' key in the label selection buffer toggles \ref versus \vref.
5514
5515*** New hooks
5516
5517Three new hooks can be used to redefine the way labels, references,
5518and citations are created. These hooks are
5519`reftex-format-label-function', `reftex-format-ref-function',
5520`reftex-format-cite-function'.
5521
5522*** Citations outside LaTeX
5523
5524The command `reftex-citation' may also be used outside LaTeX (e.g. in
5525a mail buffer). See the Info documentation for details.
5526
5527*** Short context is no longer fontified.
5528
5529The short context in the label menu no longer copies the
5530fontification from the text in the buffer. If you prefer it to be
5531fontified, use
5532
5533 (setq reftex-refontify-context t)
5534
5535** file-cache-minibuffer-complete now accepts a prefix argument.
5536With a prefix argument, it does not try to do completion of
5537the file name within its directory; it only checks for other
5538directories that contain the same file name.
5539
5540Thus, given the file name Makefile, and assuming that a file
5541Makefile.in exists in the same directory, ordinary
5542file-cache-minibuffer-complete will try to complete Makefile to
5543Makefile.in and will therefore never look for other directories that
5544have Makefile. A prefix argument tells it not to look for longer
5545names such as Makefile.in, so that instead it will look for other
5546directories--just as if the name were already complete in its present
5547directory.
5548
5549** New modes and packages
5550
5551*** There is a new alternative major mode for Perl, Cperl mode.
5552It has many more features than Perl mode, and some people prefer
5553it, but some do not.
5554
5555*** There is a new major mode, M-x vhdl-mode, for editing files of VHDL
5556code.
5557
5558*** M-x which-function-mode enables a minor mode that displays the
5559current function name continuously in the mode line, as you move
5560around in a buffer.
5561
5562Which Function mode is effective in major modes which support Imenu.
5563
5564*** Gametree is a major mode for editing game analysis trees. The author
5565uses it for keeping notes about his postal Chess games, but it should
5566be helpful for other two-player games as well, as long as they have an
5567established system of notation similar to Chess.
5568
5569*** The new minor mode checkdoc-minor-mode provides Emacs Lisp
5570documentation string checking for style and spelling. The style
5571guidelines are found in the Emacs Lisp programming manual.
5572
5573*** The net-utils package makes some common networking features
5574available in Emacs. Some of these functions are wrappers around
5575system utilities (ping, nslookup, etc); others are implementations of
5576simple protocols (finger, whois) in Emacs Lisp. There are also
5577functions to make simple connections to TCP/IP ports for debugging and
5578the like.
5579
5580*** highlight-changes-mode is a minor mode that uses colors to
5581identify recently changed parts of the buffer text.
5582
5583*** The new package `midnight' lets you specify things to be done
5584within Emacs at midnight--by default, kill buffers that you have not
5585used in a considerable time. To use this feature, customize
5586the user option `midnight-mode' to t.
5587
5588*** The file generic-x.el defines a number of simple major modes.
5589
5590 apache-generic-mode: For Apache and NCSA httpd configuration files
5591 samba-generic-mode: Samba configuration files
5592 fvwm-generic-mode: For fvwm initialization files
5593 x-resource-generic-mode: For X resource files
5594 hosts-generic-mode: For hosts files (.rhosts, /etc/hosts, etc)
5595 mailagent-rules-generic-mode: For mailagent .rules files
5596 javascript-generic-mode: For JavaScript files
5597 vrml-generic-mode: For VRML files
5598 java-manifest-generic-mode: For Java MANIFEST files
5599 java-properties-generic-mode: For Java property files
5600 mailrc-generic-mode: For .mailrc files
5601
5602 Platform-specific modes:
5603
5604 prototype-generic-mode: For Solaris/Sys V prototype files
5605 pkginfo-generic-mode: For Solaris/Sys V pkginfo files
5606 alias-generic-mode: For C shell alias files
5607 inf-generic-mode: For MS-Windows INF files
5608 ini-generic-mode: For MS-Windows INI files
5609 reg-generic-mode: For MS-Windows Registry files
5610 bat-generic-mode: For MS-Windows BAT scripts
5611 rc-generic-mode: For MS-Windows Resource files
5612 rul-generic-mode: For InstallShield scripts
5613\f
5614* Lisp changes in Emacs 20.3 since the Emacs Lisp Manual was published
5615
5616** If you want a Lisp file to be read in unibyte mode,
5617use -*-unibyte: t;-*- on its first line.
5618That will force Emacs to read that file in unibyte mode.
5619Otherwise, the file will be loaded and byte-compiled in multibyte mode.
5620
5621Thus, each lisp file is read in a consistent way regardless of whether
5622you started Emacs with --unibyte, so that a Lisp program gives
5623consistent results regardless of how Emacs was started.
5624
5625** The new function assoc-default is useful for searching an alist,
5626and using a default value if the key is not found there. You can
5627specify a comparison predicate, so this function is useful for
5628searching comparing a string against an alist of regular expressions.
5629
5630** The functions unibyte-char-to-multibyte and
5631multibyte-char-to-unibyte convert between unibyte and multibyte
5632character codes, in a way that is appropriate for the current language
5633environment.
5634
5635** The functions read-event, read-char and read-char-exclusive now
5636take two optional arguments. PROMPT, if non-nil, specifies a prompt
5637string. SUPPRESS-INPUT-METHOD, if non-nil, says to disable the
5638current input method for reading this one event.
5639
5640** Two new variables print-escape-nonascii and print-escape-multibyte
5641now control whether to output certain characters as
5642backslash-sequences. print-escape-nonascii applies to single-byte
5643non-ASCII characters; print-escape-multibyte applies to multibyte
5644characters. Both of these variables are used only when printing
5645in readable fashion (prin1 uses them, princ does not).
5646\f
5647* Lisp changes in Emacs 20.3 before the Emacs Lisp Manual was published
5648
5649** Compiled Emacs Lisp files made with the modified "MBSK" version
5650of Emacs 20.2 do not work in Emacs 20.3.
5651
5652** Buffer positions are now measured in characters, as they were
5653in Emacs 19 and before. This means that (forward-char 1)
5654always increases point by 1.
5655
5656The function chars-in-region now just subtracts its arguments. It is
5657considered obsolete. The function char-boundary-p has been deleted.
5658
5659See below for additional changes relating to multibyte characters.
5660
5661** defcustom, defface and defgroup now accept the keyword `:version'.
5662Use this to specify in which version of Emacs a certain variable's
5663default value changed. For example,
5664
5665 (defcustom foo-max 34 "*Maximum number of foo's allowed."
5666 :type 'integer
5667 :group 'foo
5668 :version "20.3")
5669
5670 (defgroup foo-group nil "The foo group."
5671 :version "20.3")
5672
5673If an entire new group is added or the variables in it have the
5674default values changed, then just add a `:version' to that group. It
5675is recommended that new packages added to the distribution contain a
5676`:version' in the top level group.
5677
5678This information is used to control the customize-changed-options command.
5679
5680** It is now an error to change the value of a symbol whose name
5681starts with a colon--if it is interned in the standard obarray.
5682
5683However, setting such a symbol to its proper value, which is that
5684symbol itself, is not an error. This is for the sake of programs that
5685support previous Emacs versions by explicitly setting these variables
5686to themselves.
5687
5688If you set the variable keyword-symbols-constant-flag to nil,
5689this error is suppressed, and you can set these symbols to any
5690values whatever.
5691
5692** There is a new debugger command, R.
5693It evaluates an expression like e, but saves the result
5694in the buffer *Debugger-record*.
5695
5696** Frame-local variables.
5697
5698You can now make a variable local to various frames. To do this, call
5699the function make-variable-frame-local; this enables frames to have
5700local bindings for that variable.
5701
5702These frame-local bindings are actually frame parameters: you create a
5703frame-local binding in a specific frame by calling
5704modify-frame-parameters and specifying the variable name as the
5705parameter name.
5706
5707Buffer-local bindings take precedence over frame-local bindings.
5708Thus, if the current buffer has a buffer-local binding, that binding is
5709active; otherwise, if the selected frame has a frame-local binding,
5710that binding is active; otherwise, the default binding is active.
5711
5712It would not be hard to implement window-local bindings, but it is not
5713clear that this would be very useful; windows tend to come and go in a
5714very transitory fashion, so that trying to produce any specific effect
5715through a window-local binding would not be very robust.
5716
5717** `sregexq' and `sregex' are two new functions for constructing
5718"symbolic regular expressions." These are Lisp expressions that, when
5719evaluated, yield conventional string-based regexps. The symbolic form
5720makes it easier to construct, read, and maintain complex patterns.
5721See the documentation in sregex.el.
5722
5723** parse-partial-sexp's return value has an additional element which
5724is used to pass information along if you pass it to another call to
5725parse-partial-sexp, starting its scan where the first call ended.
5726The contents of this field are not yet finalized.
5727
5728** eval-region now accepts a fourth optional argument READ-FUNCTION.
5729If it is non-nil, that function is used instead of `read'.
5730
5731** unload-feature by default removes the feature's functions from
5732known hooks to avoid trouble, but a package providing FEATURE can
5733define a hook FEATURE-unload-hook to be run by unload-feature instead.
5734
5735** read-from-minibuffer no longer returns the argument DEFAULT-VALUE
5736when the user enters empty input. It now returns the null string, as
5737it did in Emacs 19. The default value is made available in the
5738history via M-n, but it is not applied here as a default.
5739
5740The other, more specialized minibuffer-reading functions continue to
5741return the default value (not the null string) when the user enters
5742empty input.
5743
5744** The new variable read-buffer-function controls which routine to use
5745for selecting buffers. For example, if you set this variable to
5746`iswitchb-read-buffer', iswitchb will be used to read buffer names.
5747Other functions can also be used if they accept the same arguments as
5748`read-buffer' and return the selected buffer name as a string.
5749
5750** The new function read-passwd reads a password from the terminal,
5751echoing a period for each character typed. It takes three arguments:
5752a prompt string, a flag which says "read it twice to make sure", and a
5753default password to use if the user enters nothing.
5754
5755** The variable fill-nobreak-predicate gives major modes a way to
5756specify not to break a line at certain places. Its value is a
5757function which is called with no arguments, with point located at the
5758place where a break is being considered. If the function returns
5759non-nil, then the line won't be broken there.
5760
5761** window-end now takes an optional second argument, UPDATE.
5762If this is non-nil, then the function always returns an accurate
5763up-to-date value for the buffer position corresponding to the
5764end of the window, even if this requires computation.
5765
5766** other-buffer now takes an optional argument FRAME
5767which specifies which frame's buffer list to use.
5768If it is nil, that means use the selected frame's buffer list.
5769
5770** The new variable buffer-display-time, always local in every buffer,
5771holds the value of (current-time) as of the last time that a window
5772was directed to display this buffer.
5773
5774** It is now meaningful to compare two window-configuration objects
5775with `equal'. Two window-configuration objects are equal if they
5776describe equivalent arrangements of windows, in the same frame--in
5777other words, if they would give the same results if passed to
5778set-window-configuration.
5779
5780** compare-window-configurations is a new function that compares two
5781window configurations loosely. It ignores differences in saved buffer
5782positions and scrolling, and considers only the structure and sizes of
5783windows and the choice of buffers to display.
5784
5785** The variable minor-mode-overriding-map-alist allows major modes to
5786override the key bindings of a minor mode. The elements of this alist
5787look like the elements of minor-mode-map-alist: (VARIABLE . KEYMAP).
5788
5789If the VARIABLE in an element of minor-mode-overriding-map-alist has a
5790non-nil value, the paired KEYMAP is active, and totally overrides the
5791map (if any) specified for the same variable in minor-mode-map-alist.
5792
5793minor-mode-overriding-map-alist is automatically local in all buffers,
5794and it is meant to be set by major modes.
5795
5796** The function match-string-no-properties is like match-string
5797except that it discards all text properties from the result.
5798
5799** The function load-average now accepts an optional argument
5800USE-FLOATS. If it is non-nil, the load average values are returned as
5801floating point numbers, rather than as integers to be divided by 100.
5802
5803** The new variable temporary-file-directory specifies the directory
5804to use for creating temporary files. The default value is determined
5805in a reasonable way for your operating system; on GNU and Unix systems
5806it is based on the TMP and TMPDIR environment variables.
5807
5808** Menu changes
5809
5810*** easymenu.el now uses the new menu item format and supports the
5811keywords :visible and :filter. The existing keyword :keys is now
5812better supported.
5813
5814The variable `easy-menu-precalculate-equivalent-keybindings' controls
5815a new feature which calculates keyboard equivalents for the menu when
5816you define the menu. The default is t. If you rarely use menus, you
5817can set the variable to nil to disable this precalculation feature;
5818then the calculation is done only if you use the menu bar.
5819
5820*** A new format for menu items is supported.
5821
5822In a keymap, a key binding that has the format
5823 (STRING . REAL-BINDING) or (STRING HELP-STRING . REAL-BINDING)
5824defines a menu item. Now a menu item definition may also be a list that
5825starts with the symbol `menu-item'.
5826
5827The format is:
5828 (menu-item ITEM-NAME) or
5829 (menu-item ITEM-NAME REAL-BINDING . ITEM-PROPERTY-LIST)
5830where ITEM-NAME is an expression which evaluates to the menu item
5831string, and ITEM-PROPERTY-LIST has the form of a property list.
5832The supported properties include
5833
5834:enable FORM Evaluate FORM to determine whether the
5835 item is enabled.
5836:visible FORM Evaluate FORM to determine whether the
5837 item should appear in the menu.
5838:filter FILTER-FN
5839 FILTER-FN is a function of one argument,
5840 which will be REAL-BINDING.
5841 It should return a binding to use instead.
5842:keys DESCRIPTION
5843 DESCRIPTION is a string that describes an equivalent keyboard
5844 binding for for REAL-BINDING. DESCRIPTION is expanded with
5845 `substitute-command-keys' before it is used.
5846:key-sequence KEY-SEQUENCE
5847 KEY-SEQUENCE is a key-sequence for an equivalent
5848 keyboard binding.
5849:key-sequence nil
5850 This means that the command normally has no
5851 keyboard equivalent.
5852:help HELP HELP is the extra help string (not currently used).
5853:button (TYPE . SELECTED)
5854 TYPE is :toggle or :radio.
5855 SELECTED is a form, to be evaluated, and its
5856 value says whether this button is currently selected.
5857
5858Buttons are at the moment only simulated by prefixes in the menu.
5859Eventually ordinary X-buttons may be supported.
5860
5861(menu-item ITEM-NAME) defines unselectable item.
5862
5863** New event types
5864
5865*** The new event type `mouse-wheel' is generated by a wheel on a
5866mouse (such as the MS Intellimouse). The event contains a delta that
5867corresponds to the amount and direction that the wheel is rotated,
5868which is typically used to implement a scroll or zoom. The format is:
5869
5870 (mouse-wheel POSITION DELTA)
5871
5872where POSITION is a list describing the position of the event in the
5873same format as a mouse-click event, and DELTA is a signed number
5874indicating the number of increments by which the wheel was rotated. A
5875negative DELTA indicates that the wheel was rotated backwards, towards
5876the user, and a positive DELTA indicates that the wheel was rotated
5877forward, away from the user.
5878
5879As of now, this event type is generated only on MS Windows.
5880
5881*** The new event type `drag-n-drop' is generated when a group of
5882files is selected in an application outside of Emacs, and then dragged
5883and dropped onto an Emacs frame. The event contains a list of
5884filenames that were dragged and dropped, which are then typically
5885loaded into Emacs. The format is:
5886
5887 (drag-n-drop POSITION FILES)
5888
5889where POSITION is a list describing the position of the event in the
5890same format as a mouse-click event, and FILES is the list of filenames
5891that were dragged and dropped.
5892
5893As of now, this event type is generated only on MS Windows.
5894
5895** Changes relating to multibyte characters.
5896
5897*** The variable enable-multibyte-characters is now read-only;
5898any attempt to set it directly signals an error. The only way
5899to change this value in an existing buffer is with set-buffer-multibyte.
5900
5901*** In a string constant, `\ ' now stands for "nothing at all". You
5902can use it to terminate a hex escape which is followed by a character
5903that could otherwise be read as part of the hex escape.
5904
5905*** String indices are now measured in characters, as they were
5906in Emacs 19 and before.
5907
5908The function chars-in-string has been deleted.
5909The function concat-chars has been renamed to `string'.
5910
5911*** The function set-buffer-multibyte sets the flag in the current
5912buffer that says whether the buffer uses multibyte representation or
5913unibyte representation. If the argument is nil, it selects unibyte
5914representation. Otherwise it selects multibyte representation.
5915
5916This function does not change the contents of the buffer, viewed
5917as a sequence of bytes. However, it does change the contents
5918viewed as characters; a sequence of two bytes which is treated as
5919one character when the buffer uses multibyte representation
5920will count as two characters using unibyte representation.
5921
5922This function sets enable-multibyte-characters to record which
5923representation is in use. It also adjusts various data in the buffer
5924(including its markers, overlays and text properties) so that they are
5925consistent with the new representation.
5926
5927*** string-make-multibyte takes a string and converts it to multibyte
5928representation. Most of the time, you don't need to care
5929about the representation, because Emacs converts when necessary;
5930however, it makes a difference when you compare strings.
5931
5932The conversion of non-ASCII characters works by adding the value of
5933nonascii-insert-offset to each character, or by translating them
5934using the table nonascii-translation-table.
5935
5936*** string-make-unibyte takes a string and converts it to unibyte
5937representation. Most of the time, you don't need to care about the
5938representation, but it makes a difference when you compare strings.
5939
5940The conversion from multibyte to unibyte representation
5941loses information; the only time Emacs performs it automatically
5942is when inserting a multibyte string into a unibyte buffer.
5943
5944*** string-as-multibyte takes a string, and returns another string
5945which contains the same bytes, but treats them as multibyte.
5946
5947*** string-as-unibyte takes a string, and returns another string
5948which contains the same bytes, but treats them as unibyte.
5949
5950*** The new function compare-strings lets you compare
5951portions of two strings. Unibyte strings are converted to multibyte,
5952so that a unibyte string can match a multibyte string.
5953You can specify whether to ignore case or not.
5954
5955*** assoc-ignore-case now uses compare-strings so that
5956it can treat unibyte and multibyte strings as equal.
5957
5958*** Regular expression operations and buffer string searches now
5959convert the search pattern to multibyte or unibyte to accord with the
5960buffer or string being searched.
5961
5962One consequence is that you cannot always use \200-\377 inside of
5963[...] to match all non-ASCII characters. This does still work when
5964searching or matching a unibyte buffer or string, but not when
5965searching or matching a multibyte string. Unfortunately, there is no
5966obvious choice of syntax to use within [...] for that job. But, what
5967you want is just to match all non-ASCII characters, the regular
5968expression [^\0-\177] works for it.
5969
5970*** Structure of coding system changed.
5971
5972All coding systems (including aliases and subsidiaries) are named
5973by symbols; the symbol's `coding-system' property is a vector
5974which defines the coding system. Aliases share the same vector
5975as the principal name, so that altering the contents of this
5976vector affects the principal name and its aliases. You can define
5977your own alias name of a coding system by the function
5978define-coding-system-alias.
5979
5980The coding system definition includes a property list of its own. Use
5981the new functions `coding-system-get' and `coding-system-put' to
5982access such coding system properties as post-read-conversion,
5983pre-write-conversion, character-translation-table-for-decode,
5984character-translation-table-for-encode, mime-charset, and
5985safe-charsets. For instance, (coding-system-get 'iso-latin-1
5986'mime-charset) gives the corresponding MIME-charset parameter
5987`iso-8859-1'.
5988
5989Among the coding system properties listed above, safe-charsets is new.
5990The value of this property is a list of character sets which this
5991coding system can correctly encode and decode. For instance:
5992(coding-system-get 'iso-latin-1 'safe-charsets) => (ascii latin-iso8859-1)
5993
5994Here, "correctly encode" means that the encoded character sets can
5995also be handled safely by systems other than Emacs as far as they
5996are capable of that coding system. Though, Emacs itself can encode
5997the other character sets and read it back correctly.
5998
5999*** The new function select-safe-coding-system can be used to find a
6000proper coding system for encoding the specified region or string.
6001This function requires a user interaction.
6002
6003*** The new functions find-coding-systems-region and
6004find-coding-systems-string are helper functions used by
6005select-safe-coding-system. They return a list of all proper coding
6006systems to encode a text in some region or string. If you don't want
6007a user interaction, use one of these functions instead of
6008select-safe-coding-system.
6009
6010*** The explicit encoding and decoding functions, such as
6011decode-coding-region and encode-coding-string, now set
6012last-coding-system-used to reflect the actual way encoding or decoding
6013was done.
6014
6015*** The new function detect-coding-with-language-environment can be
6016used to detect a coding system of text according to priorities of
6017coding systems used by some specific language environment.
6018
6019*** The functions detect-coding-region and detect-coding-string always
6020return a list if the arg HIGHEST is nil. Thus, if only ASCII
6021characters are found, they now return a list of single element
6022`undecided' or its subsidiaries.
6023
6024*** The new functions coding-system-change-eol-conversion and
6025coding-system-change-text-conversion can be used to get a different
6026coding system than what specified only in how end-of-line or text is
6027converted.
6028
6029*** The new function set-selection-coding-system can be used to set a
6030coding system for communicating with other X clients.
6031
6032*** The function `map-char-table' now passes as argument only valid
6033character codes, plus generic characters that stand for entire
6034character sets or entire subrows of a character set. In other words,
6035each time `map-char-table' calls its FUNCTION argument, the key value
6036either will be a valid individual character code, or will stand for a
6037range of characters.
6038
6039*** The new function `char-valid-p' can be used for checking whether a
6040Lisp object is a valid character code or not.
6041
6042*** The new function `charset-after' returns a charset of a character
6043in the current buffer at position POS.
6044
6045*** Input methods are now implemented using the variable
6046input-method-function. If this is non-nil, its value should be a
6047function; then, whenever Emacs reads an input event that is a printing
6048character with no modifier bits, it calls that function, passing the
6049event as an argument. Often this function will read more input, first
6050binding input-method-function to nil.
6051
6052The return value should be a list of the events resulting from input
6053method processing. These events will be processed sequentially as
6054input, before resorting to unread-command-events. Events returned by
6055the input method function are not passed to the input method function,
6056not even if they are printing characters with no modifier bits.
6057
6058The input method function is not called when reading the second and
6059subsequent events of a key sequence.
6060
6061*** You can customize any language environment by using
6062set-language-environment-hook and exit-language-environment-hook.
6063
6064The hook `exit-language-environment-hook' should be used to undo
6065customizations that you made with set-language-environment-hook. For
6066instance, if you set up a special key binding for a specific language
6067environment by set-language-environment-hook, you should set up
6068exit-language-environment-hook to restore the normal key binding.
6069\f
6070* Changes in Emacs 20.1
6071
6072** Emacs has a new facility for customization of its many user
6073options. It is called M-x customize. With this facility you can look
6074at the many user options in an organized way; they are grouped into a
6075tree structure.
6076
6077M-x customize also knows what sorts of values are legitimate for each
6078user option and ensures that you don't use invalid values.
6079
6080With M-x customize, you can set options either for the present Emacs
6081session or permanently. (Permanent settings are stored automatically
6082in your .emacs file.)
6083
6084** Scroll bars are now on the left side of the window.
6085You can change this with M-x customize-option scroll-bar-mode.
6086
6087** The mode line no longer includes the string `Emacs'.
6088This makes more space in the mode line for other information.
6089
6090** When you select a region with the mouse, it is highlighted
6091immediately afterward. At that time, if you type the DELETE key, it
6092kills the region.
6093
6094The BACKSPACE key, and the ASCII character DEL, do not do this; they
6095delete the character before point, as usual.
6096
6097** In an incremental search the whole current match is highlighted
6098on terminals which support this. (You can disable this feature
6099by setting search-highlight to nil.)
6100
6101** In the minibuffer, in some cases, you can now use M-n to
6102insert the default value into the minibuffer as text. In effect,
6103the default value (if the minibuffer routines know it) is tacked
6104onto the history "in the future". (The more normal use of the
6105history list is to use M-p to insert minibuffer input used in the
6106past.)
6107
6108** In Text mode, now only blank lines separate paragraphs.
6109This makes it possible to get the full benefit of Adaptive Fill mode
6110in Text mode, and other modes derived from it (such as Mail mode).
6111TAB in Text mode now runs the command indent-relative; this
6112makes a practical difference only when you use indented paragraphs.
6113
6114As a result, the old Indented Text mode is now identical to Text mode,
6115and is an alias for it.
6116
6117If you want spaces at the beginning of a line to start a paragraph,
6118use the new mode, Paragraph Indent Text mode.
6119
6120** Scrolling changes
6121
6122*** Scroll commands to scroll a whole screen now preserve the screen
6123position of the cursor, if scroll-preserve-screen-position is non-nil.
6124
6125In this mode, if you scroll several screens back and forth, finishing
6126on the same screen where you started, the cursor goes back to the line
6127where it started.
6128
6129*** If you set scroll-conservatively to a small number, then when you
6130move point a short distance off the screen, Emacs will scroll the
6131screen just far enough to bring point back on screen, provided that
6132does not exceed `scroll-conservatively' lines.
6133
6134*** The new variable scroll-margin says how close point can come to the
6135top or bottom of a window. It is a number of screen lines; if point
6136comes within that many lines of the top or bottom of the window, Emacs
6137recenters the window.
6138
6139** International character set support (MULE)
6140
6141Emacs now supports a wide variety of international character sets,
6142including European variants of the Latin alphabet, as well as Chinese,
6143Devanagari (Hindi and Marathi), Ethiopian, Greek, IPA, Japanese,
6144Korean, Lao, Russian, Thai, Tibetan, and Vietnamese scripts. These
6145features have been merged from the modified version of Emacs known as
6146MULE (for "MULti-lingual Enhancement to GNU Emacs")
6147
6148Users of these scripts have established many more-or-less standard
6149coding systems for storing files. Emacs uses a single multibyte
6150character encoding within Emacs buffers; it can translate from a wide
6151variety of coding systems when reading a file and can translate back
6152into any of these coding systems when saving a file.
6153
6154Keyboards, even in the countries where these character sets are used,
6155generally don't have keys for all the characters in them. So Emacs
6156supports various "input methods", typically one for each script or
6157language, to make it possible to type them.
6158
6159The Emacs internal multibyte encoding represents a non-ASCII
6160character as a sequence of bytes in the range 0200 through 0377.
6161
6162The new prefix key C-x RET is used for commands that pertain
6163to multibyte characters, coding systems, and input methods.
6164
6165You can disable multibyte character support as follows:
6166
6167 (setq-default enable-multibyte-characters nil)
6168
6169Calling the function standard-display-european turns off multibyte
6170characters, unless you specify a non-nil value for the second
6171argument, AUTO. This provides compatibility for people who are
6172already using standard-display-european to continue using unibyte
6173characters for their work until they want to change.
6174
6175*** Input methods
6176
6177An input method is a kind of character conversion which is designed
6178specifically for interactive input. In Emacs, typically each language
6179has its own input method (though sometimes several languages which use
6180the same characters can share one input method). Some languages
6181support several input methods.
6182
6183The simplest kind of input method works by mapping ASCII letters into
6184another alphabet. This is how the Greek and Russian input methods
6185work.
6186
6187A more powerful technique is composition: converting sequences of
6188characters into one letter. Many European input methods use
6189composition to produce a single non-ASCII letter from a sequence which
6190consists of a letter followed by diacritics. For example, a' is one
6191sequence of two characters that might be converted into a single
6192letter.
6193
6194The input methods for syllabic scripts typically use mapping followed
6195by conversion. The input methods for Thai and Korean work this way.
6196First, letters are mapped into symbols for particular sounds or tone
6197marks; then, sequences of these which make up a whole syllable are
6198mapped into one syllable sign--most often a "composite character".
6199
6200None of these methods works very well for Chinese and Japanese, so
6201they are handled specially. First you input a whole word using
6202phonetic spelling; then, after the word is in the buffer, Emacs
6203converts it into one or more characters using a large dictionary.
6204
6205Since there is more than one way to represent a phonetically spelled
6206word using Chinese characters, Emacs can only guess which one to use;
6207typically these input methods give you a way to say "guess again" if
6208the first guess is wrong.
6209
6210*** The command C-x RET m (toggle-enable-multibyte-characters)
6211turns multibyte character support on or off for the current buffer.
6212
6213If multibyte character support is turned off in a buffer, then each
6214byte is a single character, even codes 0200 through 0377--exactly as
6215they did in Emacs 19.34. This includes the features for support for
6216the European characters, ISO Latin-1 and ISO Latin-2.
6217
6218However, there is no need to turn off multibyte character support to
6219use ISO Latin-1 or ISO Latin-2; the Emacs multibyte character set
6220includes all the characters in these character sets, and Emacs can
6221translate automatically to and from either one.
6222
6223*** Visiting a file in unibyte mode.
6224
6225Turning off multibyte character support in the buffer after visiting a
6226file with multibyte code conversion will display the multibyte
6227sequences already in the buffer, byte by byte. This is probably not
6228what you want.
6229
6230If you want to edit a file of unibyte characters (Latin-1, for
6231example), you can do it by specifying `no-conversion' as the coding
6232system when reading the file. This coding system also turns off
6233multibyte characters in that buffer.
6234
6235If you turn off multibyte character support entirely, this turns off
6236character conversion as well.
6237
6238*** Displaying international characters on X Windows.
6239
6240A font for X typically displays just one alphabet or script.
6241Therefore, displaying the entire range of characters Emacs supports
6242requires using many fonts.
6243
6244Therefore, Emacs now supports "fontsets". Each fontset is a
6245collection of fonts, each assigned to a range of character codes.
6246
6247A fontset has a name, like a font. Individual fonts are defined by
6248the X server; fontsets are defined within Emacs itself. But once you
6249have defined a fontset, you can use it in a face or a frame just as
6250you would use a font.
6251
6252If a fontset specifies no font for a certain character, or if it
6253specifies a font that does not exist on your system, then it cannot
6254display that character. It will display an empty box instead.
6255
6256The fontset height and width are determined by the ASCII characters
6257(that is, by the font in the fontset which is used for ASCII
6258characters). If another font in the fontset has a different height,
6259or the wrong width, then characters assigned to that font are clipped,
6260and displayed within a box if highlight-wrong-size-font is non-nil.
6261
6262*** Defining fontsets.
6263
6264Emacs does not use any fontset by default. Its default font is still
6265chosen as in previous versions. You can tell Emacs to use a fontset
6266with the `-fn' option or the `Font' X resource.
6267
6268Emacs creates a standard fontset automatically according to the value
6269of standard-fontset-spec. This fontset's short name is
6270`fontset-standard'. Bold, italic, and bold-italic variants of the
6271standard fontset are created automatically.
6272
6273If you specify a default ASCII font with the `Font' resource or `-fn'
6274argument, a fontset is generated from it. This works by replacing the
6275FOUNDARY, FAMILY, ADD_STYLE, and AVERAGE_WIDTH fields of the font name
6276with `*' then using this to specify a fontset. This fontset's short
6277name is `fontset-startup'.
6278
6279Emacs checks resources of the form Fontset-N where N is 0, 1, 2...
6280The resource value should have this form:
6281 FONTSET-NAME, [CHARSET-NAME:FONT-NAME]...
6282FONTSET-NAME should have the form of a standard X font name, except:
6283 * most fields should be just the wild card "*".
6284 * the CHARSET_REGISTRY field should be "fontset"
6285 * the CHARSET_ENCODING field can be any nickname of the fontset.
6286The construct CHARSET-NAME:FONT-NAME can be repeated any number
6287of times; each time specifies the font for one character set.
6288CHARSET-NAME should be the name name of a character set, and
6289FONT-NAME should specify an actual font to use for that character set.
6290
6291Each of these fontsets has an alias which is made from the
6292last two font name fields, CHARSET_REGISTRY and CHARSET_ENCODING.
6293You can refer to the fontset by that alias or by its full name.
6294
6295For any character sets that you don't mention, Emacs tries to choose a
6296font by substituting into FONTSET-NAME. For instance, with the
6297following resource,
6298 Emacs*Fontset-0: -*-fixed-medium-r-normal-*-24-*-*-*-*-*-fontset-24
6299the font for ASCII is generated as below:
6300 -*-fixed-medium-r-normal-*-24-*-ISO8859-1
6301Here is the substitution rule:
6302 Change CHARSET_REGISTRY and CHARSET_ENCODING to that of the charset
6303 defined in the variable x-charset-registries. For instance, ASCII has
6304 the entry (ascii . "ISO8859-1") in this variable. Then, reduce
6305 sequences of wild cards -*-...-*- with a single wildcard -*-.
6306 (This is to prevent use of auto-scaled fonts.)
6307
6308The function which processes the fontset resource value to create the
6309fontset is called create-fontset-from-fontset-spec. You can also call
6310that function explicitly to create a fontset.
6311
6312With the X resource Emacs.Font, you can specify a fontset name just
6313like an actual font name. But be careful not to specify a fontset
6314name in a wildcard resource like Emacs*Font--that tries to specify the
6315fontset for other purposes including menus, and they cannot handle
6316fontsets.
6317
6318*** The command M-x set-language-environment sets certain global Emacs
6319defaults for a particular choice of language.
6320
6321Selecting a language environment typically specifies a default input
6322method and which coding systems to recognize automatically when
6323visiting files. However, it does not try to reread files you have
6324already visited; the text in those buffers is not affected. The
6325language environment may also specify a default choice of coding
6326system for new files that you create.
6327
6328It makes no difference which buffer is current when you use
6329set-language-environment, because these defaults apply globally to the
6330whole Emacs session.
6331
6332For example, M-x set-language-environment RET Latin-1 RET
6333chooses the Latin-1 character set. In the .emacs file, you can do this
6334with (set-language-environment "Latin-1").
6335
6336*** The command C-x RET f (set-buffer-file-coding-system)
6337specifies the file coding system for the current buffer. This
6338specifies what sort of character code translation to do when saving
6339the file. As an argument, you must specify the name of one of the
6340coding systems that Emacs supports.
6341
6342*** The command C-x RET c (universal-coding-system-argument)
6343lets you specify a coding system when you read or write a file.
6344This command uses the minibuffer to read a coding system name.
6345After you exit the minibuffer, the specified coding system
6346is used for *the immediately following command*.
6347
6348So if the immediately following command is a command to read or
6349write a file, it uses the specified coding system for that file.
6350
6351If the immediately following command does not use the coding system,
6352then C-x RET c ultimately has no effect.
6353
6354For example, C-x RET c iso-8859-1 RET C-x C-f temp RET
6355visits the file `temp' treating it as ISO Latin-1.
6356
6357*** You can specify the coding system for a file using the -*-
6358construct. Include `coding: CODINGSYSTEM;' inside the -*-...-*-
6359to specify use of coding system CODINGSYSTEM. You can also
6360specify the coding system in a local variable list at the end
6361of the file.
6362
6363*** The command C-x RET t (set-terminal-coding-system) specifies
6364the coding system for terminal output. If you specify a character
6365code for terminal output, all characters output to the terminal are
6366translated into that character code.
6367
6368This feature is useful for certain character-only terminals built in
6369various countries to support the languages of those countries.
6370
6371By default, output to the terminal is not translated at all.
6372
6373*** The command C-x RET k (set-keyboard-coding-system) specifies
6374the coding system for keyboard input.
6375
6376Character code translation of keyboard input is useful for terminals
6377with keys that send non-ASCII graphic characters--for example,
6378some terminals designed for ISO Latin-1 or subsets of it.
6379
6380By default, keyboard input is not translated at all.
6381
6382Character code translation of keyboard input is similar to using an
6383input method, in that both define sequences of keyboard input that
6384translate into single characters. However, input methods are designed
6385to be convenient for interactive use, while the code translations are
6386designed to work with terminals.
6387
6388*** The command C-x RET p (set-buffer-process-coding-system)
6389specifies the coding system for input and output to a subprocess.
6390This command applies to the current buffer; normally, each subprocess
6391has its own buffer, and thus you can use this command to specify
6392translation to and from a particular subprocess by giving the command
6393in the corresponding buffer.
6394
6395By default, process input and output are not translated at all.
6396
6397*** The variable file-name-coding-system specifies the coding system
6398to use for encoding file names before operating on them.
6399It is also used for decoding file names obtained from the system.
6400
6401*** The command C-\ (toggle-input-method) activates or deactivates
6402an input method. If no input method has been selected before, the
6403command prompts for you to specify the language and input method you
6404want to use.
6405
6406C-u C-\ (select-input-method) lets you switch to a different input
6407method. C-h C-\ (or C-h I) describes the current input method.
6408
6409*** Some input methods remap the keyboard to emulate various keyboard
6410layouts commonly used for particular scripts. How to do this
6411remapping properly depends on your actual keyboard layout. To specify
6412which layout your keyboard has, use M-x quail-set-keyboard-layout.
6413
6414*** The command C-h C (describe-coding-system) displays
6415the coding systems currently selected for various purposes, plus
6416related information.
6417
6418*** The command C-h h (view-hello-file) displays a file called
6419HELLO, which has examples of text in many languages, using various
6420scripts.
6421
6422*** The command C-h L (describe-language-support) displays
6423information about the support for a particular language.
6424You specify the language as an argument.
6425
6426*** The mode line now contains a letter or character that identifies
6427the coding system used in the visited file. It normally follows the
6428first dash.
6429
6430A dash indicates the default state of affairs: no code conversion
6431(except CRLF => newline if appropriate). `=' means no conversion
6432whatsoever. The ISO 8859 coding systems are represented by digits
64331 through 9. Other coding systems are represented by letters:
6434
6435 A alternativnyj (Russian)
6436 B big5 (Chinese)
6437 C cn-gb-2312 (Chinese)
6438 C iso-2022-cn (Chinese)
6439 D in-is13194-devanagari (Indian languages)
6440 E euc-japan (Japanese)
6441 I iso-2022-cjk or iso-2022-ss2 (Chinese, Japanese, Korean)
6442 J junet (iso-2022-7) or old-jis (iso-2022-jp-1978-irv) (Japanese)
6443 K euc-korea (Korean)
6444 R koi8 (Russian)
6445 Q tibetan
6446 S shift_jis (Japanese)
6447 T lao
6448 T tis620 (Thai)
6449 V viscii or vscii (Vietnamese)
6450 i iso-2022-lock (Chinese, Japanese, Korean)
6451 k iso-2022-kr (Korean)
6452 v viqr (Vietnamese)
6453 z hz (Chinese)
6454
6455When you are using a character-only terminal (not a window system),
6456two additional characters appear in between the dash and the file
6457coding system. These two characters describe the coding system for
6458keyboard input, and the coding system for terminal output.
6459
6460*** The new variable rmail-file-coding-system specifies the code
6461conversion to use for RMAIL files. The default value is nil.
6462
6463When you read mail with Rmail, each message is decoded automatically
6464into Emacs' internal format. This has nothing to do with
6465rmail-file-coding-system. That variable controls reading and writing
6466Rmail files themselves.
6467
6468*** The new variable sendmail-coding-system specifies the code
6469conversion for outgoing mail. The default value is nil.
6470
6471Actually, there are three different ways of specifying the coding system
6472for sending mail:
6473
6474- If you use C-x RET f in the mail buffer, that takes priority.
6475- Otherwise, if you set sendmail-coding-system non-nil, that specifies it.
6476- Otherwise, the default coding system for new files is used,
6477 if that is non-nil. That comes from your language environment.
6478- Otherwise, Latin-1 is used.
6479
6480*** The command C-h t (help-with-tutorial) accepts a prefix argument
6481to specify the language for the tutorial file. Currently, English,
6482Japanese, Korean and Thai are supported. We welcome additional
6483translations.
6484
6485** An easy new way to visit a file with no code or format conversion
6486of any kind: Use M-x find-file-literally. There is also a command
6487insert-file-literally which inserts a file into the current buffer
6488without any conversion.
6489
6490** C-q's handling of octal character codes is changed.
6491You can now specify any number of octal digits.
6492RET terminates the digits and is discarded;
6493any other non-digit terminates the digits and is then used as input.
6494
6495** There are new commands for looking up Info documentation for
6496functions, variables and file names used in your programs.
6497
6498Type M-x info-lookup-symbol to look up a symbol in the buffer at point.
6499Type M-x info-lookup-file to look up a file in the buffer at point.
6500
6501Precisely which Info files are used to look it up depends on the major
6502mode. For example, in C mode, the GNU libc manual is used.
6503
6504** M-TAB in most programming language modes now runs the command
6505complete-symbol. This command performs completion on the symbol name
6506in the buffer before point.
6507
6508With a numeric argument, it performs completion based on the set of
6509symbols documented in the Info files for the programming language that
6510you are using.
6511
6512With no argument, it does completion based on the current tags tables,
6513just like the old binding of M-TAB (complete-tag).
6514
6515** File locking works with NFS now.
6516
6517The lock file for FILENAME is now a symbolic link named .#FILENAME,
6518in the same directory as FILENAME.
6519
6520This means that collision detection between two different machines now
6521works reasonably well; it also means that no file server or directory
6522can become a bottleneck.
6523
6524The new method does have drawbacks. It means that collision detection
6525does not operate when you edit a file in a directory where you cannot
6526create new files. Collision detection also doesn't operate when the
6527file server does not support symbolic links. But these conditions are
6528rare, and the ability to have collision detection while using NFS is
6529so useful that the change is worth while.
6530
6531When Emacs or a system crashes, this may leave behind lock files which
6532are stale. So you may occasionally get warnings about spurious
6533collisions. When you determine that the collision is spurious, just
6534tell Emacs to go ahead anyway.
6535
6536** If you wish to use Show Paren mode to display matching parentheses,
6537it is no longer sufficient to load paren.el. Instead you must call
6538show-paren-mode.
6539
6540** If you wish to use Delete Selection mode to replace a highlighted
6541selection when you insert new text, it is no longer sufficient to load
6542delsel.el. Instead you must call the function delete-selection-mode.
6543
6544** If you wish to use Partial Completion mode to complete partial words
6545within symbols or filenames, it is no longer sufficient to load
6546complete.el. Instead you must call the function partial-completion-mode.
6547
6548** If you wish to use uniquify to rename buffers for you,
6549it is no longer sufficient to load uniquify.el. You must also
6550set uniquify-buffer-name-style to one of the non-nil legitimate values.
6551
6552** Changes in View mode.
6553
6554*** Several new commands are available in View mode.
6555Do H in view mode for a list of commands.
6556
6557*** There are two new commands for entering View mode:
6558view-file-other-frame and view-buffer-other-frame.
6559
6560*** Exiting View mode does a better job of restoring windows to their
6561previous state.
6562
6563*** New customization variable view-scroll-auto-exit. If non-nil,
6564scrolling past end of buffer makes view mode exit.
6565
6566*** New customization variable view-exits-all-viewing-windows. If
6567non-nil, view-mode will at exit restore all windows viewing buffer,
6568not just the selected window.
6569
6570*** New customization variable view-read-only. If non-nil, visiting a
6571read-only file automatically enters View mode, and toggle-read-only
6572turns View mode on or off.
6573
6574*** New customization variable view-remove-frame-by-deleting controls
6575how to remove a not needed frame at view mode exit. If non-nil,
6576delete the frame, if nil make an icon of it.
6577
6578** C-x v l, the command to print a file's version control log,
6579now positions point at the entry for the file's current branch version.
6580
6581** C-x v =, the command to compare a file with the last checked-in version,
6582has a new feature. If the file is currently not locked, so that it is
6583presumably identical to the last checked-in version, the command now asks
6584which version to compare with.
6585
6586** When using hideshow.el, incremental search can temporarily show hidden
6587blocks if a match is inside the block.
6588
6589The block is hidden again if the search is continued and the next match
6590is outside the block. By customizing the variable
6591isearch-hide-immediately you can choose to hide all the temporarily
6592shown blocks only when exiting from incremental search.
6593
6594By customizing the variable hs-isearch-open you can choose what kind
6595of blocks to temporarily show during isearch: comment blocks, code
6596blocks, all of them or none.
6597
6598** The new command C-x 4 0 (kill-buffer-and-window) kills the
6599current buffer and deletes the selected window. It asks for
6600confirmation first.
6601
6602** C-x C-w, which saves the buffer into a specified file name,
6603now changes the major mode according to that file name.
6604However, the mode will not be changed if
6605(1) a local variables list or the `-*-' line specifies a major mode, or
6606(2) the current major mode is a "special" mode,
6607 not suitable for ordinary files, or
6608(3) the new file name does not particularly specify any mode.
6609
6610This applies to M-x set-visited-file-name as well.
6611
6612However, if you set change-major-mode-with-file-name to nil, then
6613these commands do not change the major mode.
6614
6615** M-x occur changes.
6616
6617*** If the argument to M-x occur contains upper case letters,
6618it performs a case-sensitive search.
6619
6620*** In the *Occur* buffer made by M-x occur,
6621if you type g or M-x revert-buffer, this repeats the search
6622using the same regular expression and the same buffer as before.
6623
6624** In Transient Mark mode, the region in any one buffer is highlighted
6625in just one window at a time. At first, it is highlighted in the
6626window where you set the mark. The buffer's highlighting remains in
6627that window unless you select to another window which shows the same
6628buffer--then the highlighting moves to that window.
6629
6630** The feature to suggest key bindings when you use M-x now operates
6631after the command finishes. The message suggesting key bindings
6632appears temporarily in the echo area. The previous echo area contents
6633come back after a few seconds, in case they contain useful information.
6634
6635** Each frame now independently records the order for recently
6636selected buffers, so that the default for C-x b is now based on the
6637buffers recently selected in the selected frame.
6638
6639** Outline mode changes.
6640
6641*** Outline mode now uses overlays (this is the former noutline.el).
6642
6643*** Incremental searches skip over invisible text in Outline mode.
6644
6645** When a minibuffer window is active but not the selected window, if
6646you try to use the minibuffer, you used to get a nested minibuffer.
6647Now, this not only gives an error, it also cancels the minibuffer that
6648was already active.
6649
6650The motive for this change is so that beginning users do not
6651unknowingly move away from minibuffers, leaving them active, and then
6652get confused by it.
6653
6654If you want to be able to have recursive minibuffers, you must
6655set enable-recursive-minibuffers to non-nil.
6656
6657** Changes in dynamic abbrevs.
6658
6659*** Expanding dynamic abbrevs with M-/ is now smarter about case
6660conversion. If the expansion has mixed case not counting the first
6661character, and the abbreviation matches the beginning of the expansion
6662including case, then the expansion is copied verbatim.
6663
6664The expansion is also copied verbatim if the abbreviation itself has
6665mixed case. And using SPC M-/ to copy an additional word always
6666copies it verbatim except when the previous copied word is all caps.
6667
6668*** The values of `dabbrev-case-replace' and `dabbrev-case-fold-search'
6669are no longer Lisp expressions. They have simply three possible
6670values.
6671
6672`dabbrev-case-replace' has these three values: nil (don't preserve
6673case), t (do), or `case-replace' (do like M-x query-replace).
6674`dabbrev-case-fold-search' has these three values: nil (don't ignore
6675case), t (do), or `case-fold-search' (do like search).
6676
6677** Minibuffer history lists are truncated automatically now to a
6678certain length. The variable history-length specifies how long they
6679can be. The default value is 30.
6680
6681** Changes in Mail mode.
6682
6683*** The key C-x m no longer runs the `mail' command directly.
6684Instead, it runs the command `compose-mail', which invokes the mail
6685composition mechanism you have selected with the variable
6686`mail-user-agent'. The default choice of user agent is
6687`sendmail-user-agent', which gives behavior compatible with the old
6688behavior.
6689
6690C-x 4 m now runs compose-mail-other-window, and C-x 5 m runs
6691compose-mail-other-frame.
6692
6693*** While composing a reply to a mail message, from Rmail, you can use
6694the command C-c C-r to cite just the region from the message you are
6695replying to. This copies the text which is the selected region in the
6696buffer that shows the original message.
6697
6698*** The command C-c C-i inserts a file at the end of the message,
6699with separator lines around the contents.
6700
6701*** The command M-x expand-mail-aliases expands all mail aliases
6702in suitable mail headers. Emacs automatically extracts mail alias
6703definitions from your mail alias file (e.g., ~/.mailrc). You do not
6704need to expand mail aliases yourself before sending mail.
6705
6706*** New features in the mail-complete command.
6707
6708**** The mail-complete command now inserts the user's full name,
6709for local users or if that is known. The variable mail-complete-style
6710controls the style to use, and whether to do this at all.
6711Its values are like those of mail-from-style.
6712
6713**** The variable mail-passwd-command lets you specify a shell command
6714to run to fetch a set of password-entries that add to the ones in
6715/etc/passwd.
6716
6717**** The variable mail-passwd-file now specifies a list of files to read
6718to get the list of user ids. By default, one file is used:
6719/etc/passwd.
6720
6721** You can "quote" a file name to inhibit special significance of
6722special syntax, by adding `/:' to the beginning. Thus, if you have a
6723directory named `/foo:', you can prevent it from being treated as a
6724reference to a remote host named `foo' by writing it as `/:/foo:'.
6725
6726Emacs uses this new construct automatically when necessary, such as
6727when you start it with a working directory whose name might otherwise
6728be taken to be magic.
6729
6730** There is a new command M-x grep-find which uses find to select
6731files to search through, and grep to scan them. The output is
6732available in a Compile mode buffer, as with M-x grep.
6733
6734M-x grep now uses the -e option if the grep program supports that.
6735(-e prevents problems if the search pattern starts with a dash.)
6736
6737** In Dired, the & command now flags for deletion the files whose names
6738suggest they are probably not needed in the long run.
6739
6740In Dired, * is now a prefix key for mark-related commands.
6741
6742new key dired.el binding old key
6743------- ---------------- -------
6744 * c dired-change-marks c
6745 * m dired-mark m
6746 * * dired-mark-executables * (binding deleted)
6747 * / dired-mark-directories / (binding deleted)
6748 * @ dired-mark-symlinks @ (binding deleted)
6749 * u dired-unmark u
6750 * DEL dired-unmark-backward DEL
6751 * ? dired-unmark-all-files M-C-?
6752 * ! dired-unmark-all-marks
6753 * % dired-mark-files-regexp % m
6754 * C-n dired-next-marked-file M-}
6755 * C-p dired-prev-marked-file M-{
6756
6757** Rmail changes.
6758
6759*** When Rmail cannot convert your incoming mail into Babyl format, it
6760saves the new mail in the file RMAILOSE.n, where n is an integer
6761chosen to make a unique name. This way, Rmail will not keep crashing
6762each time you run it.
6763
6764*** In Rmail, the variable rmail-summary-line-count-flag now controls
6765whether to include the line count in the summary. Non-nil means yes.
6766
6767*** In Rmail summary buffers, d and C-d (the commands to delete
6768messages) now take repeat counts as arguments. A negative argument
6769means to move in the opposite direction.
6770
6771*** In Rmail, the t command now takes an optional argument which lets
6772you specify whether to show the message headers in full or pruned.
6773
6774*** In Rmail, the new command w (rmail-output-body-to-file) writes
6775just the body of the current message into a file, without the headers.
6776It takes the file name from the message subject, by default, but you
6777can edit that file name in the minibuffer before it is actually used
6778for output.
6779
6780** Gnus changes.
6781
6782*** nntp.el has been totally rewritten in an asynchronous fashion.
6783
6784*** Article prefetching functionality has been moved up into
6785Gnus.
6786
6787*** Scoring can now be performed with logical operators like
6788`and', `or', `not', and parent redirection.
6789
6790*** Article washing status can be displayed in the
6791article mode line.
6792
6793*** gnus.el has been split into many smaller files.
6794
6795*** Suppression of duplicate articles based on Message-ID.
6796
6797(setq gnus-suppress-duplicates t)
6798
6799*** New variables for specifying what score and adapt files
6800are to be considered home score and adapt files. See
6801`gnus-home-score-file' and `gnus-home-adapt-files'.
6802
6803*** Groups can inherit group parameters from parent topics.
6804
6805*** Article editing has been revamped and is now usable.
6806
6807*** Signatures can be recognized in more intelligent fashions.
6808See `gnus-signature-separator' and `gnus-signature-limit'.
6809
6810*** Summary pick mode has been made to look more nn-like.
6811Line numbers are displayed and the `.' command can be
6812used to pick articles.
6813
6814*** Commands for moving the .newsrc.eld from one server to
6815another have been added.
6816
6817 `M-x gnus-change-server'
6818
6819*** A way to specify that "uninteresting" fields be suppressed when
6820generating lines in buffers.
6821
6822*** Several commands in the group buffer can be undone with
6823`M-C-_'.
6824
6825*** Scoring can be done on words using the new score type `w'.
6826
6827*** Adaptive scoring can be done on a Subject word-by-word basis:
6828
6829 (setq gnus-use-adaptive-scoring '(word))
6830
6831*** Scores can be decayed.
6832
6833 (setq gnus-decay-scores t)
6834
6835*** Scoring can be performed using a regexp on the Date header. The
6836Date is normalized to compact ISO 8601 format first.
6837
6838*** A new command has been added to remove all data on articles from
6839the native server.
6840
6841 `M-x gnus-group-clear-data-on-native-groups'
6842
6843*** A new command for reading collections of documents
6844(nndoc with nnvirtual on top) has been added -- `M-C-d'.
6845
6846*** Process mark sets can be pushed and popped.
6847
6848*** A new mail-to-news backend makes it possible to post
6849even when the NNTP server doesn't allow posting.
6850
6851*** A new backend for reading searches from Web search engines
6852(DejaNews, Alta Vista, InReference) has been added.
6853
6854 Use the `G w' command in the group buffer to create such
6855 a group.
6856
6857*** Groups inside topics can now be sorted using the standard
6858sorting functions, and each topic can be sorted independently.
6859
6860 See the commands under the `T S' submap.
6861
6862*** Subsets of the groups can be sorted independently.
6863
6864 See the commands under the `G P' submap.
6865
6866*** Cached articles can be pulled into the groups.
6867
6868 Use the `Y c' command.
6869
6870*** Score files are now applied in a more reliable order.
6871
6872*** Reports on where mail messages end up can be generated.
6873
6874 `M-x nnmail-split-history'
6875
6876*** More hooks and functions have been added to remove junk
6877from incoming mail before saving the mail.
6878
6879 See `nnmail-prepare-incoming-header-hook'.
6880
6881*** The nnml mail backend now understands compressed article files.
6882
6883*** To enable Gnus to read/post multi-lingual articles, you must execute
6884the following code, for instance, in your .emacs.
6885
6886 (add-hook 'gnus-startup-hook 'gnus-mule-initialize)
6887
6888Then, when you start Gnus, it will decode non-ASCII text automatically
6889and show appropriate characters. (Note: if you are using gnus-mime
6890from the SEMI package, formerly known as TM, you should NOT add this
6891hook to gnus-startup-hook; gnus-mime has its own method of handling
6892this issue.)
6893
6894Since it is impossible to distinguish all coding systems
6895automatically, you may need to specify a choice of coding system for a
6896particular news group. This can be done by:
6897
6898 (gnus-mule-add-group NEWSGROUP 'CODING-SYSTEM)
6899
6900Here NEWSGROUP should be a string which names a newsgroup or a tree
6901of newsgroups. If NEWSGROUP is "XXX.YYY", all news groups under
6902"XXX.YYY" (including "XXX.YYY.ZZZ") will use the specified coding
6903system. CODING-SYSTEM specifies which coding system to use (for both
6904for reading and posting).
6905
6906CODING-SYSTEM can also be a cons cell of the form
6907 (READ-CODING-SYSTEM . POST-CODING-SYSTEM)
6908Then READ-CODING-SYSTEM is used when you read messages from the
6909newsgroups, while POST-CODING-SYSTEM is used when you post messages
6910there.
6911
6912Emacs knows the right coding systems for certain newsgroups by
6913default. Here are some of these default settings:
6914
6915 (gnus-mule-add-group "fj" 'iso-2022-7)
6916 (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.chinese.text" 'hz-gb-2312)
6917 (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.hk" 'hz-gb-2312)
6918 (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.chinese.text.big5" 'cn-big5)
6919 (gnus-mule-add-group "soc.culture.vietnamese" '(nil . viqr))
6920
6921When you reply by mail to an article, these settings are ignored;
6922the mail is encoded according to sendmail-coding-system, as usual.
6923
6924** CC mode changes.
6925
6926*** If you edit primarily one style of C (or C++, Objective-C, Java)
6927code, you may want to make the CC Mode style variables have global
6928values so that you can set them directly in your .emacs file. To do
6929this, set c-style-variables-are-local-p to nil in your .emacs file.
6930Note that this only takes effect if you do it *before* cc-mode.el is
6931loaded.
6932
6933If you typically edit more than one style of C (or C++, Objective-C,
6934Java) code in a single Emacs session, you may want to make the CC Mode
6935style variables have buffer local values. By default, all buffers
6936share the same style variable settings; to make them buffer local, set
6937c-style-variables-are-local-p to t in your .emacs file. Note that you
6938must do this *before* CC Mode is loaded.
6939
6940*** The new variable c-indentation-style holds the C style name
6941of the current buffer.
6942
6943*** The variable c-block-comments-indent-p has been deleted, because
6944it is no longer necessary. C mode now handles all the supported styles
6945of block comments, with no need to say which one you will use.
6946
6947*** There is a new indentation style "python", which specifies the C
6948style that the Python developers like.
6949
6950*** There is a new c-cleanup-list option: brace-elseif-brace.
6951This says to put ...} else if (...) {... on one line,
6952just as brace-else-brace says to put ...} else {... on one line.
6953
6954** VC Changes [new]
6955
6956** In vc-retrieve-snapshot (C-x v r), if you don't specify a snapshot
6957name, it retrieves the *latest* versions of all files in the current
6958directory and its subdirectories (aside from files already locked).
6959
6960This feature is useful if your RCS directory is a link to a common
6961master directory, and you want to pick up changes made by other
6962developers.
6963
6964You can do the same thing for an individual file by typing C-u C-x C-q
6965RET in a buffer visiting that file.
6966
6967*** VC can now handle files under CVS that are being "watched" by
6968other developers. Such files are made read-only by CVS. To get a
6969writable copy, type C-x C-q in a buffer visiting such a file. VC then
6970calls "cvs edit", which notifies the other developers of it.
6971
6972*** vc-version-diff (C-u C-x v =) now suggests reasonable defaults for
6973version numbers, based on the current state of the file.
6974
6975** Calendar changes.
6976
6977A new function, list-holidays, allows you list holidays or subclasses
6978of holidays for ranges of years. Related menu items allow you do this
6979for the year of the selected date, or the following/previous years.
6980
6981** ps-print changes
6982
6983There are some new user variables for customizing the page layout.
6984
6985*** Paper size, paper orientation, columns
6986
6987The variable `ps-paper-type' determines the size of paper ps-print
6988formats for; it should contain one of the symbols:
6989`a4' `a3' `letter' `legal' `letter-small' `tabloid'
6990`ledger' `statement' `executive' `a4small' `b4' `b5'
6991It defaults to `letter'.
6992If you need other sizes, see the variable `ps-page-dimensions-database'.
6993
6994The variable `ps-landscape-mode' determines the orientation
6995of the printing on the page. nil, the default, means "portrait" mode,
6996non-nil means "landscape" mode.
6997
6998The variable `ps-number-of-columns' must be a positive integer.
6999It determines the number of columns both in landscape and portrait mode.
7000It defaults to 1.
7001
7002*** Horizontal layout
7003
7004The horizontal layout is determined by the variables
7005`ps-left-margin', `ps-inter-column', and `ps-right-margin'.
7006All are measured in points.
7007
7008*** Vertical layout
7009
7010The vertical layout is determined by the variables
7011`ps-bottom-margin', `ps-top-margin', and `ps-header-offset'.
7012All are measured in points.
7013
7014*** Headers
7015
7016If the variable `ps-print-header' is nil, no header is printed. Then
7017`ps-header-offset' is not relevant and `ps-top-margin' represents the
7018margin above the text.
7019
7020If the variable `ps-print-header-frame' is non-nil, a gaudy
7021framing box is printed around the header.
7022
7023The contents of the header are determined by `ps-header-lines',
7024`ps-show-n-of-n', `ps-left-header' and `ps-right-header'.
7025
7026The height of the header is determined by `ps-header-line-pad',
7027`ps-header-font-family', `ps-header-title-font-size' and
7028`ps-header-font-size'.
7029
7030*** Font managing
7031
7032The variable `ps-font-family' determines which font family is to be
7033used for ordinary text. Its value must be a key symbol in the alist
7034`ps-font-info-database'. You can add other font families by adding
7035elements to this alist.
7036
7037The variable `ps-font-size' determines the size of the font
7038for ordinary text. It defaults to 8.5 points.
7039
7040** hideshow changes.
7041
7042*** now supports hiding of blocks of single line comments (like // for
7043C++, ; for lisp).
7044
7045*** Support for java-mode added.
7046
7047*** When doing `hs-hide-all' it is now possible to also hide the comments
7048in the file if `hs-hide-comments-when-hiding-all' is set.
7049
7050*** The new function `hs-hide-initial-comment' hides the the comments at
7051the beginning of the files. Finally those huge RCS logs don't stay in your
7052way! This is run by default when entering the `hs-minor-mode'.
7053
7054*** Now uses overlays instead of `selective-display', so is more
7055robust and a lot faster.
7056
7057*** A block beginning can span multiple lines.
7058
7059*** The new variable `hs-show-hidden-short-form' if t, directs hideshow
7060to show only the beginning of a block when it is hidden. See the
7061documentation for more details.
7062
7063** Changes in Enriched mode.
7064
7065*** When you visit a file in enriched-mode, Emacs will make sure it is
7066filled to the current fill-column. This behavior is now independent
7067of the size of the window. When you save the file, the fill-column in
7068use is stored as well, so that the whole buffer need not be refilled
7069the next time unless the fill-column is different.
7070
7071*** use-hard-newlines is now a minor mode. When it is enabled, Emacs
7072distinguishes between hard and soft newlines, and treats hard newlines
7073as paragraph boundaries. Otherwise all newlines inserted are marked
7074as soft, and paragraph boundaries are determined solely from the text.
7075
7076** Font Lock mode
7077
7078*** Custom support
7079
7080The variables font-lock-face-attributes, font-lock-display-type and
7081font-lock-background-mode are now obsolete; the recommended way to specify the
7082faces to use for Font Lock mode is with M-x customize-group on the new custom
7083group font-lock-highlighting-faces. If you set font-lock-face-attributes in
7084your ~/.emacs file, Font Lock mode will respect its value. However, you should
7085consider converting from setting that variable to using M-x customize.
7086
7087You can still use X resources to specify Font Lock face appearances.
7088
7089*** Maximum decoration
7090
7091Fontification now uses the maximum level of decoration supported by
7092default. Previously, fontification used a mode-specific default level
7093of decoration, which is typically the minimum level of decoration
7094supported. You can set font-lock-maximum-decoration to nil
7095to get the old behavior.
7096
7097*** New support
7098
7099Support is now provided for Java, Objective-C, AWK and SIMULA modes.
7100
7101Note that Font Lock mode can be turned on without knowing exactly what modes
7102support Font Lock mode, via the command global-font-lock-mode.
7103
7104*** Configurable support
7105
7106Support for C, C++, Objective-C and Java can be more easily configured for
7107additional types and classes via the new variables c-font-lock-extra-types,
7108c++-font-lock-extra-types, objc-font-lock-extra-types and, you guessed it,
7109java-font-lock-extra-types. These value of each of these variables should be a
7110list of regexps matching the extra type names. For example, the default value
7111of c-font-lock-extra-types is ("\\sw+_t") which means fontification follows the
7112convention that C type names end in _t. This results in slower fontification.
7113
7114Of course, you can change the variables that specify fontification in whatever
7115way you wish, typically by adding regexps. However, these new variables make
7116it easier to make specific and common changes for the fontification of types.
7117
7118*** Adding highlighting patterns to existing support
7119
7120You can use the new function font-lock-add-keywords to add your own
7121highlighting patterns, such as for project-local or user-specific constructs,
7122for any mode.
7123
7124For example, to highlight `FIXME:' words in C comments, put:
7125
7126 (font-lock-add-keywords 'c-mode '(("\\<FIXME:" 0 font-lock-warning-face t)))
7127
7128in your ~/.emacs.
7129
7130*** New faces
7131
7132Font Lock now defines two new faces, font-lock-builtin-face and
7133font-lock-warning-face. These are intended to highlight builtin keywords,
7134distinct from a language's normal keywords, and objects that should be brought
7135to user attention, respectively. Various modes now use these new faces.
7136
7137*** Changes to fast-lock support mode
7138
7139The fast-lock package, one of the two Font Lock support modes, can now process
7140cache files silently. You can use the new variable fast-lock-verbose, in the
7141same way as font-lock-verbose, to control this feature.
7142
7143*** Changes to lazy-lock support mode
7144
7145The lazy-lock package, one of the two Font Lock support modes, can now fontify
7146according to the true syntactic context relative to other lines. You can use
7147the new variable lazy-lock-defer-contextually to control this feature. If
7148non-nil, changes to the buffer will cause subsequent lines in the buffer to be
7149refontified after lazy-lock-defer-time seconds of idle time. If nil, then only
7150the modified lines will be refontified; this is the same as the previous Lazy
7151Lock mode behaviour and the behaviour of Font Lock mode.
7152
7153This feature is useful in modes where strings or comments can span lines.
7154For example, if a string or comment terminating character is deleted, then if
7155this feature is enabled subsequent lines in the buffer will be correctly
7156refontified to reflect their new syntactic context. Previously, only the line
7157containing the deleted character would be refontified and you would have to use
7158the command M-g M-g (font-lock-fontify-block) to refontify some lines.
7159
7160As a consequence of this new feature, two other variables have changed:
7161
7162Variable `lazy-lock-defer-driven' is renamed `lazy-lock-defer-on-scrolling'.
7163Variable `lazy-lock-defer-time' can now only be a time, i.e., a number.
7164Buffer modes for which on-the-fly deferral applies can be specified via the
7165new variable `lazy-lock-defer-on-the-fly'.
7166
7167If you set these variables in your ~/.emacs, then you may have to change those
7168settings.
7169
7170** Ada mode changes.
7171
7172*** There is now better support for using find-file.el with Ada mode.
7173If you switch between spec and body, the cursor stays in the same
7174procedure (modulo overloading). If a spec has no body file yet, but
7175you try to switch to its body file, Ada mode now generates procedure
7176stubs.
7177
7178*** There are two new commands:
7179 - `ada-make-local' : invokes gnatmake on the current buffer
7180 - `ada-check-syntax' : check syntax of current buffer.
7181
7182The user options `ada-compiler-make', `ada-make-options',
7183`ada-language-version', `ada-compiler-syntax-check', and
7184`ada-compile-options' are used within these commands.
7185
7186*** Ada mode can now work with Outline minor mode. The outline level
7187is calculated from the indenting, not from syntactic constructs.
7188Outlining does not work if your code is not correctly indented.
7189
7190*** The new function `ada-gnat-style' converts the buffer to the style of
7191formatting used in GNAT. It places two blanks after a comment start,
7192places one blank between a word end and an opening '(', and puts one
7193space between a comma and the beginning of a word.
7194
7195** Scheme mode changes.
7196
7197*** Scheme mode indentation now uses many of the facilities of Lisp
7198mode; therefore, the variables to customize it are the variables used
7199for Lisp mode which have names starting with `lisp-'. The variables
7200with names starting with `scheme-' which used to do this no longer
7201have any effect.
7202
7203If you want to use different indentation for Scheme and Lisp, this is
7204still possible, but now you must do it by adding a hook to
7205scheme-mode-hook, which could work by setting the `lisp-' indentation
7206variables as buffer-local variables.
7207
7208*** DSSSL mode is a variant of Scheme mode, for editing DSSSL scripts.
7209Use M-x dsssl-mode.
7210
7211** Changes to the emacsclient program
7212
7213*** If a socket can't be found, and environment variables LOGNAME or
7214USER are set, emacsclient now looks for a socket based on the UID
7215associated with the name. That is an emacsclient running as root
7216can connect to an Emacs server started by a non-root user.
7217
7218*** The emacsclient program now accepts an option --no-wait which tells
7219it to return immediately without waiting for you to "finish" the
7220buffer in Emacs.
7221
7222*** The new option --alternate-editor allows to specify an editor to
7223use if Emacs is not running. The environment variable
7224ALTERNATE_EDITOR can be used for the same effect; the command line
7225option takes precedence.
7226
7227** M-x eldoc-mode enables a minor mode in which the echo area
7228constantly shows the parameter list for function being called at point
7229(in Emacs Lisp and Lisp Interaction modes only).
7230
7231** C-x n d now runs the new command narrow-to-defun,
7232which narrows the accessible parts of the buffer to just
7233the current defun.
7234
7235** Emacs now handles the `--' argument in the standard way; all
7236following arguments are treated as ordinary file names.
7237
7238** On MSDOS and Windows, the bookmark file is now called _emacs.bmk,
7239and the saved desktop file is now called _emacs.desktop (truncated if
7240necessary).
7241
7242** When you kill a buffer that visits a file,
7243if there are any registers that save positions in the file,
7244these register values no longer become completely useless.
7245If you try to go to such a register with C-x j, then you are
7246asked whether to visit the file again. If you say yes,
7247it visits the file and then goes to the same position.
7248
7249** When you visit a file that changes frequently outside Emacs--for
7250example, a log of output from a process that continues to run--it may
7251be useful for Emacs to revert the file without querying you whenever
7252you visit the file afresh with C-x C-f.
7253
7254You can request this behavior for certain files by setting the
7255variable revert-without-query to a list of regular expressions. If a
7256file's name matches any of these regular expressions, find-file and
7257revert-buffer revert the buffer without asking for permission--but
7258only if you have not edited the buffer text yourself.
7259
7260** set-default-font has been renamed to set-frame-font
7261since it applies only to the current frame.
7262
7263** In TeX mode, you can use the variable tex-main-file to specify the
7264file for tex-file to run TeX on. (By default, tex-main-file is nil,
7265and tex-file runs TeX on the current visited file.)
7266
7267This is useful when you are editing a document that consists of
7268multiple files. In each of the included files, you can set up a local
7269variable list which specifies the top-level file of your document for
7270tex-main-file. Then tex-file will run TeX on the whole document
7271instead of just the file you are editing.
7272
7273** RefTeX mode
7274
7275RefTeX mode is a new minor mode with special support for \label, \ref
7276and \cite macros in LaTeX documents. RefTeX distinguishes labels of
7277different environments (equation, figure, ...) and has full support for
7278multifile documents. To use it, select a buffer with a LaTeX document and
7279turn the mode on with M-x reftex-mode. Here are the main user commands:
7280
7281C-c ( reftex-label
7282 Creates a label semi-automatically. RefTeX is context sensitive and
7283 knows which kind of label is needed.
7284
7285C-c ) reftex-reference
7286 Offers in a menu all labels in the document, along with context of the
7287 label definition. The selected label is referenced as \ref{LABEL}.
7288
7289C-c [ reftex-citation
7290 Prompts for a regular expression and displays a list of matching BibTeX
7291 database entries. The selected entry is cited with a \cite{KEY} macro.
7292
7293C-c & reftex-view-crossref
7294 Views the cross reference of a \ref or \cite command near point.
7295
7296C-c = reftex-toc
7297 Shows a table of contents of the (multifile) document. From there you
7298 can quickly jump to every section.
7299
7300Under X, RefTeX installs a "Ref" menu in the menu bar, with additional
7301commands. Press `?' to get help when a prompt mentions this feature.
7302Full documentation and customization examples are in the file
7303reftex.el. You can use the finder to view the file documentation:
7304C-h p --> tex --> reftex.el
7305
7306** Changes in BibTeX mode.
7307
7308*** Info documentation is now available.
7309
7310*** Don't allow parentheses in string constants anymore. This confused
7311both the BibTeX program and Emacs BibTeX mode.
7312
7313*** Renamed variable bibtex-mode-user-optional-fields to
7314bibtex-user-optional-fields.
7315
7316*** Removed variable bibtex-include-OPTannote
7317(use bibtex-user-optional-fields instead).
7318
7319*** New interactive functions to copy and kill fields and complete
7320entries to the BibTeX kill ring, from where they can be yanked back by
7321appropriate functions.
7322
7323*** New interactive functions for repositioning and marking of
7324entries. They are bound by default to M-C-l and M-C-h.
7325
7326*** New hook bibtex-clean-entry-hook. It is called after entry has
7327been cleaned.
7328
7329*** New variable bibtex-field-delimiters, which replaces variables
7330bibtex-field-{left|right}-delimiter.
7331
7332*** New variable bibtex-entry-delimiters to determine how entries
7333shall be delimited.
7334
7335*** Allow preinitialization of fields. See documentation of
7336bibtex-user-optional-fields, bibtex-entry-field-alist, and
7337bibtex-include-OPTkey for details.
7338
7339*** Book and InBook entries require either an author or an editor
7340field. This is now supported by bibtex.el. Alternative fields are
7341prefixed with `ALT'.
7342
7343*** New variable bibtex-entry-format, which replaces variable
7344bibtex-clean-entry-zap-empty-opts and allows specification of many
7345formatting options performed on cleaning an entry (see variable
7346documentation).
7347
7348*** Even more control on how automatic keys are generated. See
7349documentation of bibtex-generate-autokey for details. Transcriptions
7350for foreign languages other than German are now handled, too.
7351
7352*** New boolean user option bibtex-comma-after-last-field to decide if
7353comma should be inserted at end of last field.
7354
7355*** New boolean user option bibtex-align-at-equal-sign to determine if
7356alignment should be made at left side of field contents or at equal
7357signs. New user options to control entry layout (e.g. indentation).
7358
7359*** New function bibtex-fill-entry to realign entries.
7360
7361*** New function bibtex-reformat to reformat region or buffer.
7362
7363*** New function bibtex-convert-alien to convert a BibTeX database
7364from alien sources.
7365
7366*** New function bibtex-complete-key (similar to bibtex-complete-string)
7367to complete prefix to a key defined in buffer. Mainly useful in
7368crossref entries.
7369
7370*** New function bibtex-count-entries to count entries in buffer or
7371region.
7372
7373*** Added support for imenu.
7374
7375*** The function `bibtex-validate' now checks current region instead
7376of buffer if mark is active. Now it shows all errors of buffer in a
7377`compilation mode' buffer. You can use the normal commands (e.g.
7378`next-error') for compilation modes to jump to errors.
7379
7380*** New variable `bibtex-string-file-path' to determine where the files
7381from `bibtex-string-files' are searched.
7382
7383** Iso Accents mode now supports Latin-3 as an alternative.
7384
7385** The command next-error now opens blocks hidden by hideshow.
7386
7387** The function using-unix-filesystems has been replaced by the
7388functions add-untranslated-filesystem and remove-untranslated-filesystem.
7389Each of these functions takes the name of a drive letter or directory
7390as an argument.
7391
7392When a filesystem is added as untranslated, all files on it are read
7393and written in binary mode (no cr/lf translation is performed).
7394
7395** browse-url changes
7396
7397*** New methods for: Grail (browse-url-generic), MMM (browse-url-mmm),
7398Lynx in a separate xterm (browse-url-lynx-xterm) or in an Emacs window
7399(browse-url-lynx-emacs), remote W3 (browse-url-w3-gnudoit), generic
7400non-remote-controlled browsers (browse-url-generic) and associated
7401customization variables.
7402
7403*** New commands `browse-url-of-region' and `browse-url'.
7404
7405*** URLs marked up with <URL:...> (RFC1738) work if broken across
7406lines. Browsing methods can be associated with URL regexps
7407(e.g. mailto: URLs) via `browse-url-browser-function'.
7408
7409** Changes in Ediff
7410
7411*** Clicking Mouse-2 on a brief command description in Ediff control panel
7412pops up the Info file for this command.
7413
7414*** There is now a variable, ediff-autostore-merges, which controls whether
7415the result of a merge is saved in a file. By default, this is done only when
7416merge is done from a session group (eg, when merging files in two different
7417directories).
7418
7419*** Since Emacs 19.31 (this hasn't been announced before), Ediff can compare
7420and merge groups of files residing in different directories, or revisions of
7421files in the same directory.
7422
7423*** Since Emacs 19.31, Ediff can apply multi-file patches interactively.
7424The patches must be in the context format or GNU unified format. (The bug
7425related to the GNU format has now been fixed.)
7426
7427** Changes in Viper
7428
7429*** The startup file is now .viper instead of .vip
7430*** All variable/function names have been changed to start with viper-
7431 instead of vip-.
7432*** C-\ now simulates the meta-key in all Viper states.
7433*** C-z in Insert state now escapes to Vi for the duration of the next
7434Viper command. In Vi and Insert states, C-z behaves as before.
7435*** C-c \ escapes to Vi for one command if Viper is in Insert or Emacs states.
7436*** _ is no longer the meta-key in Vi state.
7437*** The variable viper-insert-state-cursor-color can be used to change cursor
7438color when Viper is in insert state.
7439*** If search lands the cursor near the top or the bottom of the window,
7440Viper pulls the window up or down to expose more context. The variable
7441viper-adjust-window-after-search controls this behavior.
7442
7443** Etags changes.
7444
7445*** In C, C++, Objective C and Java, Etags tags global variables by
7446default. The resulting tags files are inflated by 30% on average.
7447Use --no-globals to turn this feature off. Etags can also tag
7448variables which are members of structure-like constructs, but it does
7449not by default. Use --members to turn this feature on.
7450
7451*** C++ member functions are now recognized as tags.
7452
7453*** Java is tagged like C++. In addition, "extends" and "implements"
7454constructs are tagged. Files are recognised by the extension .java.
7455
7456*** Etags can now handle programs written in Postscript. Files are
7457recognised by the extensions .ps and .pdb (Postscript with C syntax).
7458In Postscript, tags are lines that start with a slash.
7459
7460*** Etags now handles Objective C and Objective C++ code. The usual C and
7461C++ tags are recognized in these languages; in addition, etags
7462recognizes special Objective C syntax for classes, class categories,
7463methods and protocols.
7464
7465*** Etags also handles Cobol. Files are recognised by the extension
7466.cobol. The tagged lines are those containing a word that begins in
7467column 8 and ends in a full stop, i.e. anything that could be a
7468paragraph name.
7469
7470*** Regexps in Etags now support intervals, as in ed or grep. The syntax of
7471an interval is \{M,N\}, and it means to match the preceding expression
7472at least M times and as many as N times.
7473
7474** The format for specifying a custom format for time-stamp to insert
7475in files has changed slightly.
7476
7477With the new enhancements to the functionality of format-time-string,
7478time-stamp-format will change to be eventually compatible with it.
7479This conversion is being done in two steps to maintain compatibility
7480with old time-stamp-format values.
7481
7482In the new scheme, alternate case is signified by the number-sign
7483(`#') modifier, rather than changing the case of the format character.
7484This feature is as yet incompletely implemented for compatibility
7485reasons.
7486
7487In the old time-stamp-format, all numeric fields defaulted to their
7488natural width. (With format-time-string, each format has a
7489fixed-width default.) In this version, you can specify the colon
7490(`:') modifier to a numeric conversion to mean "give me the historical
7491time-stamp-format width default." Do not use colon if you are
7492specifying an explicit width, as in "%02d".
7493
7494Numbers are no longer truncated to the requested width, except in the
7495case of "%02y", which continues to give a two-digit year. Digit
7496truncation probably wasn't being used for anything else anyway.
7497
7498The new formats will work with old versions of Emacs. New formats are
7499being recommended now to allow time-stamp-format to change in the
7500future to be compatible with format-time-string. The new forms being
7501recommended now will continue to work then.
7502
7503See the documentation string for the variable time-stamp-format for
7504details.
7505
7506** There are some additional major modes:
7507
7508dcl-mode, for editing VMS DCL files.
7509m4-mode, for editing files of m4 input.
7510meta-mode, for editing MetaFont and MetaPost source files.
7511
7512** In Shell mode, the command shell-copy-environment-variable lets you
7513copy the value of a specified environment variable from the subshell
7514into Emacs.
7515
7516** New Lisp packages include:
7517
7518*** battery.el displays battery status for laptops.
7519
7520*** M-x bruce (named after Lenny Bruce) is a program that might
7521be used for adding some indecent words to your email.
7522
7523*** M-x crisp-mode enables an emulation for the CRiSP editor.
7524
7525*** M-x dirtrack arranges for better tracking of directory changes
7526in shell buffers.
7527
7528*** The new library elint.el provides for linting of Emacs Lisp code.
7529See the documentation for `elint-initialize', `elint-current-buffer'
7530and `elint-defun'.
7531
7532*** M-x expand-add-abbrevs defines a special kind of abbrev which is
7533meant for programming constructs. These abbrevs expand like ordinary
7534ones, when you type SPC, but only at the end of a line and not within
7535strings or comments.
7536
7537These abbrevs can act as templates: you can define places within an
7538abbrev for insertion of additional text. Once you expand the abbrev,
7539you can then use C-x a p and C-x a n to move back and forth to these
7540insertion points. Thus you can conveniently insert additional text
7541at these points.
7542
7543*** filecache.el remembers the location of files so that you
7544can visit them by short forms of their names.
7545
7546*** find-func.el lets you find the definition of the user-loaded
7547Emacs Lisp function at point.
7548
7549*** M-x handwrite converts text to a "handwritten" picture.
7550
7551*** M-x iswitchb-buffer is a command for switching to a buffer, much like
7552switch-buffer, but it reads the argument in a more helpful way.
7553
7554*** M-x landmark implements a neural network for landmark learning.
7555
7556*** M-x locate provides a convenient interface to the `locate' program.
7557
7558*** M4 mode is a new mode for editing files of m4 input.
7559
7560*** mantemp.el creates C++ manual template instantiations
7561from the GCC error messages which indicate which instantiations are needed.
7562
7563*** mouse-copy.el provides a one-click copy and move feature.
7564You can drag a region with M-mouse-1, and it is automatically
7565inserted at point. M-Shift-mouse-1 deletes the text from its
7566original place after inserting the copy.
7567
7568*** mouse-drag.el lets you do scrolling by dragging Mouse-2
7569on the buffer.
7570
7571You click the mouse and move; that distance either translates into the
7572velocity to scroll (with mouse-drag-throw) or the distance to scroll
7573(with mouse-drag-drag). Horizontal scrolling is enabled when needed.
7574
7575Enable mouse-drag with:
7576 (global-set-key [down-mouse-2] 'mouse-drag-throw)
7577-or-
7578 (global-set-key [down-mouse-2] 'mouse-drag-drag)
7579
7580*** mspools.el is useful for determining which mail folders have
7581mail waiting to be read in them. It works with procmail.
7582
7583*** Octave mode is a major mode for editing files of input for Octave.
7584It comes with a facility for communicating with an Octave subprocess.
7585
7586*** ogonek
7587
7588The ogonek package provides functions for changing the coding of
7589Polish diacritic characters in buffers. Codings known from various
7590platforms are supported such as ISO8859-2, Mazovia, IBM Latin2, and
7591TeX. For example, you can change the coding from Mazovia to
7592ISO8859-2. Another example is a change of coding from ISO8859-2 to
7593prefix notation (in which `/a' stands for the aogonek character, for
7594instance) and vice versa.
7595
7596To use this package load it using
7597 M-x load-library [enter] ogonek
7598Then, you may get an explanation by calling one of
7599 M-x ogonek-jak -- in Polish
7600 M-x ogonek-how -- in English
7601The info specifies the commands and variables provided as well as the
7602ways of customization in `.emacs'.
7603
7604*** Interface to ph.
7605
7606Emacs provides a client interface to CCSO Nameservers (ph/qi)
7607
7608The CCSO nameserver is used in many universities to provide directory
7609services about people. ph.el provides a convenient Emacs interface to
7610these servers.
7611
7612*** uce.el is useful for replying to unsolicited commercial email.
7613
7614*** vcursor.el implements a "virtual cursor" feature.
7615You can move the virtual cursor with special commands
7616while the real cursor does not move.
7617
7618*** webjump.el is a "hot list" package which you can set up
7619for visiting your favorite web sites.
7620
7621*** M-x winner-mode is a minor mode which saves window configurations,
7622so you can move back to other configurations that you have recently used.
7623
7624** movemail change
7625
7626Movemail no longer needs to be installed setuid root in order for POP
7627mail retrieval to function properly. This is because it no longer
7628supports the RPOP (reserved-port POP) protocol; instead, it uses the
7629user's POP password to authenticate to the mail server.
7630
7631This change was made earlier, but not reported in NEWS before.
7632\f
7633* Emacs 20.1 changes for MS-DOS and MS-Windows.
7634
7635** Changes in handling MS-DOS/MS-Windows text files.
7636
7637Emacs handles three different conventions for representing
7638end-of-line: CRLF for MSDOS, LF for Unix and GNU, and CR (used on the
7639Macintosh). Emacs determines which convention is used in a specific
7640file based on the contents of that file (except for certain special
7641file names), and when it saves the file, it uses the same convention.
7642
7643To save the file and change the end-of-line convention, you can use
7644C-x RET f (set-buffer-file-coding-system) to specify a different
7645coding system for the buffer. Then, when you save the file, the newly
7646specified coding system will take effect. For example, to save with
7647LF, specify undecided-unix (or some other ...-unix coding system); to
7648save with CRLF, specify undecided-dos.
7649\f
7650* Lisp Changes in Emacs 20.1
7651
7652** Byte-compiled files made with Emacs 20 will, in general, work in
7653Emacs 19 as well, as long as the source code runs in Emacs 19. And
7654vice versa: byte-compiled files made with Emacs 19 should also run in
7655Emacs 20, as long as the program itself works in Emacs 20.
7656
7657** Windows-specific functions and variables have been renamed
7658to start with w32- instead of win32-.
7659
7660In hacker language, calling something a "win" is a form of praise. We
7661don't want to praise a non-free Microsoft system, so we don't call it
7662"win".
7663
7664** Basic Lisp changes
7665
7666*** A symbol whose name starts with a colon now automatically
7667evaluates to itself. Therefore such a symbol can be used as a constant.
7668
7669*** The defined purpose of `defconst' has been changed. It should now
7670be used only for values that should not be changed whether by a program
7671or by the user.
7672
7673The actual behavior of defconst has not been changed.
7674
7675*** There are new macros `when' and `unless'
7676
7677(when CONDITION BODY...) is short for (if CONDITION (progn BODY...))
7678(unless CONDITION BODY...) is short for (if CONDITION nil BODY...)
7679
7680*** Emacs now defines functions caar, cadr, cdar and cddr with their
7681usual Lisp meanings. For example, caar returns the car of the car of
7682its argument.
7683
7684*** equal, when comparing strings, now ignores their text properties.
7685
7686*** The new function `functionp' tests whether an object is a function.
7687
7688*** arrayp now returns t for char-tables and bool-vectors.
7689
7690*** Certain primitives which use characters (as integers) now get an
7691error if the integer is not a valid character code. These primitives
7692include insert-char, char-to-string, and the %c construct in the
7693`format' function.
7694
7695*** The `require' function now insists on adding a suffix, either .el
7696or .elc, to the file name. Thus, (require 'foo) will not use a file
7697whose name is just foo. It insists on foo.el or foo.elc.
7698
7699*** The `autoload' function, when the file name does not contain
7700either a directory name or the suffix .el or .elc, insists on
7701adding one of these suffixes.
7702
7703*** string-to-number now takes an optional second argument BASE
7704which specifies the base to use when converting an integer.
7705If BASE is omitted, base 10 is used.
7706
7707We have not implemented other radices for floating point numbers,
7708because that would be much more work and does not seem useful.
7709
7710*** substring now handles vectors as well as strings.
7711
7712*** The Common Lisp function eql is no longer defined normally.
7713You must load the `cl' library to define it.
7714
7715*** The new macro `with-current-buffer' lets you evaluate an expression
7716conveniently with a different current buffer. It looks like this:
7717
7718 (with-current-buffer BUFFER BODY-FORMS...)
7719
7720BUFFER is the expression that says which buffer to use.
7721BODY-FORMS say what to do in that buffer.
7722
7723*** The new primitive `save-current-buffer' saves and restores the
7724choice of current buffer, like `save-excursion', but without saving or
7725restoring the value of point or the mark. `with-current-buffer'
7726works using `save-current-buffer'.
7727
7728*** The new macro `with-temp-file' lets you do some work in a new buffer and
7729write the output to a specified file. Like `progn', it returns the value
7730of the last form.
7731
7732*** The new macro `with-temp-buffer' lets you do some work in a new buffer,
7733which is discarded after use. Like `progn', it returns the value of the
7734last form. If you wish to return the buffer contents, use (buffer-string)
7735as the last form.
7736
7737*** The new function split-string takes a string, splits it at certain
7738characters, and returns a list of the substrings in between the
7739matches.
7740
7741For example, (split-string "foo bar lose" " +") returns ("foo" "bar" "lose").
7742
7743*** The new macro with-output-to-string executes some Lisp expressions
7744with standard-output set up so that all output feeds into a string.
7745Then it returns that string.
7746
7747For example, if the current buffer name is `foo',
7748
7749(with-output-to-string
7750 (princ "The buffer is ")
7751 (princ (buffer-name)))
7752
7753returns "The buffer is foo".
7754
7755** Non-ASCII characters are now supported, if enable-multibyte-characters
7756is non-nil.
7757
7758These characters have character codes above 256. When inserted in the
7759buffer or stored in a string, they are represented as multibyte
7760characters that occupy several buffer positions each.
7761
7762*** When enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil, a single character in
7763a buffer or string can be two or more bytes (as many as four).
7764
7765Buffers and strings are still made up of unibyte elements;
7766character positions and string indices are always measured in bytes.
7767Therefore, moving forward one character can increase the buffer
7768position by 2, 3 or 4. The function forward-char moves by whole
7769characters, and therefore is no longer equivalent to
7770 (lambda (n) (goto-char (+ (point) n))).
7771
7772ASCII characters (codes 0 through 127) are still single bytes, always.
7773Sequences of byte values 128 through 255 are used to represent
7774non-ASCII characters. These sequences are called "multibyte
7775characters".
7776
7777The first byte of a multibyte character is always in the range 128
7778through 159 (octal 0200 through 0237). These values are called
7779"leading codes". The second and subsequent bytes are always in the
7780range 160 through 255 (octal 0240 through 0377). The first byte, the
7781leading code, determines how many bytes long the sequence is.
7782
7783*** The function forward-char moves over characters, and therefore
7784(forward-char 1) may increase point by more than 1 if it moves over a
7785multibyte character. Likewise, delete-char always deletes a
7786character, which may be more than one buffer position.
7787
7788This means that some Lisp programs, which assume that a character is
7789always one buffer position, need to be changed.
7790
7791However, all ASCII characters are always one buffer position.
7792
7793*** The regexp [\200-\377] no longer matches all non-ASCII characters,
7794because when enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil, these characters
7795have codes that are not in the range octal 200 to octal 377. However,
7796the regexp [^\000-\177] does match all non-ASCII characters,
7797guaranteed.
7798
7799*** The function char-boundary-p returns non-nil if position POS is
7800between two characters in the buffer (not in the middle of a
7801character).
7802
7803When the value is non-nil, it says what kind of character follows POS:
7804
7805 0 if POS is at an ASCII character or at the end of range,
7806 1 if POS is before a 2-byte length multi-byte form,
7807 2 if POS is at a head of 3-byte length multi-byte form,
7808 3 if POS is at a head of 4-byte length multi-byte form,
7809 4 if POS is at a head of multi-byte form of a composite character.
7810
7811*** The function char-bytes returns how many bytes the character CHAR uses.
7812
7813*** Strings can contain multibyte characters. The function
7814`length' returns the string length counting bytes, which may be
7815more than the number of characters.
7816
7817You can include a multibyte character in a string constant by writing
7818it literally. You can also represent it with a hex escape,
7819\xNNNNNNN..., using as many digits as necessary. Any character which
7820is not a valid hex digit terminates this construct. If you want to
7821follow it with a character that is a hex digit, write backslash and
7822newline in between; that will terminate the hex escape.
7823
7824*** The function concat-chars takes arguments which are characters
7825and returns a string containing those characters.
7826
7827*** The function sref access a multibyte character in a string.
7828(sref STRING INDX) returns the character in STRING at INDEX. INDEX
7829counts from zero. If INDEX is at a position in the middle of a
7830character, sref signals an error.
7831
7832*** The function chars-in-string returns the number of characters
7833in a string. This is less than the length of the string, if the
7834string contains multibyte characters (the length counts bytes).
7835
7836*** The function chars-in-region returns the number of characters
7837in a region from BEG to END. This is less than (- END BEG) if the
7838region contains multibyte characters (the length counts bytes).
7839
7840*** The function string-to-list converts a string to a list of
7841the characters in it. string-to-vector converts a string
7842to a vector of the characters in it.
7843
7844*** The function store-substring alters part of the contents
7845of a string. You call it as follows:
7846
7847 (store-substring STRING IDX OBJ)
7848
7849This says to alter STRING, by storing OBJ starting at index IDX in
7850STRING. OBJ may be either a character or a (smaller) string.
7851This function really does alter the contents of STRING.
7852Since it is impossible to change the length of an existing string,
7853it is an error if OBJ doesn't fit within STRING's actual length.
7854
7855*** char-width returns the width (in columns) of the character CHAR,
7856if it were displayed in the current buffer and the selected window.
7857
7858*** string-width returns the width (in columns) of the text in STRING,
7859if it were displayed in the current buffer and the selected window.
7860
7861*** truncate-string-to-width shortens a string, if necessary,
7862to fit within a certain number of columns. (Of course, it does
7863not alter the string that you give it; it returns a new string
7864which contains all or just part of the existing string.)
7865
7866(truncate-string-to-width STR END-COLUMN &optional START-COLUMN PADDING)
7867
7868This returns the part of STR up to column END-COLUMN.
7869
7870The optional argument START-COLUMN specifies the starting column.
7871If this is non-nil, then the first START-COLUMN columns of the string
7872are not included in the resulting value.
7873
7874The optional argument PADDING, if non-nil, is a padding character to be added
7875at the beginning and end the resulting string, to extend it to exactly
7876WIDTH columns. If PADDING is nil, that means do not pad; then, if STRING
7877is narrower than WIDTH, the value is equal to STRING.
7878
7879If PADDING and START-COLUMN are both non-nil, and if there is no clean
7880place in STRING that corresponds to START-COLUMN (because one
7881character extends across that column), then the padding character
7882PADDING is added one or more times at the beginning of the result
7883string, so that its columns line up as if it really did start at
7884column START-COLUMN.
7885
7886*** When the functions in the list after-change-functions are called,
7887the third argument is the number of bytes in the pre-change text, not
7888necessarily the number of characters. It is, in effect, the
7889difference in buffer position between the beginning and the end of the
7890changed text, before the change.
7891
7892*** The characters Emacs uses are classified in various character
7893sets, each of which has a name which is a symbol. In general there is
7894one character set for each script, not for each language.
7895
7896**** The function charsetp tests whether an object is a character set name.
7897
7898**** The variable charset-list holds a list of character set names.
7899
7900**** char-charset, given a character code, returns the name of the character
7901set that the character belongs to. (The value is a symbol.)
7902
7903**** split-char, given a character code, returns a list containing the
7904name of the character set, followed by one or two byte-values
7905which identify the character within that character set.
7906
7907**** make-char, given a character set name and one or two subsequent
7908byte-values, constructs a character code. This is roughly the
7909opposite of split-char.
7910
7911**** find-charset-region returns a list of the character sets
7912of all the characters between BEG and END.
7913
7914**** find-charset-string returns a list of the character sets
7915of all the characters in a string.
7916
7917*** Here are the Lisp facilities for working with coding systems
7918and specifying coding systems.
7919
7920**** The function coding-system-list returns a list of all coding
7921system names (symbols). With optional argument t, it returns a list
7922of all distinct base coding systems, not including variants.
7923(Variant coding systems are those like latin-1-dos, latin-1-unix
7924and latin-1-mac which specify the end-of-line conversion as well
7925as what to do about code conversion.)
7926
7927**** coding-system-p tests a symbol to see if it is a coding system
7928name. It returns t if so, nil if not.
7929
7930**** file-coding-system-alist specifies which coding systems to use
7931for certain file names. It works like network-coding-system-alist,
7932except that the PATTERN is matched against the file name.
7933
7934Each element has the format (PATTERN . VAL), where PATTERN determines
7935which file names the element applies to. PATTERN should be a regexp
7936to match against a file name.
7937
7938VAL is a coding system, a cons cell containing two coding systems, or
7939a function symbol. If VAL is a coding system, it is used for both
7940decoding what received from the network stream and encoding what sent
7941to the network stream. If VAL is a cons cell containing two coding
7942systems, the car specifies the coding system for decoding, and the cdr
7943specifies the coding system for encoding.
7944
7945If VAL is a function symbol, the function must return a coding system
7946or a cons cell containing two coding systems, which is used as above.
7947
7948**** The variable network-coding-system-alist specifies
7949the coding system to use for network sockets.
7950
7951Each element has the format (PATTERN . VAL), where PATTERN determines
7952which network sockets the element applies to. PATTERN should be
7953either a port number or a regular expression matching some network
7954service names.
7955
7956VAL is a coding system, a cons cell containing two coding systems, or
7957a function symbol. If VAL is a coding system, it is used for both
7958decoding what received from the network stream and encoding what sent
7959to the network stream. If VAL is a cons cell containing two coding
7960systems, the car specifies the coding system for decoding, and the cdr
7961specifies the coding system for encoding.
7962
7963If VAL is a function symbol, the function must return a coding system
7964or a cons cell containing two coding systems, which is used as above.
7965
7966**** process-coding-system-alist specifies which coding systems to use
7967for certain subprocess. It works like network-coding-system-alist,
7968except that the PATTERN is matched against the program name used to
7969start the subprocess.
7970
7971**** The variable default-process-coding-system specifies the coding
7972systems to use for subprocess (and net connection) input and output,
7973when nothing else specifies what to do. The value is a cons cell
7974(OUTPUT-CODING . INPUT-CODING). OUTPUT-CODING applies to output
7975to the subprocess, and INPUT-CODING applies to input from it.
7976
7977**** The variable coding-system-for-write, if non-nil, specifies the
7978coding system to use for writing a file, or for output to a synchronous
7979subprocess.
7980
7981It also applies to any asynchronous subprocess or network connection,
7982but in a different way: the value of coding-system-for-write when you
7983start the subprocess or connection affects that subprocess or
7984connection permanently or until overridden.
7985
7986The variable coding-system-for-write takes precedence over
7987file-coding-system-alist, process-coding-system-alist and
7988network-coding-system-alist, and all other methods of specifying a
7989coding system for output. But most of the time this variable is nil.
7990It exists so that Lisp programs can bind it to a specific coding
7991system for one operation at a time.
7992
7993**** coding-system-for-read applies similarly to input from
7994files, subprocesses or network connections.
7995
7996**** The function process-coding-system tells you what
7997coding systems(s) an existing subprocess is using.
7998The value is a cons cell,
7999 (DECODING-CODING-SYSTEM . ENCODING-CODING-SYSTEM)
8000where DECODING-CODING-SYSTEM is used for decoding output from
8001the subprocess, and ENCODING-CODING-SYSTEM is used for encoding
8002input to the subprocess.
8003
8004**** The function set-process-coding-system can be used to
8005change the coding systems in use for an existing subprocess.
8006
8007** Emacs has a new facility to help users manage the many
8008customization options. To make a Lisp program work with this facility,
8009you need to use the new macros defgroup and defcustom.
8010
8011You use defcustom instead of defvar, for defining a user option
8012variable. The difference is that you specify two additional pieces of
8013information (usually): the "type" which says what values are
8014legitimate, and the "group" which specifies the hierarchy for
8015customization.
8016
8017Thus, instead of writing
8018
8019 (defvar foo-blurgoze nil
8020 "*Non-nil means that foo will act very blurgozely.")
8021
8022you would now write this:
8023
8024 (defcustom foo-blurgoze nil
8025 "*Non-nil means that foo will act very blurgozely."
8026 :type 'boolean
8027 :group foo)
8028
8029The type `boolean' means that this variable has only
8030two meaningful states: nil and non-nil. Other type values
8031describe other possibilities; see the manual for Custom
8032for a description of them.
8033
8034The "group" argument is used to specify a group which the option
8035should belong to. You define a new group like this:
8036
8037 (defgroup ispell nil
8038 "Spell checking using Ispell."
8039 :group 'processes)
8040
8041The "group" argument in defgroup specifies the parent group. The root
8042group is called `emacs'; it should not contain any variables itself,
8043but only other groups. The immediate subgroups of `emacs' correspond
8044to the keywords used by C-h p. Under these subgroups come
8045second-level subgroups that belong to individual packages.
8046
8047Each Emacs package should have its own set of groups. A simple
8048package should have just one group; a more complex package should
8049have a hierarchy of its own groups. The sole or root group of a
8050package should be a subgroup of one or more of the "keyword"
8051first-level subgroups.
8052
8053** New `widget' library for inserting UI components in buffers.
8054
8055This library, used by the new custom library, is documented in a
8056separate manual that accompanies Emacs.
8057
8058** easy-mmode
8059
8060The easy-mmode package provides macros and functions that make
8061developing minor modes easier. Roughly, the programmer has to code
8062only the functionality of the minor mode. All the rest--toggles,
8063predicate, and documentation--can be done in one call to the macro
8064`easy-mmode-define-minor-mode' (see the documentation). See also
8065`easy-mmode-define-keymap'.
8066
8067** Text property changes
8068
8069*** The `intangible' property now works on overlays as well as on a
8070text property.
8071
8072*** The new functions next-char-property-change and
8073previous-char-property-change scan through the buffer looking for a
8074place where either a text property or an overlay might change. The
8075functions take two arguments, POSITION and LIMIT. POSITION is the
8076starting position for the scan. LIMIT says where to stop the scan.
8077
8078If no property change is found before LIMIT, the value is LIMIT. If
8079LIMIT is nil, scan goes to the beginning or end of the accessible part
8080of the buffer. If no property change is found, the value is the
8081position of the beginning or end of the buffer.
8082
8083*** In the `local-map' text property or overlay property, the property
8084value can now be a symbol whose function definition is a keymap. This
8085is an alternative to using the keymap itself.
8086
8087** Changes in invisibility features
8088
8089*** Isearch can now temporarily show parts of the buffer which are
8090hidden by an overlay with a invisible property, when the search match
8091is inside that portion of the buffer. To enable this the overlay
8092should have a isearch-open-invisible property which is a function that
8093would be called having the overlay as an argument, the function should
8094make the overlay visible.
8095
8096During incremental search the overlays are shown by modifying the
8097invisible and intangible properties, if beside this more actions are
8098needed the overlay should have a isearch-open-invisible-temporary
8099which is a function. The function is called with 2 arguments: one is
8100the overlay and the second is nil when it should show the overlay and
8101t when it should hide it.
8102
8103*** add-to-invisibility-spec, remove-from-invisibility-spec
8104
8105Modes that use overlays to hide portions of a buffer should set the
8106invisible property of the overlay to the mode's name (or another symbol)
8107and modify the `buffer-invisibility-spec' to include that symbol.
8108Use `add-to-invisibility-spec' and `remove-from-invisibility-spec' to
8109manipulate the `buffer-invisibility-spec'.
8110Here is an example of how to do this:
8111
8112 ;; If we want to display an ellipsis:
8113 (add-to-invisibility-spec '(my-symbol . t))
8114 ;; If you don't want ellipsis:
8115 (add-to-invisibility-spec 'my-symbol)
8116
8117 ...
8118 (overlay-put (make-overlay beginning end) 'invisible 'my-symbol)
8119
8120 ...
8121 ;; When done with the overlays:
8122 (remove-from-invisibility-spec '(my-symbol . t))
8123 ;; Or respectively:
8124 (remove-from-invisibility-spec 'my-symbol)
8125
8126** Changes in syntax parsing.
8127
8128*** The syntax-directed buffer-scan functions (such as
8129`parse-partial-sexp', `forward-word' and similar functions) can now
8130obey syntax information specified by text properties, if the variable
8131`parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is non-nil.
8132
8133If the value of `parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is nil, the behavior
8134is as before: the syntax-table of the current buffer is always
8135used to determine the syntax of the character at the position.
8136
8137When `parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is non-nil, the syntax of a
8138character in the buffer is calculated thus:
8139
8140 a) if the `syntax-table' text-property of that character
8141 is a cons, this cons becomes the syntax-type;
8142
8143 Valid values of `syntax-table' text-property are: nil, a valid
8144 syntax-table, and a valid syntax-table element, i.e.,
8145 a cons cell of the form (SYNTAX-CODE . MATCHING-CHAR).
8146
8147 b) if the character's `syntax-table' text-property
8148 is a syntax table, this syntax table is used
8149 (instead of the syntax-table of the current buffer) to
8150 determine the syntax type of the character.
8151
8152 c) otherwise the syntax-type is determined by the syntax-table
8153 of the current buffer.
8154
8155*** The meaning of \s in regular expressions is also affected by the
8156value of `parse-sexp-lookup-properties'. The details are the same as
8157for the syntax-directed buffer-scan functions.
8158
8159*** There are two new syntax-codes, `!' and `|' (numeric values 14
8160and 15). A character with a code `!' starts a comment which is ended
8161only by another character with the same code (unless quoted). A
8162character with a code `|' starts a string which is ended only by
8163another character with the same code (unless quoted).
8164
8165These codes are mainly meant for use as values of the `syntax-table'
8166text property.
8167
8168*** The function `parse-partial-sexp' has new semantics for the sixth
8169arg COMMENTSTOP. If it is `syntax-table', parse stops after the start
8170of a comment or a string, or after end of a comment or a string.
8171
8172*** The state-list which the return value from `parse-partial-sexp'
8173(and can also be used as an argument) now has an optional ninth
8174element: the character address of the start of last comment or string;
8175nil if none. The fourth and eighth elements have special values if the
8176string/comment is started by a "!" or "|" syntax-code.
8177
8178*** Since new features of `parse-partial-sexp' allow a complete
8179syntactic parsing, `font-lock' no longer supports
8180`font-lock-comment-start-regexp'.
8181
8182** Changes in face features
8183
8184*** The face functions are now unconditionally defined in Emacs, even
8185if it does not support displaying on a device that supports faces.
8186
8187*** The function face-documentation returns the documentation string
8188of a face (or nil if it doesn't have one).
8189
8190*** The function face-bold-p returns t if a face should be bold.
8191set-face-bold-p sets that flag.
8192
8193*** The function face-italic-p returns t if a face should be italic.
8194set-face-italic-p sets that flag.
8195
8196*** You can now specify foreground and background colors for text
8197by adding elements of the form (foreground-color . COLOR-NAME)
8198and (background-color . COLOR-NAME) to the list of faces in
8199the `face' property (either the character's text property or an
8200overlay property).
8201
8202This means that you no longer need to create named faces to use
8203arbitrary colors in a Lisp package.
8204
8205** Changes in file-handling functions
8206
8207*** File-access primitive functions no longer discard an extra redundant
8208directory name from the beginning of the file name. In other words,
8209they no longer do anything special with // or /~. That conversion
8210is now done only in substitute-in-file-name.
8211
8212This makes it possible for a Lisp program to open a file whose name
8213begins with ~.
8214
8215*** If copy-file is unable to set the date of the output file,
8216it now signals an error with the condition file-date-error.
8217
8218*** The inode number returned by file-attributes may be an integer (if
8219the number fits in a Lisp integer) or a list of integers.
8220
8221*** insert-file-contents can now read from a special file,
8222as long as the arguments VISIT and REPLACE are nil.
8223
8224*** The RAWFILE arg to find-file-noselect, if non-nil, now suppresses
8225character code conversion as well as other things.
8226
8227Meanwhile, this feature does work with remote file names
8228(formerly it did not).
8229
8230*** Lisp packages which create temporary files should use the TMPDIR
8231environment variable to decide which directory to put them in.
8232
8233*** interpreter-mode-alist elements now specify regexps
8234instead of constant strings.
8235
8236*** expand-file-name no longer treats `//' or `/~' specially. It used
8237to delete all the text of a file name up through the first slash of
8238any `//' or `/~' sequence. Now it passes them straight through.
8239
8240substitute-in-file-name continues to treat those sequences specially,
8241in the same way as before.
8242
8243*** The variable `format-alist' is more general now.
8244The FROM-FN and TO-FN in a format definition can now be strings
8245which specify shell commands to use as filters to perform conversion.
8246
8247*** The new function access-file tries to open a file, and signals an
8248error if that fails. If the open succeeds, access-file does nothing
8249else, and returns nil.
8250
8251*** The function insert-directory now signals an error if the specified
8252directory cannot be listed.
8253
8254** Changes in minibuffer input
8255
8256*** The functions read-buffer, read-variable, read-command, read-string
8257read-file-name, read-from-minibuffer and completing-read now take an
8258additional argument which specifies the default value. If this
8259argument is non-nil, it should be a string; that string is used in two
8260ways:
8261
8262 It is returned if the user enters empty input.
8263 It is available through the history command M-n.
8264
8265*** The functions read-string, read-from-minibuffer,
8266read-no-blanks-input and completing-read now take an additional
8267argument INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD. If this is non-nil, then the
8268minibuffer inherits the current input method and the setting of
8269enable-multibyte-characters from the previously current buffer.
8270
8271In an interactive spec, you can use M instead of s to read an
8272argument in this way.
8273
8274*** All minibuffer input functions discard text properties
8275from the text you enter in the minibuffer, unless the variable
8276minibuffer-allow-text-properties is non-nil.
8277
8278** Echo area features
8279
8280*** Clearing the echo area now runs the normal hook
8281echo-area-clear-hook. Note that the echo area can be used while the
8282minibuffer is active; in that case, the minibuffer is still active
8283after the echo area is cleared.
8284
8285*** The function current-message returns the message currently displayed
8286in the echo area, or nil if there is none.
8287
8288** Keyboard input features
8289
8290*** tty-erase-char is a new variable that reports which character was
8291set up as the terminal's erase character when time Emacs was started.
8292
8293*** num-nonmacro-input-events is the total number of input events
8294received so far from the terminal. It does not count those generated
8295by keyboard macros.
8296
8297** Frame-related changes
8298
8299*** make-frame runs the normal hook before-make-frame-hook just before
8300creating a frame, and just after creating a frame it runs the abnormal
8301hook after-make-frame-functions with the new frame as arg.
8302
8303*** The new hook window-configuration-change-hook is now run every time
8304the window configuration has changed. The frame whose configuration
8305has changed is the selected frame when the hook is run.
8306
8307*** Each frame now independently records the order for recently
8308selected buffers, in its buffer-list frame parameter, so that the
8309value of other-buffer is now based on the buffers recently displayed
8310in the selected frame.
8311
8312*** The value of the frame parameter vertical-scroll-bars
8313is now `left', `right' or nil. A non-nil value specifies
8314which side of the window to put the scroll bars on.
8315
8316** X Windows features
8317
8318*** You can examine X resources for other applications by binding
8319x-resource-class around a call to x-get-resource. The usual value of
8320x-resource-class is "Emacs", which is the correct value for Emacs.
8321
8322*** In menus, checkboxes and radio buttons now actually work.
8323The menu displays the current status of the box or button.
8324
8325*** The function x-list-fonts now takes an optional fourth argument
8326MAXIMUM which sets a limit on how many matching fonts to return.
8327A smaller value of MAXIMUM makes the function faster.
8328
8329If the only question is whether *any* font matches the pattern,
8330it is good to supply 1 for this argument.
8331
8332** Subprocess features
8333
8334*** A reminder: it is no longer necessary for subprocess filter
8335functions and sentinels to do save-match-data, because Emacs does this
8336automatically.
8337
8338*** The new function shell-command-to-string executes a shell command
8339and returns the output from the command as a string.
8340
8341*** The new function process-contact returns t for a child process,
8342and (HOSTNAME SERVICE) for a net connection.
8343
8344** An error in running pre-command-hook or post-command-hook
8345does clear the variable to nil. The documentation was wrong before.
8346
8347** In define-key-after, if AFTER is t, the new binding now always goes
8348at the end of the keymap. If the keymap is a menu, this means it
8349goes after the other menu items.
8350
8351** If you have a program that makes several changes in the same area
8352of the buffer, you can use the macro combine-after-change-calls
8353around that Lisp code to make it faster when after-change hooks
8354are in use.
8355
8356The macro arranges to call the after-change functions just once for a
8357series of several changes--if that seems safe.
8358
8359Don't alter the variables after-change-functions and
8360after-change-function within the body of a combine-after-change-calls
8361form.
8362
8363** If you define an abbrev (with define-abbrev) whose EXPANSION
8364is not a string, then the abbrev does not expand in the usual sense,
8365but its hook is still run.
8366
8367** Normally, the Lisp debugger is not used (even if you have enabled it)
8368for errors that are handled by condition-case.
8369
8370If you set debug-on-signal to a non-nil value, then the debugger is called
8371regardless of whether there is a handler for the condition. This is
8372useful for debugging problems that happen inside of a condition-case.
8373
8374This mode of operation seems to be unreliable in other ways. Errors that
8375are normal and ought to be handled, perhaps in timers or process
8376filters, will instead invoke the debugger. So don't say you weren't
8377warned.
8378
8379** The new variable ring-bell-function lets you specify your own
8380way for Emacs to "ring the bell".
8381
8382** If run-at-time's TIME argument is t, the action is repeated at
8383integral multiples of REPEAT from the epoch; this is useful for
8384functions like display-time.
8385
8386** You can use the function locate-library to find the precise file
8387name of a Lisp library. This isn't new, but wasn't documented before.
8388
8389** Commands for entering view mode have new optional arguments that
8390can be used from Lisp. Low-level entrance to and exit from view mode
8391is done by functions view-mode-enter and view-mode-exit.
8392
8393** batch-byte-compile-file now makes Emacs return a nonzero status code
8394if there is an error in compilation.
8395
8396** pop-to-buffer, switch-to-buffer-other-window and
8397switch-to-buffer-other-frame now accept an additional optional
8398argument NORECORD, much like switch-to-buffer. If it is non-nil,
8399they don't put the buffer at the front of the buffer list.
8400
8401** If your .emacs file leaves the *scratch* buffer non-empty,
8402Emacs does not display the startup message, so as to avoid changing
8403the *scratch* buffer.
8404
8405** The new function regexp-opt returns an efficient regexp to match a string.
8406The arguments are STRINGS and (optionally) PAREN. This function can be used
8407where regexp matching or searching is intensively used and speed is important,
8408e.g., in Font Lock mode.
8409
8410** The variable buffer-display-count is local to each buffer,
8411and is incremented each time the buffer is displayed in a window.
8412It starts at 0 when the buffer is created.
8413
8414** The new function compose-mail starts composing a mail message
8415using the user's chosen mail composition agent (specified with the
8416variable mail-user-agent). It has variants compose-mail-other-window
8417and compose-mail-other-frame.
8418
8419** The `user-full-name' function now takes an optional parameter which
8420can either be a number (the UID) or a string (the login name). The
8421full name of the specified user will be returned.
8422
8423** Lisp packages that load files of customizations, or any other sort
8424of user profile, should obey the variable init-file-user in deciding
8425where to find it. They should load the profile of the user name found
8426in that variable. If init-file-user is nil, meaning that the -q
8427option was used, then Lisp packages should not load the customization
8428files at all.
8429
8430** format-time-string now allows you to specify the field width
8431and type of padding. This works as in printf: you write the field
8432width as digits in the middle of a %-construct. If you start
8433the field width with 0, it means to pad with zeros.
8434
8435For example, %S normally specifies the number of seconds since the
8436minute; %03S means to pad this with zeros to 3 positions, %_3S to pad
8437with spaces to 3 positions. Plain %3S pads with zeros, because that
8438is how %S normally pads to two positions.
8439
8440** thing-at-point now supports a new kind of "thing": url.
8441
8442** imenu.el changes.
8443
8444You can now specify a function to be run when selecting an
8445item from menu created by imenu.
8446
8447An example of using this feature: if we define imenu items for the
8448#include directives in a C file, we can open the included file when we
8449select one of those items.
8450\f
8451* Emacs 19.34 is a bug-fix release with no user-visible changes.
8452\f
8453* Changes in Emacs 19.33.
8454
8455** Bibtex mode no longer turns on Auto Fill automatically. (No major
8456mode should do that--it is the user's choice.)
8457
8458** The variable normal-auto-fill-function specifies the function to
8459use for auto-fill-function, if and when Auto Fill is turned on.
8460Major modes can set this locally to alter how Auto Fill works.
8461\f
8462* Editing Changes in Emacs 19.32
8463
8464** C-x f with no argument now signals an error.
8465To set the fill column at the current column, use C-u C-x f.
8466
8467** Expanding dynamic abbrevs with M-/ is now smarter about case
8468conversion. If you type the abbreviation with mixed case, and it
8469matches the beginning of the expansion including case, then the
8470expansion is copied verbatim. Using SPC M-/ to copy an additional
8471word always copies it verbatim except when the previous copied word is
8472all caps.
8473
8474** On a non-windowing terminal, which can display only one Emacs frame
8475at a time, creating a new frame with C-x 5 2 also selects that frame.
8476
8477When using a display that can show multiple frames at once, C-x 5 2
8478does make the frame visible, but does not select it. This is the same
8479as in previous Emacs versions.
8480
8481** You can use C-x 5 2 to create multiple frames on MSDOS, just as on a
8482non-X terminal on Unix. Of course, only one frame is visible at any
8483time, since your terminal doesn't have the ability to display multiple
8484frames.
8485
8486** On Windows, set win32-pass-alt-to-system to a non-nil value
8487if you would like tapping the Alt key to invoke the Windows menu.
8488This feature is not enabled by default; since the Alt key is also the
8489Meta key, it is too easy and painful to activate this feature by
8490accident.
8491
8492** The command apply-macro-to-region-lines repeats the last defined
8493keyboard macro once for each complete line within the current region.
8494It does this line by line, by moving point to the beginning of that
8495line and then executing the macro.
8496
8497This command is not new, but was never documented before.
8498
8499** You can now use Mouse-1 to place the region around a string constant
8500(something surrounded by doublequote characters or other delimiter
8501characters of like syntax) by double-clicking on one of the delimiting
8502characters.
8503
8504** Font Lock mode
8505
8506*** Font Lock support modes
8507
8508Font Lock can be configured to use Fast Lock mode and Lazy Lock mode (see
8509below) in a flexible way. Rather than adding the appropriate function to the
8510hook font-lock-mode-hook, you can use the new variable font-lock-support-mode
8511to control which modes have Fast Lock mode or Lazy Lock mode turned on when
8512Font Lock mode is enabled.
8513
8514For example, to use Fast Lock mode when Font Lock mode is turned on, put:
8515
8516 (setq font-lock-support-mode 'fast-lock-mode)
8517
8518in your ~/.emacs.
8519
8520*** lazy-lock
8521
8522The lazy-lock package speeds up Font Lock mode by making fontification occur
8523only when necessary, such as when a previously unfontified part of the buffer
8524becomes visible in a window. When you create a buffer with Font Lock mode and
8525Lazy Lock mode turned on, the buffer is not fontified. When certain events
8526occur (such as scrolling), Lazy Lock makes sure that the visible parts of the
8527buffer are fontified. Lazy Lock also defers on-the-fly fontification until
8528Emacs has been idle for a given amount of time.
8529
8530To use this package, put in your ~/.emacs:
8531
8532 (setq font-lock-support-mode 'lazy-lock-mode)
8533
8534To control the package behaviour, see the documentation for `lazy-lock-mode'.
8535
8536** Changes in BibTeX mode.
8537
8538*** For all entries allow spaces and tabs between opening brace or
8539paren and key.
8540
8541*** Non-escaped double-quoted characters (as in `Sch"of') are now
8542supported.
8543
8544** Gnus changes.
8545
8546Gnus, the Emacs news reader, has undergone further rewriting. Many new
8547commands and variables have been added. There should be no
8548significant incompatibilities between this Gnus version and the
8549previously released version, except in the message composition area.
8550
8551Below is a list of the more user-visible changes. Coding changes
8552between Gnus 5.1 and 5.2 are more extensive.
8553
8554*** A new message composition mode is used. All old customization
8555variables for mail-mode, rnews-reply-mode and gnus-msg are now
8556obsolete.
8557
8558*** Gnus is now able to generate "sparse" threads -- threads where
8559missing articles are represented by empty nodes.
8560
8561 (setq gnus-build-sparse-threads 'some)
8562
8563*** Outgoing articles are stored on a special archive server.
8564
8565 To disable this: (setq gnus-message-archive-group nil)
8566
8567*** Partial thread regeneration now happens when articles are
8568referred.
8569
8570*** Gnus can make use of GroupLens predictions:
8571
8572 (setq gnus-use-grouplens t)
8573
8574*** A trn-line tree buffer can be displayed.
8575
8576 (setq gnus-use-trees t)
8577
8578*** An nn-like pick-and-read minor mode is available for the summary
8579buffers.
8580
8581 (add-hook 'gnus-summary-mode-hook 'gnus-pick-mode)
8582
8583*** In binary groups you can use a special binary minor mode:
8584
8585 `M-x gnus-binary-mode'
8586
8587*** Groups can be grouped in a folding topic hierarchy.
8588
8589 (add-hook 'gnus-group-mode-hook 'gnus-topic-mode)
8590
8591*** Gnus can re-send and bounce mail.
8592
8593 Use the `S D r' and `S D b'.
8594
8595*** Groups can now have a score, and bubbling based on entry frequency
8596is possible.
8597
8598 (add-hook 'gnus-summary-exit-hook 'gnus-summary-bubble-group)
8599
8600*** Groups can be process-marked, and commands can be performed on
8601groups of groups.
8602
8603*** Caching is possible in virtual groups.
8604
8605*** nndoc now understands all kinds of digests, mail boxes, rnews news
8606batches, ClariNet briefs collections, and just about everything else.
8607
8608*** Gnus has a new backend (nnsoup) to create/read SOUP packets.
8609
8610*** The Gnus cache is much faster.
8611
8612*** Groups can be sorted according to many criteria.
8613
8614 For instance: (setq gnus-group-sort-function 'gnus-group-sort-by-rank)
8615
8616*** New group parameters have been introduced to set list-address and
8617expiration times.
8618
8619*** All formatting specs allow specifying faces to be used.
8620
8621*** There are several more commands for setting/removing/acting on
8622process marked articles on the `M P' submap.
8623
8624*** The summary buffer can be limited to show parts of the available
8625articles based on a wide range of criteria. These commands have been
8626bound to keys on the `/' submap.
8627
8628*** Articles can be made persistent -- as an alternative to saving
8629articles with the `*' command.
8630
8631*** All functions for hiding article elements are now toggles.
8632
8633*** Article headers can be buttonized.
8634
8635 (add-hook 'gnus-article-display-hook 'gnus-article-add-buttons-to-head)
8636
8637*** All mail backends support fetching articles by Message-ID.
8638
8639*** Duplicate mail can now be treated properly. See the
8640`nnmail-treat-duplicates' variable.
8641
8642*** All summary mode commands are available directly from the article
8643buffer.
8644
8645*** Frames can be part of `gnus-buffer-configuration'.
8646
8647*** Mail can be re-scanned by a daemonic process.
8648
8649*** Gnus can make use of NoCeM files to filter spam.
8650
8651 (setq gnus-use-nocem t)
8652
8653*** Groups can be made permanently visible.
8654
8655 (setq gnus-permanently-visible-groups "^nnml:")
8656
8657*** Many new hooks have been introduced to make customizing easier.
8658
8659*** Gnus respects the Mail-Copies-To header.
8660
8661*** Threads can be gathered by looking at the References header.
8662
8663 (setq gnus-summary-thread-gathering-function
8664 'gnus-gather-threads-by-references)
8665
8666*** Read articles can be stored in a special backlog buffer to avoid
8667refetching.
8668
8669 (setq gnus-keep-backlog 50)
8670
8671*** A clean copy of the current article is always stored in a separate
8672buffer to allow easier treatment.
8673
8674*** Gnus can suggest where to save articles. See `gnus-split-methods'.
8675
8676*** Gnus doesn't have to do as much prompting when saving.
8677
8678 (setq gnus-prompt-before-saving t)
8679
8680*** gnus-uu can view decoded files asynchronously while fetching
8681articles.
8682
8683 (setq gnus-uu-grabbed-file-functions 'gnus-uu-grab-view)
8684
8685*** Filling in the article buffer now works properly on cited text.
8686
8687*** Hiding cited text adds buttons to toggle hiding, and how much
8688cited text to hide is now customizable.
8689
8690 (setq gnus-cited-lines-visible 2)
8691
8692*** Boring headers can be hidden.
8693
8694 (add-hook 'gnus-article-display-hook 'gnus-article-hide-boring-headers)
8695
8696*** Default scoring values can now be set from the menu bar.
8697
8698*** Further syntax checking of outgoing articles have been added.
8699
8700The Gnus manual has been expanded. It explains all these new features
8701in greater detail.
8702\f
8703* Lisp Changes in Emacs 19.32
8704
8705** The function set-visited-file-name now accepts an optional
8706second argument NO-QUERY. If it is non-nil, then the user is not
8707asked for confirmation in the case where the specified file already
8708exists.
8709
8710** The variable print-length applies to printing vectors and bitvectors,
8711as well as lists.
8712
8713** The new function keymap-parent returns the parent keymap
8714of a given keymap.
8715
8716** The new function set-keymap-parent specifies a new parent for a
8717given keymap. The arguments are KEYMAP and PARENT. PARENT must be a
8718keymap or nil.
8719
8720** Sometimes menu keymaps use a command name, a symbol, which is really
8721an automatically generated alias for some other command, the "real"
8722name. In such a case, you should give that alias symbol a non-nil
8723menu-alias property. That property tells the menu system to look for
8724equivalent keys for the real name instead of equivalent keys for the
8725alias.
8726\f
8727* Editing Changes in Emacs 19.31
8728
8729** Freedom of the press restricted in the United States.
8730
8731Emacs has been censored in accord with the Communications Decency Act.
8732This includes removing some features of the doctor program. That law
8733was described by its supporters as a ban on pornography, but it bans
8734far more than that. The Emacs distribution has never contained any
8735pornography, but parts of it were nonetheless prohibited.
8736
8737For information on US government censorship of the Internet, and what
8738you can do to bring back freedom of the press, see the web site
8739`http://www.vtw.org/'.
8740
8741** A note about C mode indentation customization.
8742
8743The old (Emacs 19.29) ways of specifying a C indentation style
8744do not normally work in the new implementation of C mode.
8745It has its own methods of customizing indentation, which are
8746much more powerful than the old C mode. See the Editing Programs
8747chapter of the manual for details.
8748
8749However, you can load the library cc-compat to make the old
8750customization variables take effect.
8751
8752** Marking with the mouse.
8753
8754When you mark a region with the mouse, the region now remains
8755highlighted until the next input event, regardless of whether you are
8756using M-x transient-mark-mode.
8757
8758** Improved Windows NT/95 support.
8759
8760*** Emacs now supports scroll bars on Windows NT and Windows 95.
8761
8762*** Emacs now supports subprocesses on Windows 95. (Subprocesses used
8763to work on NT only and not on 95.)
8764
8765*** There are difficulties with subprocesses, though, due to problems
8766in Windows, beyond the control of Emacs. They work fine as long as
8767you run Windows applications. The problems arise when you run a DOS
8768application in a subprocesses. Since current shells run as DOS
8769applications, these problems are significant.
8770
8771If you run a DOS application in a subprocess, then the application is
8772likely to busy-wait, which means that your machine will be 100% busy.
8773However, if you don't mind the temporary heavy load, the subprocess
8774will work OK as long as you tell it to terminate before you start any
8775other DOS application as a subprocess.
8776
8777Emacs is unable to terminate or interrupt a DOS subprocess.
8778You have to do this by providing input directly to the subprocess.
8779
8780If you run two DOS applications at the same time in two separate
8781subprocesses, even if one of them is asynchronous, you will probably
8782have to reboot your machine--until then, it will remain 100% busy.
8783Windows simply does not cope when one Windows process tries to run two
8784separate DOS subprocesses. Typing CTL-ALT-DEL and then choosing
8785Shutdown seems to work although it may take a few minutes.
8786
8787** M-x resize-minibuffer-mode.
8788
8789This command, not previously mentioned in NEWS, toggles a mode in
8790which the minibuffer window expands to show as many lines as the
8791minibuffer contains.
8792
8793** `title' frame parameter and resource.
8794
8795The `title' X resource now specifies just the frame title, nothing else.
8796It does not affect the name used for looking up other X resources.
8797It works by setting the new `title' frame parameter, which likewise
8798affects just the displayed title of the frame.
8799
8800The `name' parameter continues to do what it used to do:
8801it specifies the frame name for looking up X resources,
8802and also serves as the default for the displayed title
8803when the `title' parameter is unspecified or nil.
8804
8805** Emacs now uses the X toolkit by default, if you have a new
8806enough version of X installed (X11R5 or newer).
8807
8808** When you compile Emacs with the Motif widget set, Motif handles the
8809F10 key by activating the menu bar. To avoid confusion, the usual
8810Emacs binding of F10 is replaced with a no-op when using Motif.
8811
8812If you want to be able to use F10 in Emacs, you can rebind the Motif
8813menubar to some other key which you don't use. To do so, add
8814something like this to your X resources file. This example rebinds
8815the Motif menu bar activation key to S-F12:
8816
8817 Emacs*defaultVirtualBindings: osfMenuBar : Shift<Key>F12
8818
8819** In overwrite mode, DEL now inserts spaces in most cases
8820to replace the characters it "deletes".
8821
8822** The Rmail summary now shows the number of lines in each message.
8823
8824** Rmail has a new command M-x unforward-rmail-message, which extracts
8825a forwarded message from the message that forwarded it. To use it,
8826select a message which contains a forwarded message and then type the command.
8827It inserts the forwarded message as a separate Rmail message
8828immediately after the selected one.
8829
8830This command also undoes the textual modifications that are standardly
8831made, as part of forwarding, by Rmail and other mail reader programs.
8832
8833** Turning off saving of .saves-... files in your home directory.
8834
8835Each Emacs session writes a file named .saves-... in your home
8836directory to record which files M-x recover-session should recover.
8837If you exit Emacs normally with C-x C-c, it deletes that file. If
8838Emacs or the operating system crashes, the file remains for M-x
8839recover-session.
8840
8841You can turn off the writing of these files by setting
8842auto-save-list-file-name to nil. If you do this, M-x recover-session
8843will not work.
8844
8845Some previous Emacs versions failed to delete these files even on
8846normal exit. This is fixed now. If you are thinking of turning off
8847this feature because of past experiences with versions that had this
8848bug, it would make sense to check whether you still want to do so
8849now that the bug is fixed.
8850
8851** Changes to Version Control (VC)
8852
8853There is a new variable, vc-follow-symlinks. It indicates what to do
8854when you visit a link to a file that is under version control.
8855Editing the file through the link bypasses the version control system,
8856which is dangerous and probably not what you want.
8857
8858If this variable is t, VC follows the link and visits the real file,
8859telling you about it in the echo area. If it is `ask' (the default),
8860VC asks for confirmation whether it should follow the link. If nil,
8861the link is visited and a warning displayed.
8862
8863** iso-acc.el now lets you specify a choice of language.
8864Languages include "latin-1" (the default) and "latin-2" (which
8865is designed for entering ISO Latin-2 characters).
8866
8867There are also choices for specific human languages such as French and
8868Portuguese. These are subsets of Latin-1, which differ in that they
8869enable only the accent characters needed for particular language.
8870The other accent characters, not needed for the chosen language,
8871remain normal.
8872
8873** Posting articles and sending mail now has M-TAB completion on various
8874header fields (Newsgroups, To, CC, ...).
8875
8876Completion in the Newsgroups header depends on the list of groups
8877known to your news reader. Completion in the Followup-To header
8878offers those groups which are in the Newsgroups header, since
8879Followup-To usually just holds one of those.
8880
8881Completion in fields that hold mail addresses works based on the list
8882of local users plus your aliases. Additionally, if your site provides
8883a mail directory or a specific host to use for any unrecognized user
8884name, you can arrange to query that host for completion also. (See the
8885documentation of variables `mail-directory-process' and
8886`mail-directory-stream'.)
8887
8888** A greatly extended sgml-mode offers new features such as (to be configured)
8889skeletons with completing read for tags and attributes, typing named
8890characters including optionally all 8bit characters, making tags invisible
8891with optional alternate display text, skipping and deleting tag(pair)s.
8892
8893Note: since Emacs' syntax feature cannot limit the special meaning of ', " and
8894- to inside <>, for some texts the result, especially of font locking, may be
8895wrong (see `sgml-specials' if you get wrong results).
8896
8897The derived html-mode configures this with tags and attributes more or
8898less HTML3ish. It also offers optional quick keys like C-c 1 for
8899headline or C-c u for unordered list (see `html-quick-keys'). Edit /
8900Text Properties / Face or M-g combinations create tags as applicable.
8901Outline minor mode is supported and level 1 font-locking tries to
8902fontify tag contents (which only works when they fit on one line, due
8903to a limitation in font-lock).
8904
8905External viewing via browse-url can occur automatically upon saving.
8906
8907** M-x imenu-add-to-menubar now adds to the menu bar for the current
8908buffer only. If you want to put an Imenu item in the menu bar for all
8909buffers that use a particular major mode, use the mode hook, as in
8910this example:
8911
8912 (add-hook 'emacs-lisp-mode-hook
8913 '(lambda () (imenu-add-to-menubar "Index")))
8914
8915** Changes in BibTeX mode.
8916
8917*** Field names may now contain digits, hyphens, and underscores.
8918
8919*** Font Lock mode is now supported.
8920
8921*** bibtex-make-optional-field is no longer interactive.
8922
8923*** If bibtex-maintain-sorted-entries is non-nil, inserting new
8924entries is now done with a faster algorithm. However, inserting
8925will fail in this case if the buffer contains invalid entries or
8926isn't in sorted order, so you should finish each entry with C-c C-c
8927(bibtex-close-entry) after you have inserted or modified it.
8928The default value of bibtex-maintain-sorted-entries is nil.
8929
8930*** Function `show-all' is no longer bound to a key, since C-u C-c C-q
8931does the same job.
8932
8933*** Entries with quotes inside quote-delimited fields (as `author =
8934"Stefan Sch{\"o}f"') are now supported.
8935
8936*** Case in field names doesn't matter anymore when searching for help
8937text.
8938
8939** Font Lock mode
8940
8941*** Global Font Lock mode
8942
8943Font Lock mode can be turned on globally, in buffers that support it, by the
8944new command global-font-lock-mode. You can use the new variable
8945font-lock-global-modes to control which modes have Font Lock mode automagically
8946turned on. By default, this variable is set so that Font Lock mode is turned
8947on globally where the buffer mode supports it.
8948
8949For example, to automagically turn on Font Lock mode where supported, put:
8950
8951 (global-font-lock-mode t)
8952
8953in your ~/.emacs.
8954
8955*** Local Refontification
8956
8957In Font Lock mode, editing a line automatically refontifies that line only.
8958However, if your change alters the syntactic context for following lines,
8959those lines remain incorrectly fontified. To refontify them, use the new
8960command M-g M-g (font-lock-fontify-block).
8961
8962In certain major modes, M-g M-g refontifies the entire current function.
8963(The variable font-lock-mark-block-function controls how to find the
8964current function.) In other major modes, M-g M-g refontifies 16 lines
8965above and below point.
8966
8967With a prefix argument N, M-g M-g refontifies N lines above and below point.
8968
8969** Follow mode
8970
8971Follow mode is a new minor mode combining windows showing the same
8972buffer into one tall "virtual window". The windows are typically two
8973side-by-side windows. Follow mode makes them scroll together as if
8974they were a unit. To use it, go to a frame with just one window,
8975split it into two side-by-side windows using C-x 3, and then type M-x
8976follow-mode.
8977
8978M-x follow-mode turns off Follow mode if it is already enabled.
8979
8980To display two side-by-side windows and activate Follow mode, use the
8981command M-x follow-delete-other-windows-and-split.
8982
8983** hide-show changes.
8984
8985The hooks hs-hide-hooks and hs-show-hooks have been renamed
8986to hs-hide-hook and hs-show-hook, to follow the convention for
8987normal hooks.
8988
8989** Simula mode now has a menu containing the most important commands.
8990The new command simula-indent-exp is bound to C-M-q.
8991
8992** etags can now handle programs written in Erlang. Files are
8993recognised by the extensions .erl and .hrl. The tagged lines are
8994those that begin a function, record, or macro.
8995
8996** MSDOS Changes
8997
8998*** It is now possible to compile Emacs with the version 2 of DJGPP.
8999Compilation with DJGPP version 1 also still works.
9000
9001*** The documentation of DOS-specific aspects of Emacs was rewritten
9002and expanded; see the ``MS-DOS'' node in the on-line docs.
9003
9004*** Emacs now uses ~ for backup file names, not .bak.
9005
9006*** You can simulate mouse-3 on two-button mice by simultaneously
9007pressing both mouse buttons.
9008
9009*** A number of packages and commands which previously failed or had
9010restricted functionality on MS-DOS, now work. The most important ones
9011are:
9012
9013**** Printing (both with `M-x lpr-buffer' and with `ps-print' package)
9014now works.
9015
9016**** `Ediff' works (in a single-frame mode).
9017
9018**** `M-x display-time' can be used on MS-DOS (due to the new
9019implementation of Emacs timers, see below).
9020
9021**** `Dired' supports Unix-style shell wildcards.
9022
9023**** The `c-macro-expand' command now works as on other platforms.
9024
9025**** `M-x recover-session' works.
9026
9027**** `M-x list-colors-display' displays all the available colors.
9028
9029**** The `TPU-EDT' package works.
9030\f
9031* Lisp changes in Emacs 19.31.
9032
9033** The function using-unix-filesystems on Windows NT and Windows 95
9034tells Emacs to read and write files assuming that they reside on a
9035remote Unix filesystem. No CR/LF translation is done on any files in
9036this case. Invoking using-unix-filesystems with t activates this
9037behavior, and invoking it with any other value deactivates it.
9038
9039** Change in system-type and system-configuration values.
9040
9041The value of system-type on a Linux-based GNU system is now `lignux',
9042not `linux'. This means that some programs which use `system-type'
9043need to be changed. The value of `system-configuration' will also
9044be different.
9045
9046It is generally recommended to use `system-configuration' rather
9047than `system-type'.
9048
9049See the file LINUX-GNU in this directory for more about this.
9050
9051** The functions shell-command and dired-call-process
9052now run file name handlers for default-directory, if it has them.
9053
9054** Undoing the deletion of text now restores the positions of markers
9055that pointed into or next to the deleted text.
9056
9057** Timers created with run-at-time now work internally to Emacs, and
9058no longer use a separate process. Therefore, they now work more
9059reliably and can be used for shorter time delays.
9060
9061The new function run-with-timer is a convenient way to set up a timer
9062to run a specified amount of time after the present. A call looks
9063like this:
9064
9065 (run-with-timer SECS REPEAT FUNCTION ARGS...)
9066
9067SECS says how many seconds should elapse before the timer happens.
9068It may be an integer or a floating point number. When the timer
9069becomes ripe, the action is to call FUNCTION with arguments ARGS.
9070
9071REPEAT gives the interval for repeating the timer (measured in
9072seconds). It may be an integer or a floating point number. nil or 0
9073means don't repeat at all--call FUNCTION just once.
9074
9075*** with-timeout provides an easy way to do something but give
9076up if too much time passes.
9077
9078 (with-timeout (SECONDS TIMEOUT-FORMS...) BODY...)
9079
9080This executes BODY, but gives up after SECONDS seconds.
9081If it gives up, it runs the TIMEOUT-FORMS and returns the value
9082of the last one of them. Normally it returns the value of the last
9083form in BODY.
9084
9085*** You can now arrange to call a function whenever Emacs is idle for
9086a certain length of time. To do this, call run-with-idle-timer. A
9087call looks like this:
9088
9089 (run-with-idle-timer SECS REPEAT FUNCTION ARGS...)
9090
9091SECS says how many seconds of idleness should elapse before the timer
9092runs. It may be an integer or a floating point number. When the
9093timer becomes ripe, the action is to call FUNCTION with arguments
9094ARGS.
9095
9096Emacs becomes idle whenever it finishes executing a keyboard or mouse
9097command. It remains idle until it receives another keyboard or mouse
9098command.
9099
9100REPEAT, if non-nil, means this timer should be activated again each
9101time Emacs becomes idle and remains idle for SECS seconds The timer
9102does not repeat if Emacs *remains* idle; it runs at most once after
9103each time Emacs becomes idle.
9104
9105If REPEAT is nil, the timer runs just once, the first time Emacs is
9106idle for SECS seconds.
9107
9108*** post-command-idle-hook is now obsolete; you shouldn't use it at
9109all, because it interferes with the idle timer mechanism. If your
9110programs use post-command-idle-hook, convert them to use idle timers
9111instead.
9112
9113*** y-or-n-p-with-timeout lets you ask a question but give up if
9114there is no answer within a certain time.
9115
9116 (y-or-n-p-with-timeout PROMPT SECONDS DEFAULT-VALUE)
9117
9118asks the question PROMPT (just like y-or-n-p). If the user answers
9119within SECONDS seconds, it returns the answer that the user gave.
9120Otherwise it gives up after SECONDS seconds, and returns DEFAULT-VALUE.
9121
9122** Minor change to `encode-time': you can now pass more than seven
9123arguments. If you do that, the first six arguments have the usual
9124meaning, the last argument is interpreted as the time zone, and the
9125arguments in between are ignored.
9126
9127This means that it works to use the list returned by `decode-time' as
9128the list of arguments for `encode-time'.
9129
9130** The default value of load-path now includes the directory
9131/usr/local/share/emacs/VERSION/site-lisp In addition to
9132/usr/local/share/emacs/site-lisp. You can use this new directory for
9133site-specific Lisp packages that belong with a particular Emacs
9134version.
9135
9136It is not unusual for a Lisp package that works well in one Emacs
9137version to cause trouble in another. Sometimes packages need updating
9138for incompatible changes; sometimes they look at internal data that
9139has changed; sometimes the package has been installed in Emacs itself
9140and the installed version should be used. Whatever the reason for the
9141problem, this new feature makes it easier to solve.
9142
9143** When your program contains a fixed file name (like .completions or
9144.abbrev.defs), the file name usually needs to be different on operating
9145systems with limited file name syntax.
9146
9147Now you can avoid ad-hoc conditionals by using the function
9148convert-standard-filename to convert the file name to a proper form
9149for each operating system. Here is an example of use, from the file
9150completions.el:
9151
9152(defvar save-completions-file-name
9153 (convert-standard-filename "~/.completions")
9154 "*The filename to save completions to.")
9155
9156This sets the variable save-completions-file-name to a value that
9157depends on the operating system, because the definition of
9158convert-standard-filename depends on the operating system. On
9159Unix-like systems, it returns the specified file name unchanged. On
9160MS-DOS, it adapts the name to fit the limitations of that system.
9161
9162** The interactive spec N now returns the numeric prefix argument
9163rather than the raw prefix argument. (It still reads a number using the
9164minibuffer if there is no prefix argument at all.)
9165
9166** When a process is deleted, this no longer disconnects the process
9167marker from its buffer position.
9168
9169** The variable garbage-collection-messages now controls whether
9170Emacs displays a message at the beginning and end of garbage collection.
9171The default is nil, meaning there are no messages.
9172
9173** The variable debug-ignored-errors specifies certain kinds of errors
9174that should not enter the debugger. Its value is a list of error
9175condition symbols and/or regular expressions. If the error has any
9176of the condition symbols listed, or if any of the regular expressions
9177matches the error message, then that error does not enter the debugger,
9178regardless of the value of debug-on-error.
9179
9180This variable is initialized to match certain common but uninteresting
9181errors that happen often during editing.
9182
9183** The new function error-message-string converts an error datum
9184into its error message. The error datum is what condition-case
9185puts into the variable, to describe the error that happened.
9186
9187** Anything that changes which buffer appears in a given window
9188now runs the window-scroll-functions for that window.
9189
9190** The new function get-buffer-window-list returns a list of windows displaying
9191a buffer. The function is called with the buffer (a buffer object or a buffer
9192name) and two optional arguments specifying the minibuffer windows and frames
9193to search. Therefore this function takes optional args like next-window etc.,
9194and not get-buffer-window.
9195
9196** buffer-substring now runs the hook buffer-access-fontify-functions,
9197calling each function with two arguments--the range of the buffer
9198being accessed. buffer-substring-no-properties does not call them.
9199
9200If you use this feature, you should set the variable
9201buffer-access-fontified-property to a non-nil symbol, which is a
9202property name. Then, if all the characters in the buffer range have a
9203non-nil value for that property, the buffer-access-fontify-functions
9204are not called. When called, these functions should put a non-nil
9205property on the text that they fontify, so that they won't get called
9206over and over for the same text.
9207
9208** Changes in lisp-mnt.el
9209
9210*** The lisp-mnt package can now recognize file headers that are written
9211in the formats used by the `what' command and the RCS `ident' command:
9212
9213;; @(#) HEADER: text
9214;; $HEADER: text $
9215
9216in addition to the normal
9217
9218;; HEADER: text
9219
9220*** The commands lm-verify and lm-synopsis are now interactive. lm-verify
9221checks that the library file has proper sections and headers, and
9222lm-synopsis extracts first line "synopsis'"information.
9223
9224
a933dad1 9225\f
3787e12e 9226* For older news, see the file ONEWS
a933dad1
DL
9227
9228----------------------------------------------------------------------
9229Copyright information:
9230
424d8b44 9231Copyright (C) 1999, 2000 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
a933dad1
DL
9232
9233 Permission is granted to anyone to make or distribute verbatim copies
9234 of this document as received, in any medium, provided that the
9235 copyright notice and this permission notice are preserved,
9236 thus giving the recipient permission to redistribute in turn.
9237
9238 Permission is granted to distribute modified versions
9239 of this document, or of portions of it,
9240 under the above conditions, provided also that they
9241 carry prominent notices stating who last changed them.
9242\f
9243Local variables:
9244mode: outline
9245paragraph-separate: "[ \f]*$"
9246end: